Dramatically simplifying voice and data networking

USER MANUAL V5.0

Disclaimer
Precautions have been taken to assure accuracy of the information written in this user’s manual. Typographic or pictorial errors that are brought to our attention will be corrected in subsequent issues. Product specifications in this manual are nominal and are provided for the convenience of our customers. They are all correct at the date of publication. Critical Links reserves the right to make product changes from time to time, without prior notification, which may change certain specifications or characteristics shown. We therefore recommend you to check for changes or updates before using for customer projects or further product developments No material will be accepted for return unless Critical Links grants permission in writing. The handling, installation and usage of the edgeBOX are applicable to certain environments and may be required for code compliance. Features of the device will not provide protection against abuse, misuse, improper installation or maintenance. It is important that installation, operation and maintenance are performed in accordance with instructions supplied in the manual. Electricity and electrical devices must always be treated with caution and respect.

Product Support
The edgeBOX software is distributed according to the End User License Agreement EULA included at the end of this User Guide. By using the software you agree to be bound by this EULA. If you do not agree to the terms and limitations of the EULA you should not use the software.

End User License Agreement
For product technical support please visit the following web site http://www.edgebox.com or contact us at the following email address: support@critical-links.com.

Critical Links, Inc
695 Route 46 West Fairfield, NJ 07004 USA Phone: 973.276.9006 Support Hotline: +1 888 433 4326 Website: www.critical-links.com Email: support@critical-links.com

4

edgeBOX 5.0 Help

Table of Contents
1. About edgeBOX 10

..................................................................................................................... 11 1.1. Introducing the award-winning edgeBOX ..................................................................................................................... 12 1.2. edgeBOX's main features 1.3. Unpack ..................................................................................................................... 13 and setup edgeBOX ..................................................................................................................... 14 1.4. Connecting to edgeBOX's web interface ..................................................................................................................... 16 1.5. Understanding edgeBOX's web interface ..................................................................................................................... 19 1.6. Connecting to edgeBOX's console ..................................................................................................................... 20 1.7. Working with edgeBOX's LCD panel ..................................................................................................................... 21 1.8. License, Hardware and Software

2. Initial Configuration 3. Dashboard 4. Network

22 26 29

..................................................................................................................... 30 4.1. Configure the internet connection (WAN interface)
......................................................................................................................................................... 30 through another device such as a cable modem or a router ......................................................................................................................................................... 31 through a DSL/PPPoE connection

4.2. Change..................................................................................................................... 32 the local network properties (LAN) 4.3. Change..................................................................................................................... 33 the DMZ settings ..................................................................................................................... 34 4.4. View and manage VLANs ..................................................................................................................... 35 4.5. Interfaces Physical and Logical Status 4.6. Monitor..................................................................................................................... 36 connections through edgeBOX 4.7. Change..................................................................................................................... 37 edgeBOX's hostname and network domain ..................................................................................................................... 38 4.8. View the system routes ..................................................................................................................... 39 4.9. Manage static routes ..................................................................................................................... 40 4.10. Wireless
......................................................................................................................................................... 41 Configure and turn on the wireless network ......................................................................................................................................................... 43 Indicate the type of authentication ......................................................................................................................................................... 46 Make the wireless network more secure ......................................................................................................................................................... 47 Make the wireless network public

..................................................................................................................... 47 4.11. Managing the DNS server
......................................................................................................................................................... 48 Adding or Editing DNS domains .................................................................................................................................................. 48 How to add a Master domain .................................................................................................................................................. 50 How to add a Slave domain .................................................................................................................................................. 51 How to add a Forwarder domain ......................................................................................................................................................... 51 Changing global DNS Settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 52 Managing DNS ACLs ......................................................................................................................................................... 53 Managing hosts on an existing domain

Critical Links, Inc.

Network

5

..................................................................................................................... 54 4.12. Use Dynamic DNS 4.13. Using ..................................................................................................................... 55 the DHCP service
......................................................................................................................................................... 56 Assign IP addresses using Ranges ......................................................................................................................................................... 57 Assign IP addresses using MAC-IP rules ......................................................................................................................................................... 58 Configure DHCP advanced settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 59 DHCP Leases

..................................................................................................................... 59 4.14. Manage the Webcache size and sites 4.15. Using ..................................................................................................................... 60 NAT and Port Forwarding 4.16. Using ..................................................................................................................... 61 QoS
QoS Upload......................................................................................................................................................... 63 configuration ......................................................................................................................................................... 64 QoS Download configurations ......................................................................................................................................................... 64 Service Classification ......................................................................................................................................................... 65 Internet and DMZ QoS statistics

5. VPN

67
General ......................................................................................................................................................... 69 Advanced .................................................................................................................................................. 70

5.1. IPSec ..................................................................................................................... 67

5.2. PPTP ..................................................................................................................... 71
......................................................................................................................................................... 72 PPTP Properties

5.3. L2TP

..................................................................................................................... 73

6. Security

75

..................................................................................................................... 75 6.1. Firewall
......................................................................................................................................................... 76 Securing the Internet and DMZ links ......................................................................................................................................................... 76 Securing Internal Connections ......................................................................................................................................................... 77 Using Advanced Firewall Rules

6.2. Setting ..................................................................................................................... 79 up a DMZ ..................................................................................................................... 80 6.3. Enabling NAT for the private networks ..................................................................................................................... 80 6.4. Using Port Forwarding ..................................................................................................................... 81 6.5. Website Access Restrictions
Domains ......................................................................................................................................................... 82 ......................................................................................................................................................... 83 Words in URL

..................................................................................................................... 83 6.6. Install and Manage Anti Virus Engines ..................................................................................................................... 83 6.7. Scanning Shared Folders for viruses ..................................................................................................................... 84 6.8. Scanning E-Mail for Viruses
Messages ......................................................................................................................................................... 85 ......................................................................................................................................................... 86 Actions Quarantine......................................................................................................................................................... 86

..................................................................................................................... 87 6.9. Scanning E-Mail for SPAM

7. Office Servers

89

..................................................................................................................... 89 7.1. Manage your web sites and intranets
......................................................................................................................................................... 90 Setting up multiple websites

..................................................................................................................... 92 7.2. E-mail Server and Webmail
......................................................................................................................................................... 92 E-mail Queue

Critical Links, Inc.

....................................................................................................................... 128 Internal Dial Plan ............................... 118 Connecting ISDN Phones Automatic......................... 143 ISDN PRI............... 100 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 115 Analog phone extensions and fax machines ................................................... Inc............................................................ 139 8..................................................................................................................................... Windows Server ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 140 VoIP Providers ..................................................... 119 configuration of phone devices ............................................................................................................................. 103 7........................ 136 Rules Definition .................................................... 143 ISDN BRI...... 135 your outgoing call rules .... Configuring incoming call rules ....................................................................................................................................5..................................................................................................................................................................... 108 8.......................................................... 111 Creating phones .................................................................................................................................. 151 Call Pick-Up Critical Links........................................................................................................................................................................... Phone............................. 116 ISDN Phone extensions ........................................... 106 Overview .............................................................................................................. 96 SMTP Access Control ...................................... 146 FXO-FXS 8................................................................ Windows Shared Printers 8.................................................... 149 Group Calls ................................. 138 Emergency number .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................0 Help ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 99 7.................................................................................................................................................. 97 7...................................................................................................................................................................... 142 Remote Offices Hardware ....................................................................................................................3................................................................................................................ 113 SIP and IAX phone extensions ....................................................................................... Configuring Voice Lines .....................................2................................................ 133 Defining Automated Attendant menus Schedules............... ............................................................................ 93 E-mail domains and Webmail Aliases and.............................................................................................4..................................................................................................... 94 Settings and Permissions .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6.......................................................................................................... 103 Temporary Shared Folders ............................................................................................ 147 operations .................................................................................................................... 135 8............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 123 Phone Groups and Access Control Twinning ........................................................................... 129 8..................................... 150 Call Listening and Call Whispering .....................................................5.......................................................... 136 Authentication .........1................ 149 Intercom Calls .... Windows Shared Folders Shares ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ IP-PBX.................3...................................................................... 109 Understanding the Phones list ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................4...................................................................................................................................................................... Managing your phones ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 148 Blind and Supervised Transfers .................................................................................................................................................................................................................6 edgeBOX 5.......................................................... 102 Setup Share Permissions ............................................................................... 122 Auto Configuration Modes ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 141 ENUM service ......................................................................... 93 Mailing Lists ........................................................................... 118 Connecting Analog Phones and FAX machines ............................................................................................................. Define................................................................................................................................................................................. 126 ................................................................................................................... 117 Connecting VoIP Phones ....................................................... 146 How to change configuration mode (E1 / T1) Analogue.................................................... IP-PBX and VoIP 105 8............................. 130 Creating incoming call rules .......................................................................................... 144 ............................. 116 Connecting phones ..............................................................................................................

................................................ MailFax Service ............................................................... Delegate a Local Administrator ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 194 9........................... 152 .......................... 158 8.........................6.......................... Groups ...........................................................................................................13.............................................................. 154 8....... Advanced VoIP Options Voicemail .................................................. 175 network users ................................... 169 8......................... 181 Using a remote RADIUS Server ................................................... 179 Authentication ............................................................................................... 174 9.......................................................................... Default Predefined Phone Numbers 9......................... 189 Fine tunning Internet and DMZ access Access to ....................................................................................................................................................5..................................................................................................................................................... Adjusting Date and Time Critical Links..................... 162 8.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. VoIP ......................................................................... 162 ............................................................................... 184 the user login web page ................................................................................................................................................................. 190 other VLANs ........................................... 164 Sound Files .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................729 Licensing ................... Configure authorized RADIUS clients 10.......................................................................... 167 Manager Interface Advanced........10........................................CDR ......................... Managing Call Queues Advanced................................... 153 Labeling CDR records with Cost Centers ............................................................................12........................9............................................................................................................................................................ View currently Connected Users ............................... Music On-Hold .............. Authentication ............ 157 Settings for Queues ...................................... 155 8......................................15............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 172 activity logs ..8......................................................... 163 Call Parking Operation.................................................................. Users 174 Managing ............................................................................1...........................................................................................................................................3............................................ Inc......... ............................................................ 165 Define Country Zone ............................................................... 151 Follow Me .................................................................... 196 10....... Conference Rooms ......................................................................................................................................................... 166 G....... 194 9..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 172 8........... 191 9..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1....................................................... System 196 ......................................................................................................................................14...........................................................................................................................................................................2................................................................................... 170 8..................................................................IP-PBX and VoIP 7 Twinning ....................................................4........................... Codecs ................................ 181 Using remote authentication .................. Privileges ............................................................................................................................................................................. 191 9.................. 182 Using a remote LDAP Server ..................................................................................... 183 Using a remote AD Server Customize................................................................................ 168 NAT ................. 179 Default Quota Activating...7............................................................................. 153 One Touch Recording ............................................................................................... 161 How to send a fax using MailFax? .............................................. 177 Importing and Exporting Users .......................................... 165 Echo Cancellation ..... 166 Billing Service .....................11.................................................. 159 8........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 163 Key Codes Customize...................................................................................................... 186 9............................ Automatic Call Recording 8....................

Maintenance ............................................................................................. 202 Backup Scheduled............................................................ 212 Disk Notifications Replacing ............................................................... User Services and Applications 237 .................................................................................................................................................................. 234 E-mail ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 221 11........ 223 Load .............................................. Managing Software Updates ..................... Reporting 221 ................................................... 216 10........................................................................ Users General .. 227 Web Server Firewall ................................................ 210 10..............................................5......................................................................................................................................................................... 222 ................................................................... Webmail 12..................................................... 198 10....3................................................................................................................................. 219 10......... Services Control Panel ........................................................................................................ 234 HTTP Access .......................................................................................................11....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 229 E-mail ................ 211 10............................... 217 10.......................................................................................8 edgeBOX 5..15......................................................................3..............................2..................................................................................................0 Help ....... 217 10....................................................... 233 Accounting ........ 231 VPN ....................................................................................................... Using HotBackup for redundancy Managing ............ 243 Operator Panel (FOP) Critical Links..................................................................................................................................... 230 VoIP .............................................................................................. 235 VoIP ..........12...2...................... Temporary Shared Folders ................................................................................................ 225 ................................................................... 236 VPN 12............................... 215 10.................................................................. Services ..........................................................................7........................................................ Reading and Managing System Logs ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 208 software updates in a Hotbackup scenario ................6............................................................................ 201 10........................................... Hardware Monitor ....................................................... .........................................................................................................................14............................................................................................................. 232 .... 199 10............................ Managing and Diagnosing RAID ................ 221 CPU Memory .... Flash...........................................................1.................. 238 12........................................ System ................................................................................. Diagnostic Tools ......................................... 212 a faulty disk ......................................... RADIUS Accounting ........................................................................8.............................................................. Notifications .............................................................3........................................10......................... 218 10....................................... Remote Management 11...................................................2..... 232 11...................... 214 10............................................................................................................................................. 242 12.................................................................................................................................................. 228 ................................13.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Administration .............................................................................................. 224 Disk Usage Interfaces.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Backup & Restore Immediate................... 203 Backups ...................................................................................................................... 213 10.......................... Inc........................................................................................... 226 HTTP Access ................ 205 10......................... SNMP .............4...................................................................................................... 226 11............................9...1................................................................................

................................................ 258 ...........7................ 270 13. Inc.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 269 13............................................................................................................................................ .................................... Appendix G: Usernames and Passwords Critical Links.........................................................................................2............................................................................................................................................................ 268 VLAN Scenario 4 .................................................. 248 Agent .................................................................................................................. 250 Typical Caller Scenario 13........................................ 262 13....................................................................... Appendix C: Windows Integration ................... 251 13................................................................................................................. 248 call Barging ...................................................... 249 Park-Unpark Calls .............................................................................................................................. 253 Putting it all together ............ 254 13...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 267 VLAN Scenario 3 ........................................................................... Appendix F: edgeBOX Network Services .............................................User Services and Applications 9 FOP Login................................................ 248 Create an..................................................................... Appendix D: VLAN based Infrastructure ................ 261 Shared Folder on Windows ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 265 VLAN Scenario 2 ..................................... 253 Remote configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................... 264 VLAN Scenario 1 ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5.............................................. 260 13............. 249 Queue Managment .......................................................1...........1x WPA ............................................................................................................................................... Appendix E: Factory Reset ..................................................................................6......................4.................................................................................................. 256 .......................... 271 13..... 250 Conference Calls ....................................................................................................... 251 Require users to login vs Privileges policies .................................................................. 251 Authentication architecture .................................................................................................... 260 Adding a Windows Host to edgeBOX Domain Mapping a............................................................................................................................ Appendices 251 ................................................................................................................................................................... 246 Initiate a Call ............. 244 ............................................................................. 247 External Calls Transfer a............................................................................................................................................... Appendix B: Connecting to Wireless 802...............................................................................................................................................................3............................................................................................................................. Appendix A: Authentication ............................................

with advanced File and Print sharing.Privileges. . Security tools. Hardware and Software Critical Links. network access profiles . Introducing the award-winning edgeBOX edgeBOX's main features Unpack and install edgeBOX to the network Connecting to edgeBOX's web interface Understanding edgeBOX's web interface Connecting to edgeBOX's console Working with edgeBOX LCD panel License. While all this is commonly delivered using up to 8 different independent products/devices. Critical-Links' edgeBOX provides an unified architecture and delivers all this in a single product. Wi-Fi Access Point. comprehensive Networking. Specifically. data and IT functions at a Small and Medium Business (SMB) into one single appliance. Windows Server . it provides IP-PBX and VoIP. such as Anti Virus and Firewall and SMB Office Servers (e-mail / web server / windows server).0 Help 1 About edgeBOX Critical Links’ edgeBOX is a network appliance that consolidates the voice.10 edgeBOX 5. Inc. Quality of Service (QoS).

The edgeBOX: 1. Environmentally (and economically) friendly · Much smaller carbon footprint lower power/space consumption · Lower waste generated at end of life The edgeBOX eliminates the traditionally painful trade-off between features. ISDN PRI/BRI.1 Introducing the award-winning edgeBOX The edgeBOX appliance comes in 3 different form factors (with different redundancy & faulttolerance options). Increases Productivity and Convenience at the SMB · Provides the broadest range of voice. T-1/E-1 etc). even remotely 3. Reduces initial investment & recurring operational expenses over 60% · Initial cost reduced to less than a third of a multi-device solution · Recurring costs are nominal. SMBs have had to incur a high degree of complexity (due to the many devices and vendors needed to be managed) and the attendant cost (due to expensive IT support) to get much needed voice and data features. Now with the edgeBOX a customer can get a broad range of voice. The edgeBOX comes with a wide range of interfaces to connect to the Internet and the PSTN (such as FXO/FXS. complexity and cost at a SMB. Dramatically simplifies the SMB voice and data infrastructure · It replaces up to 8 independent products/devices with 1 device · Reduces maintaining & managing several devices (and vendors) 2. unified interface. Inc. Ethernet. data Critical Links.About edgeBOX 11 1. Every edgeBOX has an intuitive GUI that allows the user to access the box and configure the various functions very easily. . remote. it also provides a customer the ability to customize the settings to support their environment. NOTE: The box already comes with a set of default configurations that will allow most customers to just literally power on the box and begin to use it. simplified management 4. data and IT capability · Managed through a simple.

Content Management System (for managing website content). In addition. Current edgePACKs include the Learning Management System (for academia). The edgeBOX. The number of features available on the edgeBOX is unmatched competitively and it provides more voice and data services than most SMBs would require currently. and edgeExchange (for e-mail. etc. monitoring and management of several edgeBOX appliances as well. in addition to configuring the IP-PBX. by integrating the voice. Quality of Service (QoS). also allowing the configuration of a registered domain name. have to also be usually configured. 695 Route 46 West Fairfield. Inc. Inc.critical-links. and making all of them work together. Cable modems or other WAN Broadband devices.276. for example. also ensures a best-of-breed solution that is competitively superior in terms of both feature richness and cost. The edgeBOX incorporates a set of functional capabilities that are necessary when provisioning voice and data services at a SMB. Critical Links.12 edgeBOX 5. based on open source standards. are also available for specific vertical segments.com 1-888-4-EDGEBOX 1. NJ 07004 U. these further augment the networking services in the edgeBOX with application oriented capabilities. further enhancing the user experience. This not only reduces the upfront cost but also speeds up service turn up.2 edgeBOX's main features · · Internet connections using ADSL. If a VoIP service is to be provisioned. calendar and content sharing). The SMBs can now focus on their core competence instead of worrying about the cost and complexity of managing their networking The edgeBOX. interoperability.973. The edgeBOX is changing the rules of the game for the SMB. Supports dynamic and static IP Address assignment. All this can be done right in the edgeBOX appliance from a GUI and without having to concern about the peculiarity of different devices. . Router tables.S. Firewall.9006 www. value-added application packages called edgePACKs. More information on the edgeBOX: Critical Links. A remote based management system ensures remote provisioning. in one appliance and managed by a simple GUI dramatically reduces the complexity and brings down the costs. e-mail server.0 Help and IT services for a fraction of existing costs. further simplifying and cost reducing maintenance. data and IT features. The edgeBOX comes provisioned with a default configuration for the router/switch settings and also for commonly used SIP phones.A +1.

Supports optional RADIUS session servers. Supports 802. User time and traffic based accounting. Inc. VPN tunnels based on the IPSec standard or the PPTP protocol. Integrated e-mail access using the internal web server. Backup and Restore of edgeBOX's configuration and of users's data. Possibility of reserving bandwidth for important users in your company or for high priority traffic types. etc. DNS Server for both local private domain or as a master name server on the Internet. IMAP and POP3 Servers.1x Port based authentication with Single Sign On. Support for SMTP Relay for Road Warriors. 3. 1. Show you how to power up the appliance. Interactive Services. Introduce you to all the edgeBOX components. Supports DynDNS or No-IP.3 Unpack and setup edgeBOX To install the edgeBOX onto your network please consult the Quick Start Guide flyer that was sent to you with your edgeBOX appliance. 802. The guide will quickly: 1. User based access control to manage accesses to the network resources. VoIP Features. 4.About edgeBOX 13 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · DHCP server on the Intranet side with optional automatic name range generation. Dynamic DNS. Explain the elements and connectors in the rear and front panels. Call Rules. Traffic control in inbound and outbound traffic. Group based access control for third part applications integrated with edgeBOX. Optional Wireless Network with edgeBOX's access point. with optional home pages for every user of the network. Conference calls. LDAP Server or using Active Directory. Tell you how to connect edgeBOX to your Internet Modem and Ethernet Switch. Full access control over the internal network services and the Internet access. Sound Manager. VLAN aware router. . See who is on your network and from what IP address. including support for line fail over. Phone Auto Configuration. such as voice traffic. Fax2Mail and Mail2Fax. Supports Local User Authentication or Remote User Authentication using a RADIUS Server. Hunt Groups. System updates from a remote server.1Q and Inter-VLAN access policies. A web server on both the Internet and Intranet side. Critical Links. 2. Support for a dynamic Intranet with content management capabilities. Internet E-Mail Server with anti-spam control.

The LAN interface is initially configured with the IP address 192.0 for Subnet-Mask.168. use 255.100.255.com or https://192. With a browser.168.100. · Or configure it with a static IP address: the IP address used must lie in the 192. Inc.50).168. 2. use 192. Then. This way. After the page opens.0 Help 1.168.168.254 for Nameserver. . or · to a hub or a switch connected to edgeBOX's LAN interface.254 for Default Gateway. the first task after you connect the edgeBOX to the network is to change the default configuration.100.4 Connecting to edgeBOX's web interface The edgeBOX appliance is configured with a default factory configuration.254:8011. from the computer: 1.100.0/24 range (ex. open the webpage https://myedgebox. also 192. Typically.100.100.255. click the Login link. Critical Links.254 and DHCP is active. so that it meets your requirements. to connect your computer to the edgeBOX: · Configure it to automatically obtain it's local network IP Address from the edgeBOX using DHCP (recommended). 192. You can perform the initial configuration from a computer connected either: · directly to edgeBOX's LAN interface.14 edgeBOX 5.168.

System and Reporting sections and menus. Office Servers. Feel free to click the links and navigate the interface. To use the edgeBOX web interface you'll need the Java Plug-in installed: Java Runtime Environment version 6. Security. Inc. for security reasons you should change it).About edgeBOX 15 edgeBOX initial page 3. At the top you'll also find links to the Network. VPN. Users. Use admin for username and root for password to login (this is the default password. . This will help you get familiar with edgeBOX. IP-PBX. The edgeBOX web interface will then start loading. hit the Login button. please note it might take a few moments and you may have to accept one ore more warning messages due to the Java Platform. When loading completes you will see the Dashboard page with a quick overview of some relevant edgeBOX variables and it's global status. Critical Links.

16 edgeBOX 5. When you see the Dashboard you are succesfully connected to edgeBOX's web administration interface. Congratulations. ready to start configuring it. or · jump to the Initial Configuration section to get a an initial roadmap. Critical Links.5 Understanding edgeBOX's web interface edgeBOX's administration web interface makes use of several common user interface concepts and resources .such as graphical symbols. At this point you might want to: · have a look at the Understanding edgeBOX's web interface page of this manual. popup dialogs and others. 1.0 Help edgeBOX webadmin initial page: the Dashboard That's it. Inc. . This page introduces those common concepts and resources and explains their global meaning and usage scenarios. buttons. This helps to improve the user's experience while maintaining overall coherence among similar operations and concepts across distinct panels and dialogs.

Then. If you click the links you'll get immediate access to those configurations in a new popup window. you can make any quick changes you need and get back to your starting point. Service Status and Service Start/Stop The Service Status Bar [4] shows you the current operational status of the corresponding edgeBOX service: the green color indicates the service is active while gray is be used for services Critical Links. Navigation is a two-step interaction: choose the Section you want from the sections bar [1] at the top and. Sections are subdivided into Menus. select the configuration Menu from the menus list [2] at the left. Once there you get a summary overview with current configurations and the most relevant status variables concerning the topic involved. This gives you an alternate and useful navigation path. Related Topics In each Menu you'll find context specific links to other related configuration menus in the Related Topics corner [3].About edgeBOX 17 The following image displays most of these features and will be used as a starting point for further explanations below: Navigation The interface is divided into Sections. once that section loads. . Inc.

but also in other situations . · in any situation.Cancel cancels While configuring edgeBOX you'll enter data into several dialogs. Depending on the complexity of the operations being executed you may need to wait a little bit. By clicking them you actually instruct edgeBOX to change the administrative status of the service. New lets you create new entries. in order to apply your changes to edgeBOX. Lists with Filters Some of the lists presented may grow a lot as you add new entries. At the right end.Delete All over the interface these three operations [5] are executed in innumerous situations. On the left. the Service Status Bar gives you control over the service by means of the Start Service and Stop Service options. it's a way to say: "Please wait. . In the example image above we are trying to search for a user called Alves. Critical Links. Inc. you need to press Save at some point. New .Edit . For faster search.18 edgeBOX 5. By entering the alv sequence our search is considerably narrowed and it's now easy to find the person we are searching for. Glass Pane: in order to keep your interaction with edgeBOX even safer. an informative text message is displayed accordingly. press Cancel. Please note: these are global principles that should hold true in the great majority of the situations you might find. If you feel lost.usually when you press Save. this also means that.the interface is covered with a Glass Pane that prevents you from pressing any buttons or interacting with the interface. when in doubt. In several situations the sequence of popups that need your input may even become a bit more complex.0 Help that are not running. please keep in mind: · none of the changes you made is actually applied to edgeBOX until you press Save. Edit allows you to change an existing entry and Delete let's you remove configurations. the red color is used for error situations. we are busy". if you press Cancel the dialog is immediately aborted and no changes are propagated to edgeBOX. during the configuration sequences between the administration interface and edgeBOX itself . those lists include a filtering option [6] that lets you quickly search for specific entries. or if you're in doubt. Save applies .

the Status Bar [8] shows you when the interface is busy interacting with edgeBOX. enter help <SOMETHING> to get specific help on <SOMETHING>. The screen should display a prompt requesting a login/password to be entered. Inc. on Windows you can use Hyperterminal. Now that you have a global understanding of the interface you can jump to the Initial Configuration section to get a roadmap. If edgeBOX encounters some error then a red X will be shown. At the eOS> prompt type help to get a list of available options. If the operation is successful a green V sign will be displayed. 1. on Linux open a terminal and use the ssh command (ex: ssh admin@myedgebox. you will be confined to the limited set of commands available. Rx and Tx wires are "crossed") serial cable to the serial port in the rear panel and the other end to your laptop's serial port. from the internal network you can use the address myedgebox. the Privilege you are assigned to needs to have access to SSH. on Linux you can use minicom. Critical Links. use no hardware or software flow control. Entrer the usual admin username and it's password (root if not changed). no parity bit. You can acces the CLI in three diferent ways: · keyboard/VGA: connect a keyboard to the PS2 port or any of the USB ports located on the rear panel. · SSH: you need to have SSH service active on your Firewall. 38400N8 (38400 bit/s. However. . connect a monitor to the VGA port located in the rear panel. Clicking it will open a new browser window directly into the correct page of this manual. Status Bar Located in the lower-left corner.6 Connecting to edgeBOX's console It is also possible to connect directly to edgeBOX's console to manage the appliance using a Command Line Interface (CLI).com). 8 databits).About edgeBOX 19 Context Sensitive Help Usually located at the top-right corner you will find the Help icon [7]. if you have the Authentication service running. on Windows you can use putty.com or the LAN interface IP Address. · Serial Port: connect a null-modem (also known as serial cross-over cable.

Use the command line only if you are an advanced user. · Gateway Address .7 Working with edgeBOX's LCD panel The edgeBOX LCD panel is a simple information panel available on Business and Enterprise appliances. edgeBOX's LCD panel View information about the network To see information about the network on the LCD panel. · press the Power button again. service status will show you a list of services and their current and administrative operational status. Using it incorrectly may compromise edgeBOX's correct functioning or even stop it to work completely. 1. press the Up or Down buttons near the LCD screen.DMZ IP address.The IP address of the Internal Network. The DMZ is often used as an internal Server network.Firewall On.0 Help ex: help service shows you a usage summary of all commands starting with service.Enabled (LAN based users are required to authenticate) or disabled (LAN based user are not required to authenticate) Shutdown the edgeBOX To shutdown the edgeBOX. The information available is: · LAN IP . · Firewall Status . . Critical Links.The IP address of the Internet Connection. · DMZ IP . press the Power button.20 edgeBOX 5. if the firewall is enabled or Firewall Off.Default Gateway IP Address. and edgeBOX will beep twice and start the shutdown process. if it is disabled. · WAN IP . edgeBOX will beep. Then. · User Authentication Status . Inc.

You can also shutdown the edgeBOX using the web interface.." will be displayed in the LCD.About edgeBOX 21 · or press the LCD Enter button. · Network users limit: maximum number of users allowed for this licence.8 License. hardware settings and license definitions..Administration section. Hardware and Software By clicking the about link at the top-right corner. Wait. · Version 5. · License Serial Number: edgeBOX license. . 29/06/2009: software version. System . · Hardware Description: hardware reference and serial number. you'll get information about edgeBOX's software version. Build 1. Critical Links. edgeBOX will start the shutdown process and the message "Shutting down system. To do this go to the Webadmin interface. build number and build date. Inc. · Product Licensed to: licence owner (person or company).0. each edgeBOX has a distinct license. 1.

whatever you may do . has it's own IP Address. make VoIP calls to another country .is composed of computers. and so does edgeBOX. When you get connected you can jump to Step 1 and get started configuring edgeBOX Step 1: Connecting edgeBOX to the Internet .LAN · Concept: your internal network .through this interface edgeBOX reaches all those LAN devices and all of them know how to reach edgeBOX if they need to. · Hands On: Configure the internet connection (WAN interface) Step 2: Setup your Internal Network .keep in mind: edgeBOX is the gateway to the outside world. IP Phones and other miscellaneous IP devices like printers and so.your LAN. edgeBOX is Critical Links. In seven simple configuration steps you'll understand the concepts and review the sections in this manual where the configuration details are covered. send an e-mail. each and every device interacting in a TCP/IP network.0 Help 2 Initial Configuration If you've just turned edgeBOX on for the first time. the first step is to connect it's WAN interface to the internet. Inc. they all communicate by connecting to the so-called TPC/IP Ethernet infrastructure and the messages thus interchanged are all identified with two distinguishing marks: the IP Address of the sender and the IP Address of the destination computer or server. all IP devices in your network will somehow find a way to make messages reach edgeBOX's LAN interface IP Address and edgeBOX will know how to send them back IP messages identified with it's own LAN IP Address.access the Internet. for short .WAN · Concept: edgeBOX is supposed to work as the main link between any devices/systems in your internal network and the Internet. you need to assign such an address to the LAN interface of edgeBOX . First: you need to open the webadmin interface If you haven't done this before please follow the steps in the Connecting to edgeBOX's web interface section of this manual. so. . you need to make an initial basic configuration so that edgeBOX can start managing your network and services. laptops. like yours.22 edgeBOX 5.

Inc. edgebox. several edgeBOX features rely on a correct Date and Time in order to operate in a timely fashion as expected by network users and other processes. you can call eboxhead to the first and eboxbranch to the other. then a possible domain could be megasoft. for example.. fileserver. · Hands On: Change edgeBOX's hostname and network domain Step 4: Check and adjust edgeBOX's Date & Time · Concept: edgeBOX. the domain is the name by which your network is known. · Hands On: Change the local network properties (LAN) Step 3: Specify a hostname and a domain name · Concept: the hostname is the name by which the edgeBOX is known in the network (the name that the computers in the network use to refer to the edgeBOX).loc. then you can give your network the domain you want. additionally you should adjust your Timezone too: edgeBOX is shipped to use timezone Europe/London. com. keeps it's own date and time internally. but if you do. it's very important that you consider always having your Firewall service up and running (don't turn it off unless you really need to). if you have a registered domain. such as mycompany.. a hostname is a descriptive name (gateway. that domain is visible to everyone in the world throughout the Internet. like critical-links. if your company is called MegaSoft. if you have two offices with an edgeBOX in each. you can and should adjust Date and Time. don't change it if you don't need to. edgeBOX is shipped with the Firewall service running and this.Initial Configuration 23 shipped with the LAN 192. alone. · Hands On: Adjusting Date and Time Step 5: Overview your Firewall and secure your network · Concept: the Firewall is possibly the most important network security resource shipped with edgeBOX. as any other computer.168. is enough for providing a very high degree of Critical Links. this domain will be private and visible only within your network. then you can use that public domain. change it to your location.254 IP Address previously configured for you. if you do not have a registered domain.com. printerhost). for example. .100. you can choose any name you want.

by default the list is empty: that means that. Users are central in edgeBOX. edgeBOX Firewall working principle is the definition of Allow/Deny rules for specific network services and protocols. access to the Internet. the fundamental concept you should keep in mind is: if my users don't need this service then I will make it unavailable at the Firewall or if that specific service is not supposed to be accessible to the Internet then the Firewall will block any requests to it. .. well. to let only specific users access the network. as more people join your company edgeBOX will always be ready to provide resources for them: a Phone. that is configuring your Firewall. this could be good if you need to administer edgeBOX from home: later on you may come consider this unnecessary. right now you may just want to start configuring the Firewall. a popup window will show you the list of forbidden services for your internal network. by default. · Hands On: at this moment let's just take a look around to get familiar. furthermore you need to consider Security: if you'll allow everyone to use your network or just let specific users to use it. the Firewall menu will load by default.24 edgeBOX 5. and you may wish to increase security even further by removing the Webadmin from the Internet allowed services. to provide the maximum security possible to itself and to your network.. you need to manage (create. a great deal of effort has been put into making edgeBOX a user oriented product. link. Users have needs. this means that the administration web interface is available from the outside world. edgeBOX will automatically determine the best Firewall settings and use them. to follow this section through up to Step 7 to get the whole picture.. Users want to share files and need Phones to chat internally or to make long distance calls. if you really wish to do it. go to the Security section in the Webadmin interface. just jump to the Firewall section in this manual for the details ( don't start configuring the Firewall until you have read that section of the manual and you are confident on what you're doing). Step 6: Add a User and a Phone · Concept: edgeBOX is for Users. Inc.. a personal web page.. we advise you. Users want to make Phone calls. but. by default only Ping and Webadmin services are allowed from the Internet. nevertheless. Critical Links... but let's leave it for later.. you name it. edit and delete users) them and setup authentication services. Users want to use services. notice the services that have allowed access for connections from the Internet.0 Help security for your network users and services. allowing access only to specific users gives your network more security.. once you decide the services that should or shouldn't be available. this is where you would add some service that you'dd wish not to be available internally. click the Internal Connections. a personal Windows Share for documents. your internal users can access all edgeBOX services.

. At the end of Step 7. Step 7: Change the webadmin password · Concept: you should change the password. yet very important. let's leave it be. please change it immediately. please review the following Next Steps and feel free to navigate around. the admin password is used to access the Webadmin interface. · Hands On: in the Webadmin interface click the System section and choose the Administration menu. create Windows Shared Folders ? change User Privileges ? activate Webmail ? secure the Internet (WAN) interface ? configure the Firewall for internal connections ? enforce Authentication ? setup VLANs ? Critical Links. right now. follow the details here... at home. · Hands On: go to the Users section in the Webadmin interface and follow the details here Managing Network Users. pick a password you can remember and write it down in some safe place..Initial Configuration 25 Authentication is actually a very important aspect but. this is a simple.. Inc.. concept.. Next Steps: how do I . you have a pretty good picture of edgeBOX's basics.. edgeBOX is shipped with a default password for the admin user: "root". or some place away from work. you should change it. adding a new User and a Phone for the new user is an easy task.. go for it.. To step into more advanced edgeBOX features you might need for your network. please realize: adminroot is a very simple guess for most hackers and password exploits and attacks. away from edgeBOX. . if you expose edgeBOX to the Internet this risk is even higher.

5 minutes and 15 minutes process load average). Information is provided in the form of values. . · Temperature: motherboard temperature (if available). colors and icon behaviours and refreshed every 30 seconds.processor load indicator (from left to right: 1 minute.26 edgeBOX 5. Critical Links. 7/6/2009 17:13 and 14d 11h 32m in the picture.0 Help 3 Dashboard The Dashboard provides a quick summary overview of the most relevant edgeBOX variables and status informations in an intuitive graphical display. · Processor: · CPU usage . Inc. · Load . The Dashboard is divided into: System · Date & Uptime: current Date and Uptime (time elapsed since last boot). · Memory: current instantaneous RAM usage/total and current instantaneous SWAP usage/ total.percent CPU usage (averaged over a 5 minutes interval).

as in the picture.160 in the picture. if the LAN connector does not have link (cable disconnected at one of the ends). as depicted. if all three tests fail then a red 'X' icon will be shown instead. as depicted. as depicted. · Line Color: the line connecting edgeBOX to the LAN will be green. in the situation depicted edgeBOX detects link on the LAN connector and active LAN hosts. gray-scale otherwise. WWW · WAN IP Address: the currently configured IP address for the WAN interface. LAN · IP Address: the currently configured IP address for the LAN interface (default VLAN). you should stay alert. · Firewall: colored. gray-scale otherwise. red otherwise. · WWW icon: colored. 192. If any of the horizontal bars changes to yellow. if the Firewall service is running. if WWW is accessible as depicted. · Connection Status: the red connection status icon (a red triangle with an exclamation mark ' ! ' inside) will show up if any of the three tests fails: something is not operating as expected. . · Gateway Test: green if edgeBOX is able to ping the Default Gateway. red otherwise.51 in the picture.126. · LAN icon: colored. On in the Critical Links. that means you should try to diagnose the problem and take action to prevent any damage or operational instability. · Authentication: On or Off. then a red 'X' icon will be shown instead. if the three tests are successful it will not show up. red otherwise.168. if no link is detected the line will change color to gray. Inc. gray-scale otherwise. on the other hand.5. if your LAN seems operating normally (both LAN link is detected and LAN hosts activity is detected too). · DNS Test: green if edgeBOX can access an operational DNS service. If.5.Dashboard 27 · Storage: current instantaneous System Storage and Home Storage percent occupation/ total. as depicted. · Line Color: green indicates edgeBOX considers the WAN connection is fully operational with respect to those 3 tests. tells you if the User Authentication service is active. as depicted. · Connection Status: the red connection status icon (a red triangle with an exclamation mark ' ! ' inside) will show up if no LAN hosts are detected (see the also DMZ explanation). if link is detected on the LAN connector (meaning that edgeBOX is actually connected to an active network device). · Browsing Test: green if edgeBOX can actually browse the World Wide Web. you get persistent reds. 10. as depicted. gray otherwise.

· DMZ icon: colored if link is detected and DMZ hosts activity is detected too. software updates or other. · Connection Status: same behaviour as for the LAN. Critical Links.. the information icon will show up in the lower-left corner. · Line Color: same behaviour as for the LAN. such as system messages. 4 in the picture. the picture shows that the DMZ connector is actually connected to some device . gray otherwise.28 edgeBOX 5.link detected. · Connected Devices: the number of wireless clients currently connected (6 in the picture). A new popup window will display them. Please read them carefully.168. gray-scale otherwise (as depicted). · Users Logged In: the amount of users currently authenticated. link. System Messages · There are new system messages: when new notifications arrive. Just click the Read Messages.254 in the picture. 15 in the picture. 192. · SSID: the current wireless SSID is displayed within parentheses (mywifi in the picture). DMZ · IP Address: the current IP address on the DMZ interface. · Ongoing Calls: the amount of phone calls currently in progress. Inc.. in the picture the ' ! ' sign is showing: that means that no hosts are being detected on that interface.200. Wifi If your system has wireless. . 2 in the picture. · Phones Online: the amount of phones currently active.0 Help picture. the Wifi icon will show you: · Line Color: green if WiFi is enabled (as in the picture).

edgeBOX includes a DHCP server that allows you to automatically assign IP Addresses to the computers in your network based on ranges of IP address or based on specific IP Addresses.DMZ for your Internet servers and other special purposes. Use Diagnostic Tools to solve connectivity issues. view IP routes managed by the edgeBOX (system routes) and create and manage your own routes (static routes). Setup a Demilitarized Zone . change the local network (LAN) properties. manage access controls (ACLs) or use Dynamic DNS. configure edgeBOX's DNS server: add and remove domains.NAT . . manage DHCP. WPA and 802.QoS: assure bandwidth for services and users.to allow computers on the network to connect to outer networks like the Internet. overview your virtual networks (VLANs) and specify a domain and a hostname.Network 29 4 Network The Network section is where you can overview and configure most details and functionalities of your network. Setup and secure your Wifi network with WEP. Inc.Port Forwarding. Allow remote computers to access services on a specific host or hosts within your private network .1x. · · · · · · Related Topics: · Cache Websites · Firewall Critical Links. List web sites that you do not want the edgeBOX to cache. Manage Quality of Service . · · · · · · set the internet connection (WAN). Use Network Address Translation .

1 Configure the internet connection (WAN interface) To configure how edgeBOX connects to the Internet or to another wide area network you should choose the Internet Connection menu in the Network section.0 Help 4.. Those settings override any static or dynamic DNS settings configured for the WAN interface in the Internet Connection menu. . Related Topics: · Cache Websites · Firewall · NAT · Dynamic DNS · Internet Traffic · Diagnostic Tools 4. Inc.1. if displayed. Click the Change. you can choose to: Critical Links.. for the Internet Connection will not be displayed here. If the DNS service is not running edgeBOX will use the DNS servers configured and displayed in the Internet Connection menu. There you will be able to change the configuration for the external WAN Interface.1 through another device such as a cable modem or a router If. button to select how edgeBOX connects to the Internet: · through another device such as a cable modem or a router or · through a DSL/PPPoE connection. The Primary DNS and. in your setup. the Secondary DNS fields represented in the Internet Connection menu will automatically revert to the first and second entries in the Forward DNS Servers list. The DNS servers configured. If you change the Forward DNS Servers list and you have the DNS service running.30 edgeBOX 5. because edgeBOX is actually not using them. edgeBOX connects through another device such as a cable modem or a router. statically or dynamically. edgeBOX will use these DNS servers for all external DNS queries.

4.2 through a DSL/PPPoE connection If edgeBOX connects through DSL/PPPoE connection.Network 31 Obtain the data for the connection automatically from the device (DHCP) If you chose the DHCP connection method. Click the Settings. The edgeBOX will get all needed information from the DHCP server Use statically configured IP settings (Static) You need to provide the: · IP Address · Netmask · Gateway · Primary DNS (IP Address) · Alternative DNS (IP Address .. Activate the Override MTU check-box. Inc. 3. 2. Advanced Options .MTU If your Internet Service Provider requests it. The primary and alternative DNS servers you type here will be added to the list of DNS Servers in the Forward DNS Servers list. . you don't need to enter any additional information. you need to provide: Connection Settings For this type of connections you must type your username and password (please contact your Internet Service Provider in order to correctly determine these two settings). press Ok.optional). 1. button. Type-in the MTU size as agreed with your Internet Service Provider. 4.. Advanced Options In the Advanced Options menus you should specify how your connection details will be configured Advanced Options Critical Links.1. Press Save. you can change MTU (Maximum size of the packets).

select the option Override MTU and change the value in the text field to the value requested by your ISP.32 edgeBOX 5. 1. in the VLAN field. 2. There you will find a list of all your networks (including VLANs). as specified by the ISP.254. type in your browser the address https://10. in that case. If you change the edgeBOX’s IP Address to 10. type the VLAN. Inc. you should navigate to the Networks menu in the Network section.. Type the network mask in the field Subnet Mask. if you select this option. you may loose access to the edgeBOX web management.1. close your browser. 4.1. button: Connection You should choose to: · Obtain the IP Address automatically or specify it yourself. make sure you re-adjust your IP address (DHCP or static). If your computer receives the IP dynamically from the edgeBOX. · Obtain the Gateway automatically or specify it yourself. to do it. · Obtain DNS Servers automatically or specify the desired DNS servers.. and you can proceed. View example. View example. · You may also need to change the properties of the network connection of the computer you are using to manage the edgeBOX. you may need to ask the Critical Links. this may be required by your Internet Service Provider (ISP). · PPPoE over VLAN: select this option if you belong to one of your Internet Service Provider's VLANs.0 Help Click the Settings. or simply to adjust your LAN interface IP address. Choose the LAN network from the list and click the Edit button at the top of the Networks table.254:8011.1.1.2 Change the local network properties (LAN) To change the properties of your local (internal) networks. . your ISP may require this. If you change the local network IP address while you are accessing edgeBOX from the LAN segment. Type the desired IP Address for the edgeBOX (IP Address for the edgeBOX’s internal interface) in the IP Address field. Packets · MTU: In this section you can override the MTU (Maximum size of the packets). · You need to indicate the new address of the edgeBOX in the browser to connect to the edgeBOX’s web management.

Click the Apply button in the bottom right corner of the tab. Change the IP Address and the Netmask fields with the desired information. . you need go change that address to a new IP address of the network. Or if you have defined a static address in the connections of your computer. Related Topics: · Cache Websites · Firewall · NAT · Dynamic DNS · Internet Traffic · Network · Interfaces · DMZ · Diagnostic Tools 4. 3. Select the Enable DHCP Server on this Interface if you wish to have DHCP also on the DMZ network. Inc. even if you have Firewall based DMZ services active. Please note: you can activate the DHCP service on the DMZ interface.3 Change the DMZ settings To change the properties of your DMZ network you should navigate to the Networks menu in the Network section.Network 33 operating system to repair the connection to gets a new IP address. Choose the DMZ network from the list and click the Edit button at the top of the Networks table. There you will find a list of all networks currently managed by edgeBOX. 2. Related Topics: Critical Links. 1.

Why to use VLANs? VLANs offer higher performance because they limit packet broadcasts in the network. The status icon will turn green.For example. Define the Guest VLAN Critical Links. Each computer on this VLAN will have an IP address in this segment. . Change the properties of a VLAN 1. a VLAN can isolate those users from the remaining network so that information will not be accessible for other groups. Disable or enable a VLAN To disable an enabled VLAN select the desired enabled VLAN from the list and click Disable at the top of the list.If you have groups of users that need more security due to the type of information they share between each other. · Increase security . Change the desired properties of the VLAN: · Name – A descriptive name to allow you to identify each VLAN. For more details on edgeBOX's VLANs and possible scenarios please refer to Appendix D: VLAN Based Infrastructure.34 edgeBOX 5. 2. · Tag – The number that will be used on the network packets to allow the edgeBOX to send the packet to the correct VLAN. Select the desired VLAN from the list and click the Edit button. · Easily manage the network . Each VLAN tag must be different. Your switch should be configured accordingly · IP Address and Netmask of the VLAN – edgeBOX will be active on this VLAN with this IP address. for instance. to: · Control bandwidth usage and make the network faster .0 Help · DMZ Traffic 4.For example.4 View and manage VLANs edgeBOX allows you to have up to five VLANs active on your network. separate users that have VoIP phones from users that do not have them. They also provide additional security by separating groups of devices. The VLAN status icon will become red. To enable a disabled VLAN select it and click the Enable button. You can use VLANs. you have more than 200 devices on your local network and your local network is getting slower because there is too much broadcast traffic (data that is sent from one computer to all computers in the network). VLANs will limit the broadcast only to the specified group of devices within a VLAN instead of broadcasting to all devices in the network. Inc. To manage VLANs navigate to the Networks menu in the Network section.

Choose the Use as Guest VLAN the VLAN: and pick the VLAN to be used as Guest VLAN. Click the Define a Guest VLAN. · IP address: the current IP configuration (IP/netmask) of this bridged virtual interface. logical or physical. the Guest VLAN is the VLAN the network users are temporarily assigned to if they haven't authenticated yet or if they have introduced an incorrect username or password. This panel is accessible in the Related Topcis corner of the Networks menu . It is divided into three major sections: Bridges Here you'll find virtual interfaces used by edgeBOX to logically "attach" several other. eth3. If you don't wish to have a Guest VLAN make sure you select the Have no Guest VLAN option at step 2. 3. thus. That's the case of the br0 interface: it commonly bridges together the eth0 (LAN). Inc. The informations available are: · Interfaces: the current composition of the bridge (eth1. After they authenticate. 2. to be treated transparently by edgeBOX kernel as your LAN. interfaces together: same as saying Bridges. . if exists). The information displayed is somewhat detailed in that it shows you how edgeBOX implements certain networking aspects using specific techniques like Bridging and VLANs. Configure your switch accordingly: to do this you must configure you switch to use that VLAN as the Guest VLAN.Network 35 When you use 802. option. if available) and the ath0 (your wireless interface. This means that the br0 brings together those interfaces in order to. the eth3 (AUX. back in the Networks list the choosen Guest VLAN will be identified with an appropriate note.. refered to as br0. Critical Links. To configure the Guest VLAN: 1. 4...1x authentication on your switch. they are assigned to their respective VLANs. View an example where VLAN 6 is used as the Guest VLAN.Network section..5 Interfaces Physical and Logical Status If you need to determine the current physical. operational or logical status of edegBOX's network physical or logical interfaces you need to load the Interfaces popup. This VLAN usually has limited network privileges. It is commonly used to display information about how the users can authenticate properly onto the network. ath0 for example). form a virtual interface.

· IP address: the current IP configuration (IP/netmask) of this interface. . Critical Links. · Interface Status: you'll get a graphical indication of Up/Down status and the interface current connection bit rate in Mbps. In that case the IP address you're searching for will be found in the respective entry in the Bridges section. For each of them: · MAC Address: the interface physical address. If you don't find the IP address for some of these interfaces it just might happen that they are bridged. if available.1Q VLAN ID or Tag in use. for example. like VLAN_D or SERVERS. VLANs This section of the panel shows you your VLANs. Inc..6 Monitor connections through edgeBOX In certain situations you will need to determine exactly which network connections are actively passing through edgeBOX or determine if a given IP address is currently connected to some internet server. eth2 and so. this Tag is the means by which your VLAN enabled switch or other VLAN enabled Ethernet devices can tell to which VLAN each packet belongs.0 Help Physical Devices Shows you a list of physical network interfaces found in the system. Related Topics: · What are VLANs ? · How do I configure and manage VLANs in edgeBOX ? · I need more details on deploying VLAN based scenarios with edgeBOX.36 edgeBOX 5. The Network popup will help you with that. For example: eth0. 4. For each of them: · Tag: the 802. Each is identified by it's assigned name. this is a distinguishing marker identifying packets destined at a given VLAN. · IP address: the current IP configuration (IP/netmask) of edgeBOX in this VLAN.. or hardware address.

. Inc.7 Change edgeBOX's hostname and network domain You can find the Hostname in the Hostname and Domain menu. usually identified by a mnemonic indicating a well know network service like sip or http. Connections passing through edgeBOX This list shows you the network connections currently maintained by edgeBOX. Status and traffic of edgeBOX's network interfaces The upper part of this panel shows you a graphical overview of your network interfaces: Internet Local Network and DMZ. · Source Port: transport protocol level source port. As example. john-laptop. What is the Hostname? The Hostname is the name by which the edgeBOX is known in the network (the name that the computers of the network use to refer to the edgeBOX). The mycompany. the IP to which this connection is established.. You can find the Domain of the network in the Hostname and Domain menu in the Network section. within the Network section. Critical Links. 4. A hostname is a descriptive name. . · Destination Port: transport protocol level destination port. button and type the new name in the hostname text box (the hostname must be less than 16 characters long). server1. To change the Hostname click the Change. for example. You can choose any name you want. What is the Domain? The Domain is the name by which your network is known. Other hosts could exist in that same domain. if a username can be associated to this IP Address it will be displayed instead of the IP address for easier identification. For each of them you can read the total bytes sent and received. mycompany.org.com part is called a domain name.org indentifies the host server1 within a network domain called mycompany.mycompany. Just click the Network link. If you have two offices and two edgeBOXes managing each one you can call one edgebox1 and the other edgebox2.Network 37 You can find it in the Related Topics corner of the Networks menu in the Network section. · Destination IP: the other end of the connection. like for example. For each connection: · Source IP / User: the IP address that originated the connection.org.

If.168.com.0 | 0.255. For example.0. the list should have a route with the following information: 192. You can not edit these entries because they are configured automatically by edgeBOX. for example. Inc. the list should have a route with the following information: 192.0. the list should have a route with the following information: 192.255. This menu shows you. The System Routes list should contain several entries.168.170.com.168.170.255. then you can give your network the domain you want. To change the domain of the network click the Change.. This domain will be private and only visible within your network. B or C. bellow it you can find the System Routes table.0 | DMZ · A route for every active VLAN (virtual local network VLANs interfaces).200/24. the contents of edgeBOX's IP routing table: at the top you'll find the Static Routes table.254/32. like critical-links.254 | 255.0/24. If your local network is 192.200 | 255.102.0.0 | LAN · A route for your DMZ network.100.168. In the System Route table you should see: · A route for your local network (LAN interface).0 | 255. 4.255. If the network is 192. you have a VLAN named VLAN_B with the properties: 192. for example.0.8 View the system routes In the Network section you will find the Routes menu.38 edgeBOX 5. An appropriate popup window will advise you of that need. for example. then you can use that public domain.0 | 0. .0/24 in the edgeBOX's vlan3 interface. in a simplified fashion.168.additional routes that you can create and modify. button and type the domain name you want in the Domain text box.255 | 0.168.0.255.0.0. If you need to add routes to other hosts or networks please see Manage Static Routes .0.255.100.255.102.100. If you change the hostname or the domain you need to reboot the edgeBOX so that the changes take effect.0 | vlan3 (VLAN_B) · A route for the internet (WAN interface).100.0 | 0. If your local network is 192.255. if your company is called MegaSoft then a possible domain could be megasoft.0 Help If you do not have a registered domain. If you have a registered domain.168. for example.168.0 | 255.. the list should have a route with the following information: 192. edgeBOX does not update the reverse hosts files of the DNS Domains when you change the hostname and you have networks defined on the edgeBOX (the local network or the VLANs) that do not belong to network classes A.0 | WAN Critical Links. for example.

0. the address of the WAN interface – the gateway address). VLANs.0 | 255.0.12.0. and this IPSec tunnel gives you access to an example 10.168. If you need to enable access to other hosts or networks that are unknown to edgeBOX or aren't directly accessible. If your gateway has the IP address 192. You can: Create a new route To create a new route.254. use the Static Routes list in the Routes menu. . Please note: all necessary routes should be created and managed automatically by edgeBOX.170. for example. A route that is used in case you do not have a connection to the exterior.0 | 192.0.168.0 | 0. on the Static Routes panel: 1.12.0.9 Manage static routes If you need to manually configure routes on edgeBOX.0/24 remote network. then you will need to add static routes.12 | IPSec 4.100. Inc. The list should have a route with the information similar to: 127.0.0 | 255. etc.routes that are created and managed automatically by the edgeBOX based on the settings your global LAN. for example.0. Critical Links.255.254 | WAN · IPSec routes will be identified with the IPSec tag on the Interface column If your the remote IPSec gateway has the IP address 212. It will open a new dialog window. This panel displays also System Routes .0. 2.170.Network 39 · A route for the edgeBOX (Loopback route).0 | 0. the list should have a route with the following information: 0.12. Specify the IP Destination Address of the destination network or host.12.0.0 | 212. Network section.0. the corresponding Destination Netmask and the Gateway (the secondary route through which edgeBOX will reach the destination network or host) The added route will appear in the Static Routes list.255. WAN. You can assume that edgeBOX will create and manage automatically all routes needed for it's correct operation.12.0 | lo · A default route (typically. the list should have a route with the following information: 10. Click the New button.0.100.0.

Inc. Network section you can configure and change the properties of the wireless network. How does Wireless work on edgeBOX? edgeBOX provides a wireless LAN access to your office.10 Wireless In the Wireless menu. It can operate with an embedded Access Point or as an 802. .0 Help 4. Configure and turn on the wireless Indicate the type of wireless authentication Make the wireless network more secure Make the wireless network public edgeBOX allows you to have a wireless network and define several configurations to make it more secure. To manage these access points you need to use the specific access point's management interface. edgeBOX cannot manage external access points.40 edgeBOX 5. Critical Links.1x Access Point controller if you use several external Access Points spread through the network.

as integrated authentication using edgeBOX users' accounts or external authentication using a remote RADIUS server. you can immediately start providing wireless access on your office.1x authentication. As edgeBOX also provides IP-PBX features. channel 11 and the WPA password is mydemokey.1 Configure and turn on the wireless network To review or change your Wireless network. 4. Critical Links. without having to configure anything on the edgeBOX. Inc. WEP or 802. edgeBOX supports for WPA. please go to the Wireless menu in the Network section. as seen by wireless clients (SSID). By default. . for quick reference: · Network Name: the network name.10. you can set several scenarios. A short summary is provided. This way.Network 41 As you can see in the image above. you can combine them with the wireless features to create wireless VoIP phone access. edgeBOX's wireless network is already running with a factory configuration defined: the network name is mybusiness.

. only the MAC addresses specified will be allowed in the Wireless network. hit the Change. · Security: you have 4 choices · None (Public Network): this operation is insecure. button to edit. (WEP is considered deprecated and has been cracked. grants a very high level of security and privacy..choose from 1 to 4. · Hide Network: if you select this option the network will not appear in the list of available networks when users look for wireless networks in their computers. · 802.. ex: mywifi.0 Help · Security: WEP. Inc.1x: with this option you can integrate your wireless network in RADIUS based authentication and accounting setups.. · Authentication: can be local (using edgeBOX) or remote (using the specified RADIUS server . also known as the SSID.. Advanced · Channel: the radio-frequency broadcast channel to be used (from 1 to 11). don't use this option unless you really need to and you understand the insecurity consequences. the name of the wireless network is a name of your choice that will work as the public identifier of the network so users can connect to the network. · Allow only specific devices to use the wireless network: click the Add.. how to get the MAC address ? Critical Links. it's preferable to use WPA instead). details are: Key . button and specify the following: · Data Encryption: choose WPA or Dynamic WEP.and Key Position .a 8 to 63 characters long sequence or a 64 hexadecimal characters sequence.42 edgeBOX 5.1x · Channel: the radio-frequency channel being used Hit the Change. WAP or 802. Port and Password). if the network has no authentication then everyone will be able to connect to it. · Accounting: you can choose to save user statistics and other accounting information in a remote RADIUS Accounting server (again by specifying it's IP Address.. button to add a new MAC Address to the list. A new window pos up with two tabs: General · Name: the name for your wireless network. this is commonly referred to as the PSK (pre-Shared key). Port and Password).a 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters sequence .IP Address. · WEP: Wired Equivalent Privay. · WAP: Wi-Fi Protected Access. details are: Key .

Later on. so you need to use WEP authentication to ensure compatibility with all devices.10. If you add a wireless card to the edgeBOX. . If you wish to temporarily turn of the wireless network for any reason. go to the Wireless menu in the Network section and hit the usual Stop Service.Network 43 On Windows computers. per example. . For example. . . if you wish to make the wireless network available again just click Start Service. when the black command line appears type ipconfig /all. 00-0C-29-C5-91-9F.2 Indicate the type of authentication When you create your wireless network you should configure the wireless Security option in the General tab. protected against undesired users. . Critical Links. some smartphones or older network devices do not support WPA security yet. other Access Point devices or other edgeBOXes. Related Topics: Indicate the type of authentication for the network Make the wireless network public 4. To change the Channel of the edgeBOX's Access Point. go to the Start menu and run the Command Prompt. . for example: Physical Address . This is because each of the overlapping Access Points must have a different channel. or if you don't want to have a wireless network anymore. but the configurations will not be erased. select a channel that is not used in the overlapping networks in the Channel Selection drop down list in the Basic tab when you are creating the wireless network. Change the Channel of the wireless network You will probably need to change the Channel of the wireless network if you have other devices than this edgeBOX providing wireless networks nearby. you need to reboot edgeBOX after you added the card. To secure edgeBOX wireless network you can use one of the following authentication methods (protocols): Which type of authentication should I use? The type of authentication you use depends on the devices that are going to access the wireless network. the MAC address is identified by the Physical Address. Inc. . The wireless service will be stopped. to avoid conflicts with the other devices. to some extent. This step will ensure your network is.

Activate 802. 802. you should use the 26 hexa. Example of a 26 chars key: ACBB-8EF2-3410-23AA-F8F0-EEEE-A2. Type-in a 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters long sequence. It is normally used to secure wireless networks on workplaces. Go to the General tab and choose Security WPA.1x authentication Critical Links. nor special characters like | \ / : * ? ! < > “. but if you need to ensure compatibility with devices that do not support it. avoid using WEP authentication. You can obtain random generated secure keys at the GRC website.must be composed only of exactly 64 hexadecimal characters (A to F and 0 to 9) and cannot have spaces. WEP is relatively easy to break. This is not easy to accomplish if you have many users of the wireless network because you need to inform them all about the new active key each time you change it. then use the 10 hexa chars sequence. · Passphrase . You should try to always use secure passphrases and pre-shared keys to increase the network security. WEP is relative relatively easy to break. If all your devices support WPA authentication. If you need to use WEP then change regularly the WEP keys. 2.0 Help If you don't need to grant compatibility to older devices. How must the passphrase or the pre-shared key be? · Pre-shared Key . then use WPA instead of WEP. 2.44 edgeBOX 5. to grant a certain level of security. Use static WEP keys authentication To use WEP authentication on the wireless network: 1. Indicate a key (passphrase or a pre-shared key) that will be used to authenticate to the network. Inc. Use WPA security To use WPA authentication on the wireless network: 1. How must the key be? The key must be formed using groups of hexadecimal characters (A to F and 0 to 9) separated by '-'.1x authentication is even more secure than WPA authentication.must be between 8 and 63 characters long and cannot contain spaces. . You should indicate the passphrase or the pre-shared key to the users of your network you want to be able to access the wireless network. Go to the General tab and choose the Security WEP. 3. use WPA with a strong password instead because it is more secure.

choose Dynamic WEP instead.Network 45 802.1x method. · On a remote RADIUS server It means that. This is normally called WPA-Enterprise. a remote RADIUS server will validate the users' credentials instead of edgeBOX. Related Topics: Make the wireless network more secure Make the wireless network public (with no authentication required) Critical Links. To use 802. Define the Authentication type: where users' username and password are validated when they try to login to access the wireless network.1x option and hit the Change. For a user to be able to login. button. instead of using a network key that is shared by everyone. .. 2. If you have devices that do not support WPA accessing the wireless network. Inc.1x authentication means that each user who wants to enter the wireless network has to login using its own username and password. Go to the General tab and choose the 802.1x Access permissions. You can validate these credentials: · Locally on the edgeBOX It means that. This is the default option. fields to indicate how the edgeBOX can connect to the remote server will appear: IP address. port and password for that server.. edgeBOX will see if the username and password of the user exist in the edgeBOX's list of users and if they match. Check box in the Accounting zone and indicate how edgeBOX can connect to the remote server (IP Address.1x authentication on the wireless network: 1. using the 802. in the Users section. You can verify these settings in the Privilege user. If you also wish to save information like the time the users were connected or what did they do. port and password). you can save that information on a remote remote RADIUS server. Below the option. 3. Check the option Authenticate Users on another RADIUS Server. Select WPA in the Data Encryption section. the user needs to have 802.

. button and select the Advanced tab. Inc.. people won't try to enter a network if they do not know it exists in the first place. select the MAC Address of the computer from the list and click Remove . This process differs according to the user's Operating System. . Activate the Hide Network option. Hide the network You can hide edgeBOX's wireless network from appearing in the list of available networks people see when they scan for available wireless networks they can connect to in they computers..) button. even if you are already using a secure type of authentication: Allow only specific devices to use the wireless network If you want just a list of specific computers and other network devices to be able to use the wireless network. To do that just enter the MAC Addresses (or Hardware Addresses) of the computers for which you wish to allow access to the network: in the Wireless menu. This option will restrict even further more the access to the network to specific devices. Even if you don't use this option you still have control over who accesses your wireless network because users still need to authenticate using a wep key. To hide the network go to the Wireless menu. hit the Change. WAP.. Activate the Allow only specific devices to use the network option and add the desired MAC addresses to the list using the Add. to be able to connect to edgeBOX's access point. hit the Change. It makes difficult unauthorized access attempts.46 edgeBOX 5..3 Make the wireless network more secure You can configure two settings on the edgeBOX to make your wireless network more secure. they need will need to connect to the network manually. Related Topics: Indicate the type of authentication for the network Critical Links.0 Help 4. Network section.. Network section.1x. or using 802. that is..10. For your network users to use the hidden wireless network. Why should I hide the wireless network? Hiding a wireless network is a way of improving the network's security.. If you don't want a computer to belong to the list anymore. (or Edit. button and select the Advanced tab.

slave or forwarder type name servers.4 Make the wireless network public A public wireless network is a network with no authentication method. It is possible to: · · configure master. Inc.85. Related Topics: Critical Links.227. critical-links. If you don't protect the network. Always secure the wireless network if you don't want everybody to access it. unauthorized people can get access to the information on the computers on the network and use the connection to access the Internet.com) into numeric IP addresses (such as 209. It means that everyone who receives the radio signal will be able to enter it and use it. Related Topics: Configure the wireless network Indicate the type of authentication for the network 4. Access Control List – Defines access controls for the domains that the DNS server knows. If you want to make your wireless network public: go to the Wireless menu in the Network section and select Security: None. DNS is a network service that translates literal hostnames and domain names (such as webmail. For more information see Wikipedia DNS.10. Avoid creating public wireless networks if you don't really want to make it available for everyone for a given reason.103).11 Managing the DNS server If you need to configure DNS you should navigate to the DNS menu in the Network section. .Network 47 4. edgeBOX's DNS configurations are divided in the three first subtabs. · · · Domains – Where you can indicate all the domains that the DNS server will know. Wireless networks are more vulnerable to hackers and malicious software because the signal is available for everybody nearby edgeBOX's access point. Settings – Shows the DNS status and the properties of the DNS server. edgeBOX supports DNS through the well-known named server. grant query access from internal or external networks. There you can review and change edgeBOX's DNS Server configuration.

Inc. using that database. Three possible Domain Types are available. when hosts are added.1 Adding or Editing DNS domains If you need to add new DNS domains. the host entries required (map IP's to names). On the Domains Tab click New. 4. the forward entries are required (resolving names to IP's). There you will find the current DNS configurations table. · Forwarder: a forwarder type domain server does not answer queries directly: it will forward them to another name server. If Direct is chosen. B or C) of the IP segment for which this domain is valid.1. this choice is only active if you have selected Manual for the Reverse DNS Management option in the global Settings tab. · Network: IP address and the class (A. you should go to the DNS menu in the Network section.0 Help · Dynamic DNS 4. These are: · Master: a Master domain server stores the domain database locally (also called authoritative domain for that domain). This option is not accessible if you have selected Resolution Type Direct and the Manual Reverse DNS Management option · Name Server: here you specify the IP address of the name server. . a Master DNS domain. · Allow only internal hosts to query this domain: selecting this will restrict DNS answers to queries coming form your local networks. It will answer the queries for that domain. otherwise for private domains you will most likely want to grant only to internal hosts for security reasons.11.11.48 edgeBOX 5. just follow these steps: Domain Tab · Name: the domain name. · Slave: a Slave DNS domain gets its zone file information from a zone master and it will respond as authoritative for those zones for which it is defined to be a 'slave' (it is sometimes referred to as a secondary).1 How to add a Master domain If you need to add. If reverse is chosen. This option is not accessible if Critical Links. · Resolution Type: choose Direct or Reverse. or edit. if you have a registered domain you will grant access to external networks to query this zone.

or how it will operate. · Allow or Deny Updates: whether other servers are allowed to submit dynamic updates for this domain To add access from Slave domains to a master domain witch is configured to only let internal hosts make queries. Permissions Tab If you wish to have higher control of hosts. Here you can specify an Access Control List (ACL) of rules that will be pre-verified before the server determines if. . Inc. and type bellow it the corresponding values for Network IP address and Netmask or Host IP address · Query Permissions: from the choice boxes displayed choose if you wish to: · Allow or Deny Queries: indicates if queries are allowed for this domain · Allow or Deny Transfers: determines whether other servers are allowed to copy the zone information from this server. If a rule matches it will be applied. or networks. later. re-use them here. the user needs to add an ACL with the IP/Hostname of the the respective slave domain and allow the transfer option. It might be a good idea to create that list first and. Click the New button and specify the following: · Type: Choose Network or Host based access control rule. it will process the DNS queries. If no match is found the default behaviour is to allow queries and transfers but to disallow updates. or how. · Retry time: The time which the edgeBOX will wait before querying a Master (if the master fails to respond to a request) Critical Links. for which this domain will be responsive. you should use the Permissions Tab. Time Options Tab · Refresh time: The number of seconds between the time that a secondary name server (slave) gets a copy of the zone (or sees that it hasn't changed). ACLs created in the Access Control List tab will be available to you in this process. and the next time it checks to see if it needs a new copy. Please refer to that section. when creating or editing your DNS domains. You can have several rules. Hosts Tab Managing the contents of the Hosts tab is explained in section Managing hosts on an existing domain.Network 49 you have selected Resolution Type Reverse and the Manual Reverse DNS Management option.

. You can have several rules. Click the New button and specify the following: · Type: Choose Network or Host based access control rule. · Master Servers: here you specify the IP address(es) of Master DNS server(s) for which this domain is a Slave (from which it gets it's DNS database). · Network: IP address and the class (A. otherwise for private domains you will most likely want to grant only to internal hosts for security reasons. if you have a registered domain you will grant access to external networks to query this zone.50 edgeBOX 5. this choice is only active if you have selected Manual for the Reverse DNS Management option in the global Settings tab. Here you can specify Access Control rules that will be pre-verified before the server determines if. or how. · Resolution Type: choose Direct or Reverse. or how it will operate. or networks.0 Help · Expire time: The number of seconds that lets the secondary name server(s) know how long they can hold the information before it is no longer considered authoritative. Permissions Tab If you wish to have higher control of hosts. · Allow or Deny Transfers: determines whether other servers are allowed to copy the Critical Links. · Allow only internal hosts to query this domain: selecting this will restrict DNS answers to queries coming form your local networks. Inc. · Query Permissions: from the choice boxes displayed choose if you wish to · Allow or Deny Queries: indicates if queries are allowed for this domain. for which this domain will be responsive.2 How to add a Slave domain In order to add. B or C) of the IP segment for which this domain is valid. a Slave DNS domain you need to provide: Domain Tab · Name: the domain name. it will process the DNS queries. or edit. · TTL time: Specifies the maximum amount of time other DNS servers and applications should cache the DNS record.1. You might wish to lower this if you are going to change your DNS entries and then increase it to a normal value after the changes have been made and tested 4. you should use the Permissions Tab.11. and type bellow it the corresponding values for Network IP address and Netmask or Host IP address.

To add.Network 51 zone information from this server. Click the Settings tab.11. an attempt will be made to find an answer locally. 4. Instead.2 Changing global DNS Settings In the DNS menu. only if you have entered forward DNS servers). See Forward DNS Servers below..11. . · Zone Transfer Format: determines the format used by the server to transfer zones. requests are made to the forwarder server(s) and. those queries will be forwarded to an alternate DNS server.3 How to add a Forwarder domain DNS queries for a Forwarder type domain will not be answered by the DNS server. · if Remote is selected (this is an appropriate option. · if Local is chosen. or edit a Forwarder domain you only need to enter it's: · Domain Name · Preferred DNS server and · Alternative DNS server (optional). the local consult will not be attempted.. Network section you will find the global DNS server options. options are: Critical Links. Server Options The settings displayed can be changed by pressing the Change. button: · Reverse DNS Management · Automatic: the reverse domain is automatically created · Manual: the admin is responsible for creating the reverse domain (if a reverse domain is required) · Lookup Mode: determines the first nameserver to be consulted when a request is received. 4. if not answered. Inc.1.

ACLs names must start with a letter and can consist of only letters and digits. Go to the Network section. 4. This will be the Name Server(s) used to resolve external domains. · Many: will pack as many records as possible into a maximum sized message.52 edgeBOX 5.3 Managing DNS ACLs This section tells you how to allow/deny clients the use of your server to perform DNS lookups. If the DNS service is not running edgeBOX will use the DNS servers configured and displayed in the Internet Connection menu. Zone Transfer Time: maximum time allowed for inbound zone transfers. . Inc. edgeBOX will use these DNS servers for all external DNS queries. Click the Add button if you wish to add more servers to the list. · Max. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order of the entries. Two tables are presented: the System ACLs table and the User ACLs table. for the Internet COnnection will not be displayed there. The DNS servers configured. If you change the Forward DNS Servers list and you have the DNS service running. because edgeBOX is actually not using them. The Primary DNS and. Rule Type · Use an existing rule: choose from Critical Links. if displayed. · Max. DNS menu and click the Access Control List tab. You need to provide an ACL Name and a set of rules. You can add several rules. This setting overrides any static or dynamic DNS settings configured for the WAN interface in the Internet Connection menu. statically or dynamically. To do this you need to add one or several Access Control Lists (ACL). the Secondary DNS fields represented in the Internet Connection menu will automatically revert to the first and second entries in the Forward DNS Servers list. The System ACLs are managed automatically and can not be edited.0 Help · One at a time: will place a single record in each message. You can add and edit User ACLs. Query Cache Time: maximum time requests are cached internally.11. Click the New button in the User ACLs table. Forward DNS Servers This list contains the servers to which queries will be forwarded if the domains queried are not in the current list of domains.

the localhost rule is considered an advanced rule and should only be used in specific situations). you should use localnets instead. when you create or edit a DNS domain. Go to the Network section. a rule for Allow. Critical Links. MX. if you mean 'the hosts on my local network'. That is. referring to your LAN/VLAN or DMZ hosts. DNS menu. 4. if some host verifies a rule for Deny and. · localhost: for edgeBOX's system internal localhost interface (please be very careful when using this one. For each of the record types a different set of data is required: · A: the Host Name and it's IP Address. you can add or remove existing IPaddress-to-name and name-toIPaddress mappings (the management of the domain database).Access to this domain is unavailable for IP's/Networks in this list. Inc. Action · Allow . NS. available choices are A.Access to this domain is available for IP's/Networks in this list. in the Permissions tab. Click on the Hosts tab.4 Managing hosts on an existing domain During the process of creating a new Master domain or editing an existing one. Note: Deny takes precedence over allow. CNAME. . Select an existing Master domain (the same applies when creating a new Master domain). you can manage the hosts on that domain. · Use IP Address: here you specify the hosts for this rule by typing-in a Host IP Address or a Network IP/Netmask pair. the ACL will deny the DNS service to that host. · any: for any host. simultaneously. That is. all ACLs created here are made available to you.11. SRV and TXT. · external (for networks external to edgeBOX).Network 53 · none: for no hosts. For large DNS deployments. · Record Type: select from the list. You can create new entries or manage existing ones. The first thing you need to do is to choose the Type of DNS record you're adding (this option is only available when creating new entries). The current hosts list is presented. · localnets (your LAN. · Deny . VLANs and DMZ networks).

if one e-mail server is set as 5 and the other as 10. lower value means more preferred. Port: the TCP or UDP port on which the service is to be found.12 Use Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS is a usefull service when you don't have a fixed IP Address to connect to the Internet (that is.54 edgeBOX 5. the Target Host. the Domain Name. when you don't have static IP configuration on the WAN side) and you still want to access your host from external networks by a name of your choice. Thus. the e-mail server with a priority of 5 will be tried first.no-ip. Port/Protocol. Port/Protocol): used when more servers are providing the same service. · NS: the Name Server (you need only to enter the left-most part). Weight: A relative weight for records with the same priority. · CNAME: the Alias name and the corresponding existing Domain Name. . 4. Weight (PWP). You can use one of the two supported dynamic DNS services: · · DynDNS No-IP To see details on how to setup and manage an account on these services. The longer TTL means faster resolution times because of caching. the Time-to-Live for this entry and the Text Message specific for this kind of entry.org or www. but also means the data may be stale for longer. the higher the priority.dyndns. What is the purpose of the PWP ? PWP (Priority. Critical Links.org. consult www. What is the Time-to-Live for ? The Time-to-Live (TTL) allows you to specify how frequently domain data may change.0 Help · MX: the Domain Name (you need only to enter the left-most part) and the Priority field. Used in load balancing. the Time-to-Live. How does the Priority field work ? The lower this number. Priority: the priority of the target host. but to push it down 5 minutes when changes to DNS are expected. · SRV: the Service. Inc. · TXT: the Hostname. Weight. It's common to set this value to several hours normally. Priority.

13 Using the DHCP service The DHCP Service assigns IP configurations to hosts. DHCP menu. A new popup dialog will show you the current configuration status of your Dynamic DNS service. e.org). · Advanced Options: here you'll find several global options the server will comply to. your DMZ. What exactly is DHCP ? Usually on boot. Click the Configure. A table with three tabs will be presented: · IP Address Ranges: the ranges displayed will be used by your DHCP server to assign IP addresses to computers or phones that request them. a specific host is identified by it's MAC address. button if you wish to configure it: · Provider: choose your service provider. browse to the Network section and click the Dynamic DNS entry on the Related Topics (at the lower-left corner of the browser window). a Default Gateway. Managing your DHCP server To get an overview of the current status and configurations point your browser to the Network section. such as maximum lease time and host configuration variables. 4. Inc. Critical Links. This process is accomplished with the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol . laptops and phones on your internal networks: LAN. · Hostname: this is the name that you created when you set up the account of the service. .. VLANs and. a Netmask.Network 55 Enabling Dynamic DNS · You need to have an account on either one of those services.org or myserver. · Fixed IP Addresses: this section shows you the IP addresses that are automatically assigned to one specific host or phone. · Username: type the username given to you by the provider. DNS sever(s) and other TCP/IP related informations. · When you have that. this way you can have static MAC-IP assignments..dyndns.g. type-in the FQDN (fully-qualified domain name. · Password: the password given to you by the provider.no-ip.: mybusiness. IP phones and other devices will request the assignment of an IP Address. in order to be able to actively participate in the network they are attaching to. possibly. computers.DHCP (to learn more visit Wikipedia DHCP).

2.168.255.2.200. on the other hand you can define a DHCP range like 192.0. Create a new range To create a new range of IP Addresses: 1. will also receive 'mobile200. the DHCP service will assign it an available IP address from one of the existing ranges.3. see an example Let's use the following reduced scenario for simplicity: your LAN segment is 10.If you have edgeBOX e-mail server running and you want to have domains or hosts in the SMTP Relay list.200. · Each DHCP range created must completely fit into one of the currently configured internal networks (LAN. 3.1 Assign IP addresses using Ranges Here you can define ranges of IP Addresses that will be assigned dynamically.100 because it fits into one of your internal networks (the DMZ in this case). type the Prefix.local. Optionally.10 to 1.100.200 because they overlap. this range would not be used at all. in the e-mail server's Access Control definitions.loc.168.0/255.56 edgeBOX 5.20 because you do not have an internal network compatible with this range. you will not be able to add a DHCP range from 192.If you enter mobile as the prefix and the domain if your network is local. see an example If you have a DHCP range from 1.255.168.0 Help Related Topics: · DHCP Leases 4.200.10. it will be prepended to the last portion of the IP assigned.3.255.200 is assigned. Delete a range Critical Links. View details about the prefix · Example .255. you have an active VLAN on the 192.0.3.0 segment and your DMZ is 192.168.50 to 1.255. · E-mail Server . Inc. Indicate the higher IP address of the range in the End IP Address field. 2. .70. · For each IP address interval you can define a prefix. On the dialog window indicate the lower IP address of the range in the Start IP Address field. thus forming the hostname sent. then a host to which the IP address 192.3. When a computer in the network requests an IP Address. 4.103. then you must indicate a prefix.0/255. VLANs or DMZ).255.168. Click the New button below the Ranges list in the DHCP tab.13.168.2.100.50 to 192. you will not be able to add another from 1.loc' as hostname.168.2.70.10 to 192. · You can create several IP address intervals as long as they don't overlap.1.0/255.

13. . Inc.2 Assign IP addresses using MAC-IP rules The Fixed IP Addresses tab. Related Topics: · Assign IP addresses using Ranges · Overview the settings of the DHCP service · Configure DHCP advanced settings Critical Links. Each time that specific host or phone requests an IP address to connect to the network. Be careful when deleting DHCP ranges. the server will provide the IP address you specify. Enter the device's MAC address in the corresponding afield. Select the desired range from the Ranges list. Click the New button. If you delete a DHCP range. Type-in the IP address you want for the device in the IP Address field. 3. allows you to assign always the same. Create a new MAC-IP Rule To assign a specific IP address to a specific device: 1. To find the MAC address of a computer you can use the ipconfig /all command in the command line of Windows systems or ifconfig in the command line of Linux systems. 3. DHCP menu.Network 57 To delete a range of IP Addresses: 1. specific IP address. Other failure situations are possible. Related Topics: · Assign IP addresses using MAC-IP rules · Overview the settings of the DHCP service · Configure DHCP advanced settings · DHCP Leases 4. the computers that receive IP addresses from that range may not be able to connect to your network the next time they are turned on. Network section. 2. Click the Apply button to save the changes. Click the Delete button below the list. to a computer. 2.

· Domain: this is the network domain to be provided. button and type in the desired value(s). in seconds.. by default edgeBOX will take on that task. will only be provided to internal network (LAN. · Gateway: determines the Default Gateway to be provided to the hosts requesting the dynamic IP configuration.. button and specify them manually by entering data into the desired text fiels. .3 Configure DHCP advanced settings The Advanced Options tab allows you to further refine your DNS server's configurations.. Gateway and DNS These settings control the Gateway. · Maximum Lease Time: hosts usually simply ask for an IP Address and use it for the default lease time.58 edgeBOX 5.13. click the Change.0 Help · DHCP Leases 4. by default this is edgeBOX's LAN IP address. To change any of them just hit the Change. otherwise the maximum time will be used. Related Topics: Critical Links. for short) hosts. it determines the domain to which the host belongs when getting it's IP configuration. In those cases. in the popup dialog. a host can use the given IP Address. · Default Lease Time: is the default duration.. and thus. The Advanced Options are separated into: Lease Time The Lease Time is the length of time for which the host can use the IP Address assigned by the DHCP Service before he is required to request it again from the DHCP Service. DNS and Domain Name that will be provided to the network hosts as part of their IP configuration. in other situations they can ask for a specific lease time. Inc. will be provided only to LAN and DMZ (if enabled) hosts requesting dynamic IP configuration. the default configuration is to provide edgeBOX's LAN IP address. If you need to change these default settings. the DHCP service will assign the IP address for the requested duration if it is smaller than the max. will be provided on any network zone to which the DHCP service is reachable. · DNS Server(s): this/these are the DNS servers the host should query in order to resolve names.

.To field . To do this.4 DHCP Leases The DHCP Leases popup is available in the DHCP menu.Network 59 · Assign IP addresses using Ranges · Assign IP addresses using MAC-IP rules · Overview the settings of the DHCP service · DHCP Leases 4. Inc. option to get a list of leases considered expired. Click the View expired DHCP Leases.. It shows you the IP Address assigned. Follow the Cache Websites link in the Related Topics corner. edgeBOX acts a Transparent Proxy Caching Server. Hit the Save. Indicate cache exceptions Critical Links.13. . also minimizing WAN bandwidth usage This is made by saving parts of the webpages in the edgeBOX. Change the size of the Proxy Cache 1. About edgeBOX's cache. please navigate to the Network section.. It shows you the current list of IP addresses assigned to each computer in your internal network.. The Ping Status column will show you if that specific IP Address is currently present on the network: select an entry from the list and click the Ping button to update this field. Click the Change. the host's MAC Address. Network section.. button. button and select a value between 128MB and 8192MB in the Cache Disc Size drop down list.. the Device Name (if available).14 Manage the Webcache size and sites You can specify websites which you don't want to cache of (cache exceptions). and the start . in the Related Topics corner.dates of each lease. 2.From field . It makes the webpages your network users consult more frequently to be loaded quicker. 4.and end .

Security section. like websites that are very dynamic and their content changes constantly. click Start Service. To indicate to the edgeBOX not to cache a website: 1. this traffic is not cached by the edgeBOX. You can also delete and edit these entries. Click the New button. . If you stop caching websites. You can stop the service if you don't want edgeBOX to cache any websites. edgeBOX will not be able to block access to websites you may have blocked or block access to websites containing words and expressions you may have blocked in the Website Restrictions options. 2. 3. is fully covered in the Security section. To start caching websites again. To stop edgeBOX's proxy cache click the Stop Service link at the top. Inc. 4.60 edgeBOX 5. You can indicate websites that you don't want the edgeBOX to cache. edgeBOX caches all websites. Click OK.0 Help By default. Do not cache websites / stop the Proxy-Cache Service By default edgeBOX caches the websites your network workers visit. If you have Premium traffic defined in the QoS section. Critical Links. This is. It may be useful for some specific websites. being mostly Firewall related. Type the IP address of the website that the edgeBOX must not cache in the window that will pop up. Please refer to that section for details: NAT and Port Forwarding.15 Using NAT and Port Forwarding The usage of NAT and Port Forwarding. the Proxy Cache service is by default running.

all traffic is somehow included in a user privilege. This is possible. The process of service and user QoS configuration is different both in the concept itself and the difficulty to accomplish. just by applying both configurations. The edgeBOX provides a set of CoS according to the Diffserv model. Let's consider that we want to be able to use an IPSec tunnel no mater how much congested the network is. On the one hand. Inc. the IPSec tunnel and the users' Internet access when the network is congested. It is also important to keep in mind that service classification is always processed in the first place. user traffic is much easier to configure as it only involves assigning a traffic behavior to a group of users. . The order of packet classification is the following: 1. we may want both the scenarios. service traffic differentiation requires service classification configuration.16 Using QoS The edgeBOX QoS (Quality of Service) consists of differentiating the network traffic resulting from the activity of services and/or users. maximum delay variation and maximum packet loss. we may not be concerned with a service in particular and we may just want to be able to grant Internet access to a certain group of users even if the network is overloaded. As the Diffserv nomenclature is very technical. that is. These two approaches have different purposes. Classes of Service The differentiated traffic behavior is given by CoS (Classes of Service). Nevertheless. we just need to select an appropriate traffic profile and assign it to the users' Privilege. Classification based on the packet DSCP mark Classification based on the DSCP mark will only be used when the authentication is turned off because. A CoS is deployed by a internal mechanism which shapes the network traffic in order to meet a set of expectations such as the minimum rate. the edgeBOX provides the following CoS: CoS Olympic CoS Diffserv DSCP (hexadecimal) ToS (hexadecimal) Maximum Percentage Rate Critical Links. Moreover. Therefore.Network 61 4. User Privileges 3. otherwise. maximum delay. information about how the service packets may be recognized among all others on the network. we would need to classify the service by creating a rule to assign an assured rate to every ESP and GRE packets. In this case. On the other hand. we chose to use a more user friendly one called Olympic. given by a Privilege. Service classification 2. In this case.

0xe 0x28. is a user defined traffic profile. VoIP audio (RTP) packets are classified as Premium and signaling (SIP. 0x16 0x48. then it will not use this hidden pipe anymore and will use the Gold for every VoIP packets class instead. AF33 EF 0x1a. rate is to be set by the user. Therefore. The CoS provided for inbound and outbound traffic are not exactly the same. only two of those classes are provided: BE and Premium. However. 0x70. Starting and Stopping QoS The QoS Service can be started and stopped on the service bar at the top of the QoS menu.0 Help BE DF 0x0 0x0 10% of non premium rate 20% of non premium rate 30% of non premium rate 40% of non premium rate User defined Bronze AF11. 0x38 Silver AF21.WAN and DMZ (if available). 0x50. that is.62 edgeBOX 5. 0x1e 0x2e 0x68. 0xb. Related Topics: · Privileges Critical Links. AF12. it is possible to decide whether to apply or not QoS on each interface . VoIP QoS VoIP traffic classification is handled internally as a pipe. Furthermore. inheriting the Premium configuration except for the rate. AF13 0xa. there is an exception: if the VoIP QoS is set to 0. 0x78 0xb8 Only the Premium class is configurable and cannot be classified directly neither by the users or by the services. AF23 0x12. AF32. Actually. Thus a pipe. that is. for inbound traffic classification. The only configuration required is setting the VoIP assured rate. Inc. In this context. The purpose of this class is to be used to build a set of high priority subclasses called pipes. Network section. 0x14. 0x58 Gold Premium AF31. IAX) is classified as Gold. . 0x1c. the premium class cannot be assigned but pipes can. although premium has no pipes it can be classified directly. AF22. 0x30.

. packets will be classified and marked according to the Diffserv architecture.16. Otherwise unused Premium bandwidth will always stay unused. These settings consist of the following: · Mark DSCP: by checking this. Network section. button in the QoS menu. button opens another window with the advanced upload QoS settings. · VoIP Assured Percentage: sets the percentage of upload Premium bandwidth to be used for VoIP traffic. this can be used to limit the upload rate for all the upload traffic. Critical Links.. · Premium Assured Percentage: sets the maximum percentage of the upload bandwidth assigned to the Premium CoS... Inc. A new window with the QoS upload properties will be presented including the following parameters: · Maximum Rate: sets the maximum upload rate..Network 63 · Internet Traffic · DMZ Traffic 4. if available) just hit the corresponding Change.1 QoS Upload configuration To set QoS upload configurations for the Internet (the same applies for the DMZ. · Allow other classes to borrow unused Premium bandwidth: selecting the option means that the Premium CoS will borrow bandwidth whenever it is requested by another CoS and if that premium bandwidth is not being used. · the Percentage of Premium assured rate assigned to the pipe. It includes: · the pipe's Name. Advanced QoS Upload Configuration The Advanced Configuration. enable this feature only if you have an SLA (Service Level Agreement) with your ISP. · Pipes Management: by clicking on the New (or Edit) button a window will be presented with the Pipe configuration.

Download configuration includes the following parameters: · Maximum Rate: maximum download rate. Critical Links. The service configuration panel is accessed in the Network section. WAN->LAN. LOCAL->DMZ.64 edgeBOX 5. DMZ->LAN. This parameter it's only visible for TCP and UDP protocols. Inc. it accepts a single port. · based on the user privilege and · based on the packet DSCP field. The parameters which may be used in service configuration are the following: · Traffic Direction: sets the direction of the packet. · Source Ports: sets the source ports. it accepts a single port. Remember that there are only two classes in inbound (Best Effort and Premium) and no pipes. · Source Address: sets the source IP address(es). .3 Service Classification As mentioned before in this section of the manual. · Protocol: protocol of IP packet.. 4.2 QoS Download configurations To set the QoS download configurations for the Internet or the DMZ. edit or remove QoS service classification rules option. options are options are Any IP Address. This parameter it's only visible for TCP and UDP protocols. LAN>DMZ. button in the QoS menu. QoS menu by clicking the Create. Single IP Address or IP Address Range. if supported. Single IP Address or IP Address Range. · Service Class: sets the CoS which will be assigned to the service. GRE or ESP. a port-range or a set of ports and port-ranges. · Destination Address: sets the destination IP address(es). UDP. · Premium Assured Rate: percentage of the maximum download rate that will be used for the Premium CoS. WAN->LOCAL.0 Help 4. The available options depends on the traffic direction and on the pipes created.16. there are three packet classification strategies: · based on the service. just click the corresponding Change. DMZ>LOCAL (LOCAL referrers to packets going from or coming to the edgeBOX itself). options are Any IP Address.16. a port-range or a set of ports and port-ranges. Network section. accepted values are TCP. LOCAL->WAN.. accepted values are LAN->WAN. It was also mentioned that the first has higher priority and it is always applied in the first place. · Destination Ports: sets the destination ports.

In other words. Similarly.16. to port 22. In this case. setting rule 2 priority higher than rule 1. to any IP address. that is. of course. Only rule 1 will be used to classify these packets. Data is calculated for a period of 15 minutes using values that are collected every 2 minutes. port 22 is included in the port-range specified on rule 1 and as rule 1 has higher priority than rule 2. Security section. in the Related Topics corner. All TCP packets from LAN to WAN. with the exception of port 22. from any IP address. These panels allow you to view traffic control statistics for the Internet Connection and for the DMZ interface. Rules priority is changed by selecting a rule and clicking the Up and Down buttons on the toolbar. .Network 65 Service Rules Priority There may be conflicts between service classification rules. 2. inverting the priority. classified as upGold. upper corner panels show you the inbound and outbound current bandwidth usage and the current QoS Maximum Rate in Kbps: as example 235 Kbps of 20000 Kbps. DMZ menu. from any IP address. 4. but each for it's corresponding network zone: Internet zone (WAN) or DMZ zone. let's consider the following two rules on the following order of priority: 1. specifying service classification rules demands special attention to these issues. packets destined to port 22 will be classified as Gold and packets destined to the other ports. to the port range 20-100. For convenience. Upload Bandwidth and Download Bandwidth · the two. · Transmitted bytes: total transmitted bytes. from 20 to 100. the Internet Traffic popup can also be reached in the Related Topics corner of the Internet Connection menu in the Network section. form any port. Critical Links. Network section. Therefore. form any port. will be classified as BE. For example. classified as upBE. the DMZ Traffic popup can identically be reached in the Related Topics. All TCP packets from LAN to WAN. In this case. left and right. rule 2 will never been reached because. is subsumed by rule 1. Inc. to any IP address. Both display the same kind of information. On the other hand. will have a completely different result.4 Internet and DMZ QoS statistics The Internet Traffic and DMZ Traffic popups are available in the QoS menu.

Transmitted Bytes. Transmited Packets. Gold. Dropped Packets. Dropped Packets. Inc. Critical Links.66 edgeBOX 5. You can use the Reset button to bring all values to zero and restart statistics. · Dropped packets: total dropped packets. Silver. Upload Bandwidth per class For each of Premium.0 Help · Transmitted packets: total transmitted packets. . Transmited Packets. Bronze and Default (BE) QoS traffic classes displays the same four values: Bandwidth Used. Transmitted Bytes. Download Bandwidth per class For each of Premium and Default (BE) QoS traffic classes displays the same four values: Bandwidth Used.

using an available link through an unsafe network. Inc. which is best suited for remote users to connect to a protected network. or a user and a private network. connecting them securely. thus providing safe connectivity for remote sites or users. edgeBOX currently supports three options for enabling VPN connections: · IPSec · PPTP · L2TP 5. Nevertheless edgeBOX also supports the RoadWarrior type. Critical Links. . such as the public Internet. This kind of IPSec VPNs is referred to as Net to Net IPSec. This is accomplished by the usage of authentication and encryption techniques which assure privacy and security form one end to the other.1 IPSec IPSec VPNs are especially suited for establishing tunnels between two private networks over the Internet.VPN 67 5 VPN This section allows you to review and change VPN configurations · · · IPSec PPTP L2TP A Virtual Private Network (VPN) provides the means by which two private protected networks. can be made to communicate and interoperate.

To Start or Stop the IPSec function globally you can use the usual Start Service and Stop Service options at the top of the menu. Please note that the IPSec service can not be started if the WAN interface is not configured. The Configured Tunnels table shows you several details about each tunnel: · Name: the tunnel's name · Gateway: the tunnel's gateway IP address or the RoadWarrior indication · Networks: the two network endpoints · Status: the current operational status of each tunnel. Please note that the Status function's correct operation is. Stop and refresh the Status of each tunnel. navigate to the IPSec menu in the VPN section. in the service status bar. architecturally. limited to situations where the edgeBOX have an interface directly connected to the tunnel local network.0 Help Net to Net IPSec VPN connecting two private networks To review or manage your IPSec tunnels. An overview is presented with a list of configured tunnels. their details and their respective status. These routes are distinguished with a specific 'IPSec' identifier in the Device column of the System Routes panel in the the Network Critical Links. If that is not the case. the Status function will not produce a correct tunnel status information. . In addition to the usual management operations (New. you will need to choose among two kinds of IPSec: Net to Net and RoadWarrior. To create a new IPSec tunnel. All other options are also available. For tunnels that are running you can select the entry and right-click it with the mouse. Inc.68 edgeBOX 5. IPSec Routes edgeBOX automatically generates and manages IP routing details necessary for the correct manipulation of IPSec traffic between the two tunnel endpoints. You'll get access to a context menu with an option named View that allows you to view current details of the running tunnel. Edit and Delete) you can also Start.

That is. this key is the pre-shared secret (PSK).255. If you need to review them or change them. · Gateway: the IP Address of the IPSec server this tunnel is to be established to.1 General After clicking New and choosing the type of IPSec . could be your local LAN (ex. Inc.255.168.you can configure several details for the tunnel: General Tab: The general tab allows you to configure a VPN tunnel with a minimum of information.100. RoadWarrior specific: · Remote Hosts: any or a specific host.VPN 69 section.255. 192.0).0) or any of your VLANs (ex. a number of networking and security related parameters are automatically set for you. Related Topics: · Routes 5. Critical Links. .101.0/255. go to the Advanced Tab. the PSK should be generated from purely random characters. · Shared Key: both local and remote ends of the tunnel must have the same key to initiate encryption.0/255. 192. Net to Net specific: · Remote Network: IP Address and Netmask specifying the IP segment on the "remote" side of the tunnel (as will be "seen" locally). Depending on the type of VPN tunnel.255.1.Net to Net or RoadWarrior .168. you should provide: · Tunnel Name: a name by which to identify this tunnel · Local Network: IP Address and Netmask specifying the internal segment on the "local" side of the tunnel.

70 edgeBOX 5. making it less secure. Inc. a specific Configure.. a FQDN or an e-mail address. button exists in each of the four configurable sections. This tab shows you an overview of your current options. Critical Links. ID Information · Local ID: default local ID (IP Address) or. generally speaking. avoiding aggressive mode should be preferred when possible. alternatively an IP Address. · Remote ID: default local ID (IP Address) or. · Agressive Mode: Enables faster tunnel creation/operation as fewer messages are exchanged between peers. . Please note: edgeBOX supports only AES-128.. The defaut values are: Proposals · Phase One · Encryption: Options are 3DES or AES (128 bit encryption) · Authentication: MD5 or SHA1 · SA Lifetime: 8 hours to 24 hours · DH Group: Options are Group2 (1024bit) or Group5 (1536bit) · Phase Two · Encryption: Options are 3DES or AES (128 bit encryption) · Authentication: MD5 or SHA1 · SA Lifetime: 1 hour to 8 hours · DH Group: Options are Group2 (1024bit) or Group5 (1536bit) · Perfect Forward Secrecy: provides additional security by preserving the security of your old encrypted data even with the private key compromised. a FQDN or an e-mail address.. alternatively an IP Address.1.1.0 Help 5.1 Advanced You'll find all IPSec Advanced configurations in the Advanced Tab. To let you fine tune them. usually set to on. but exposes identities of the peers to potential eavesdropping.

and . 5. Inc. you can grant or revoke access to services running on the edgeBOX for hosts in the remote network.. by default all hosts in the network will be able to use the tunnel. · Connected Users: a table where each connected user is listed as well as the IP address of the Critical Links... . you can review and change your PPTP configuration. or aren't.. visible to remote hosts over the tunnel. · Outgoing Access: list of rules blocking access of your hosts to the remote network.2 PPTP PPTP is used to establish VPN tunnels across the Internet.VPN 71 Tunnel Access Control · Incoming Access: list or rules specifying whether your hosts are. This allows remote users to access the internal network from anywhere on the Internet. A short overview is provided: · Remote Users are authenticated by the: local authentication service or remote RADIUS server · IP Addresses are dynamically assigned between . VPN section. PPTP tunnel connecting a host to a private network In the PPTP menu. Allowed Services · this add/remove service list provides the means by which edgeBOX services allowed/denied through the tunnel.

such as RADIUS user creation. Access to PPTP is one of those features. and the time at which the connection was established. nor should any static IP addresses in this range be defined..is or is not allowed to do it depends solely on the Privileges defined for that user.1 PPTP Properties To change the PPTP properties.2. button to edit these settings. which reduces edgeBOX traffic and encryption overheads.trying to establish a PPTP connection . Related Topics: · Privileges 5.0 Help client machine from where the connection was established. This is because it makes more sense to access the internet via your local network. No additional configuration is needed. . The address range should not overlap the DHCP range. You should keep in mind that edgeBOX manages all users permissions around the concept of Privileges. go to the VPN section PPTP menu and click Change. Authorization for PPTP VPN use is configured in the User Management panel. The process by which edgeBOX determines if a given user . the Port and Password for the RADIUS server. You'll need to specify configurations for: User Authentication · Authenticate the remote users using the local authentication service: selecting this option means that the authentication will be performed by edgeBOX. Inc.. Please review that option if you loose access to the Internet.. · Authenticate the remote users using a remote RADIUS server: type the IP Address. Click the Change. Critical Links. you will not be able to access the Internet via the PPTP connection.. When using PPTP with the (local PC) default remote gateway option checked (connection TCP/ IP options). IP Address Assignment These two fields allow you to set the IP address range which will be assigned to clients connecting through PPTP..72 edgeBOX 5.

Else. the user will have no access privileges at all besides the specific access rules defined in the Access Profile's Destination Access Policies list. Access Privileges using remote RADIUS authentication If you want PPTP users to authenticate in a remote RADIUS server instead of the edgeBOX.VPN 73 Please read on. button. with access to the network services based on the profile policies he belongs to. Inc. so you don't need to create the users in the edgeBOX. L2TP menu. . A quick overview is provided stating the current tunnel status.. edgeBOX verifies the access rules defined on the profile of the user to determine access to the LAN and VLANs. PPTP users that authenticate in a remote RADIUS server will always belong to the 'Default' access profile as it is impossible for the edgeBOX to know who they are. the privileges the user has are related to the access profile the user belongs to. Access Priviliges using Local Authentication When a user accesses the network using a PPTP connection. Please provide: · Server IP: IP address of server · Username: Username on the server used for authentication · Password: Password on the server used for authentication. which is the password for the Critical Links.. If you need to configure L2TP go to the VPN section.3 L2TP Layer Two Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) is an extension of the Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) used by Internet service providers to enable the operation of a virtual private network (VPN) over the Internet. Click the Change. Related Topics: · Privileges 5. If the profile of the user has the Allow full access to LAN from PPTP connections option switched on then the user will have access to the LAN as if he was a regular LAN user. then all the process is made in the Remote Server.

Critical Links.74 edgeBOX 5.0 Help above username · PSK: Pre-Shared secret key (must match the one on the server) · Keep Connection Alive: Polls the server to maintain the connection At the end make sure the L2TP service is running. . Encryption/Privacy should be provided by higher protocol layers and/or applications. Inc. Note: L2TP is not encrypted but simply allows the tunnel connectivity.

through the firewall. allows or blocks access to that service on the edgeBOX. prevents internal users from accessing edgeBOX's ftp service but still allows users to ftp. Advanced Firewall. Blocking. Inc. There you can: · Apply Firewall settings for connections coming from the Internet and the DMZ · Adjust firewall blocking rules for Internal Connections · Fine tune your Firewall using Advanced Firewall Rules If you do not activate the Firewall service edgeBOX will be working in pure router mode – all services will be available. ftp. to outside servers. .Security 75 6 Security This section allows you to review and change Security related settings such as: · · · · · · Firewall: WAN and DMZ service access. Go to the Firewall menu in the Security section. Internal Connections. Enabling or disabling a service. SPI NAT and Port-Forward Website Access Restrictions Anti Virus Engines Shared Folders Scanning Mail Scanner 6.1 Firewall Configuring the Firewall is an important aspect in the global security of your network. If you wish to block user's connections to other servers besides edgeBOX then you should look at the user Privileges section. your network services and your users. for example. Related Topics: · Services Critical Links.

here the rule is "services added here are unallowed"). any connections coming from the Internet to the SNMP service are unallowed. By default.0 Help · Privileges 6.1 Securing the Internet and DMZ links The operation of your Firewall can be managed in the Security section.. Critical Links.... 6. The interface is similar. To add or remove a service from these lists click the Change. button.. In this new dialog please select the sub-panel you wish: · Internet (WAN). you gain access to a configuration panel that allows you to specify edgeBOX services that can not be accessed from the LAN and VLANs. after installation.1. That's it: starting now. button and select the Internet tab. Please note that the services you add to this list will be unreachable from the LAN and VLANs (in the Internet and DMZ panel the rule logic was the oposite: to allow connections. and use the Add and Remove buttons to edit the allowed services list according to your needs (note that managing the firewall is only allowed if the service is running). See an example: If you wish to block any connections to your SNMP agent that originate in the Internet. This menu shows you two horizontal panels: · Connections allowed coming from the Internet: connections originating in the Internet directed at edgeBOX will be allowed if listed. Press Save in the end. Click it and click the Remove button.1. Click Save. · Connections allowed coming from the DMZ: connections originating in the DMZ directed at edgeBOX will be allowed if listed. if the SNMP service is listed you need to remove it from the list (if not listed you're done here). A new dialog window will popup. Then. Inc. Firewall menu. the Firewall service is running and most services are forbidden from the outside: only Webadmin (https management) and Ping are allowed.76 edgeBOX 5. You need to press the Change. . Just Add and Remove items from the list.2 Securing Internal Connections Clicking Internal Connections. This panel allows you to review and manage your Firewall configuration.. or · DMZ Network.

6. a wizard-like sequence of dialogs will guide you through the creation/edition of your advanced firewall rules: Critical Links.... Now you need to add or edit rules. no matter what configurations you might add somewhere else.Security 77 Services added to the Internal Connections. existing rules. link in the Network -> Firewall menu.1. Rules You can create New.. For each rule. rules and Edit. Even if you don't activate the User Authentication service you can manage which services your users have access to. Inc.. how can it be usefull for me ? A Statefull firewall raises the level of network security obtained because only packets matching a known connection state will be allowed by the firewall. to learn more see Wikipedia Stateful Firewall. you can explicitly allow/ deny incoming/outgoing traffic based on the source.. Configure: · Inbound Rules / Outbound Rules: to manage rules in each traffic direction. (blocking) list will be blocked to the LAN and VLAN users. This is actually an increase in network security because you increase the ability of the firewall to determine if a packet is or is not supposed to be allowed in. Using this..3 Using Advanced Firewall Rules In most situations you should not need to add extra firewall rules. · Default Rule: click Allow or Deny to determine the default rule to be applied when no rule matches (a Red/Green icon will toggle indicating the current default rule).. Please refer to the Users section for detailed information. . You need to keep in mind that edgeBOX supports extensive mechanisms for granting and controlling Users and their Privileges. You can have distinct a Default Rule and a diferent SPI setting for each traffic direction. But if that is the case you can use the Advanced Rules. or Delete.. Check the Use Advanced Firewall Rules option to activate the rules panel. · Stateful Packet Inspection: keep track of the state of incoming/outgoing network connections (analyse packets in packet context and in connection context). How do I fine tune and manage connections that originate in the internal network ? This is an important topic when configuring your edgeBOX. The order by which rules will be verified can be changed with the Up and Down buttons. others will be rejected.. destination and protocol.

RFC 1918 determines that "because private addresses have no global meaning. Step 3 Name nosmtp123. Device (connections that originate in a specific IP Address). 80. Inc. . and packets with private source or destination addresses should not be forwarded across such links".3.2. edgeBOX (connections directed at this edgeBOX it self).. you might wish to deny any kind of access to a specific host: Step 1 you'dd need to Block All. To Any. Device.public or private ... Step 2: Source and destination · From location: Any (connections that originate anywhere). routing information about private networks shall not be propagated on inter-enterprise links. Network. Due to the fact that edgeBOX is designed to operate in a variety of network configurations. Step 2 From Network 1. 22. as specified by an IP Address and a Netmask) and edgeBOX (connections originating in edgeBOX it self). edgeBOX can have it's WAN interface attached to a public or private IP segment. Step 2 From: Any To: Device (that specific host IP Address). Private Network Routing. Critical Links.0/255.2.255.0 Help Step 1: Action and connection type · Allow/Block connections: choose if this rule is to Allow something or to Deny something. menu. · Summary: at the end.3. This is how you'dd do it: Step 1 Block TCP port 25. Show me an example Lets imagine you need to prevent all computers from IP segment 1. On the other hand. Step 3: Name and Summary · Name: a suggestive name for this rule. Network (connections that originate in a specific segment. UDP (same as TCP) and ICMP.0/24 from sending any kind of e-mail through SMTP.0. 500-600). If you need to implement such behaviour you should add specific firewall rules in the Advanced Rules. So edgeBOX's default behaviour is not to block routing of incoming or outgoing packets based on the nature ..78 edgeBOX 5. TCP (you can choose All destination ports or specify individual ports or even port ranges like 21.255.of WAN segment. · Connection Type: All. · To location: Any. an overview of the rule. Step 3 name it forbidden.

This kind of network is used as a buffer between the two networks: hosts placed in this network are accessible either from trusted and untrusted networks. you will have to explicitly grant access to hosts residing in it. DNS servers. UDP. e-mail servers). Related Topics: · DMZ Traffic Critical Links.. A new DMZ rule is set up this way: · Destination IP: The host/range to which access will be granted. · Netmask: The netmask to be used.Security 79 6. you will need to specify the single port to which access will be granted. As usual you can start and stop the service on top. but cannot access the trusted network. is being appropriately routed to edgeBOX. and that traffic with this subnetwork as its destination. a Corporate internal network) and an untrusted external network (such as the Internet). and so your ISP must provide routing to it). This interface is configured with an IP address range accessible from the external network (in case the external network is the Internet. via appropriate rules. Edit and Delete. Usually.2 Setting up a DMZ A DMZ is a small sub-network that sits between a trusted internal network (for example. Although this address space is accessible from the external network. you may specify a port range to which access will be granted · Protocol: The specific protocol to which access will be granted. we will show the options available for configuring a DMZ. Choices available are TCP. this range will be a public range. After checking this option you will need to create rules to grant access to hosts residing in this subnetwork. Inc. To: if you select this option. Make sure you configure an appropriate address range for the DMZ interface. .. ICMP and ALL. this kind of networks is used to house Internet servers (web servers. Enabling your DMZ Go to the DMZ menu in the Security section. Next. · Port: If you select this option. · From. The rules are shown in a table which can be modified with the following options: New.

0/255. Inc.3 Enabling NAT for the private networks In the NAT menu.255. by NAT'ing their IP addresses on the WAN segment... LAN or VLAN) 3.x IP segment to have access to the Internet or any other external network accessible through the WAN interface. What is Port Forwarding? Critical Links.4 Using Port Forwarding You can find edgeBOX's Port Forwarding functionality in the Port Forwarding table of the NAT menu. in the Security section. Click the New button and a dialog window will appear 2. So you can connect to outer networks from the computers of your network immediately.255.0 Help 6. All requests made from internal hosts are seen by the external networks as being made by edgeBOX which then translates back the response packets' destination addresses to the originating internal host NAT is by default enabled on the edgeBOX. What is NAT ? NAT (Network Address Translation) translates the private IP addresses of computers in your internal networks to a single public IP address. With NAT.0 for Network IP/Netmask and WAN for the Interface. Also. Configure NAT on an internal network To configure NAT on an internal network: 1. You can use Port Forwarding from the Internet (WAN interface) to your local network or from the DMZ to you local network. Show me an example. without needed to configure anything.10. so that the computers can connect to outer networks like the Internet and have access to several services.10. it is already configured for the LAN and for each of the VLANs. you are actually providing the means for the hosts on the 10. Use the Drop-Down list to select the interface used to reach the network you just indicated.80 edgeBOX 5. you can view and change NAT settings for your network. If you use 10. . you are able to use private addresses in your internal network. Security section.10. Type the IP address and the Netmask of the network for wich you want to have NAT working (most likely it's one of your internal networks. 6. by default.10.

This is because Premium bandwidth HTTP traffic bypasses edgeBOX's Proxy. Add a port/service to Port Forward To make one or more internal services available to external networks click the New button to create a new entry in the Port Forwarding table. alsonote that HTTP traffic that is configured to use Premium bandwidth cannot be blocked. A new dialog will appear. · External Settings · Single Port: to indicate the external Port visible in the interface chosen or. Inc. · Single Port: to indicate the internal port. Filtering can be performed on either domain names or by checking URLs for certain keywords. Also. as if it was running on edgeBOX itself.g. To configure this service just point your browser to the Security section.Security 81 Port forwarding allows remote computers (e. like a web service or an e-mail service.5 Website Access Restrictions The edgeBOX provides a web page filtering service that can be used to block access to web sites. · Range of Ports: to indicate the start and end ports of the Range of external ports. Note: The web filtering service only blocks words in URL and domains in HTTP (port 80) traffic. 6. HTTPS and FTP traffic can not be checked. With port forwarding. Website Restrictions Critical Links. · Internal Settings · Internal IP:address (in your local network) of the computer that is running the service you want to make available. . from that IP address. where the traffic will be forwarded to. you can make a service run on an internal host visible to the outside world. · Range of Ports: to use the same range of ports that was chosen in External Settings (this option is only available if you have selected Range of Ports in External Settings). Please specify: · Interface: choose the interface where you want to make the port forward available ( WAN or DMZ). public machines on the Internet) to transparently connect to a specific computer within your private networks so they can use services that your computer shares. HTTP traffic that has QoS rules defined in the QoS Services panel cannot be blocked either.

pt) Note: There is no space before or after the | character Blocks. if you specify test.5. for example. 6. Inc. com'.net [-.0 Help menu.82 edgeBOX 5.com' as well as 'new.net) Blocks domains containing the word dog (eg www. visit: http://www.verbad./] [-.1 Domains File Format The format of the uploaded file is one entry per line./](dog|cat) [-./]dog[-. Critical Links.pt/download/file. button you should choose the type of file you are uploading: · Domains list to be denied · Words-in-URL list to be denied After uploading any file you should enable/disable their usage by clicking the Enable/Disable buttons according to your needs. www.info Some one-line examples for the domain file are: .regular-expressions.mylocal.com' and 'test. Clicking the New.com' or 'old. A domain preceded by a dot will match that domain and all subdomains.(exe|bat) Block anything.com/help'.ttdoggy.school. For example '.net (eg www.catty./] *\. or can contain regex expressions To find out more information about Regex exprssions.example.net or https://www. it will match 'test.example.com/getit.com) Blocks domains containing the word dog or cat (eg www.bad. . the following rules apply: A single domain will match all urls under that domain and is case-insensitive As an example.com'.bat When adding a domain to the file... Each line in the file may be a domain to deny.exe or www.com' will match 'example.example.

edgeBOX is not shipped with the Sophos or the McAfee Anti Virus engines installed. Related Topics: · E-Mail server 6. Select the desired Anti Virus engine and hit the Install or Update button. which contains the word GoO (recall that the word lists are not case sensitive). Inc. and then click the Anti Virus Engines link. the following rules apply: A single word will match all urls which contain that word. click the Mail Scanner menu.6 Install and Manage Anti Virus Engines Currently.com and www.7 Scanning Shared Folders for viruses The Shared Folders Scanning menu in the Security section allows you to configure the shares scanner. and specify: Schedule Critical Links. When adding a word to the file. The Install dialog will require you to select the appropriate file from your computer. To perform the installation and configuration of Anti Virus engines and update their IDE files. Sophos. if you specify 'goo'. A summary of the configuration is displayed. Click Change. support is available for three Anti Virus engines. As an example. either completely or as a substring. McAfee and ClamAV.2 Words in URL File Format The format of the uploaded file is one entry per line.myinfo. Currently the supported Anti Virus engines are: Sophos. It matches the second URL as it contains ToGoOver. it will match 'google.. so you will have to buy the appropriate number of licenses to use and upload them to edgeBOX. 6. .5.. navigate to the Security section. as both URL's contain the word goo.pt/ToGoOver/help. McAfee and Clamav. in the Related Topics list.Security 83 6. The rest of the task will be automatic.

Just send me an e-mail notification Related Topics: · Anti Virus Engines · Windows Shared Folders 6. If so.0 Help · Scan every day at: choose the time of day for the operation. possible choices are Sophos. .. Actions · Delete infected files found · Delete infected files and send me an e-mail notification · Don't delete infected files. · using: the Virus Scanning package to use. button: · Messages: special options for detecting types of messages or scanning based on message Critical Links. Inc. please specify: · Anti Virus engine: choose one form the list · Notify sender: for the sender of the message to be notified · Notify to the specified e-mail address: and type an e-mail address.84 edgeBOX 5. unless they are installed) · Also scan files when they are placed inside the shared folders (this option is only available for ClamAV). Click the Anti Virus tab. so these choices are not available from the dropdown.. Basic Configuration Please select whether or not e-mail should be scanned for viruses.8 Scanning E-Mail for Viruses In the Security section you'll find the Mail Scanner configuration menu. McAfee or ClamAV (Sophos and McAfee engines are not shipped with edgeBOX. Advanced Configuration To access further Anti Virus operation details click the Advanced Configuration... Click the Configure. button.

You can.allow messages to carry Iframe tags. decide to Forward the message(s). · Allow iframe tags .8.allow messages that contain only a fraction of the attachments. · Actions: for finer grained configuration of actions to be performed in case a virus is found. · Allow object codebase tags .enable the conversion of Iframe and Object codebase tags into plain text. Related Topics: · Install and Manage Anti Virus Engines · Administrator e-mail address · System E-mail aliases · E-Mail Server 6.allow messages where the body is stored in a remote server and not in the actual message. Critical Links. See more. at this point.Security 85 characteristics.allow messages to carry Object codebase tags.allow messages to carry Form tags. There is also a filter for faster search. This is a good alternative to disallowing or leaving them untouched. It will be up to the e-mail client to fetch the message body later. Setting this option is very dangerous as viruses may go undetected. to Delete it or to View Attachments. · Convert dangerous HTML to text . Quarantine If any e-mails were placed in quarantine you can inspect the by clicking View Quarantine. This will give you access to the list of infected e-mail messages and their details. · Allow form tags . to Unblock it. MailScanner never scans the message body so it may allow viruses into your network.1 Messages Message characteristics · Allow partial messages . . it will not be done properly. · Allow external message bodies . Setting this option is particularly dangerous. Inc. As the scan is not performed on the whole message but on its fragments.

· Deliver unparsable TNEF . You can expand and browse through the folders to find the e-mails.86 edgeBOX 5.infected or dangerous attachments are stored in directories created under the quarantine directory. The e-mails are grouped by date inside folders in the list on the left. its attachments appear on the list on the right.If you check this option MailScanner will mark every infected message and every message that.include warnings for dangerous or infected attachments will as an attachment.0 Help · Convert HTML to text .make MailScanner sign every clean message processed.2 Actions Possible Actions: · Deliver disinfected messages . Unblock a quarantined e-mail Critical Links.mark every message that is not scanned by MailScanner.messages that originally contained a silent virus are still delivered. · Deliver silent viruses . If you expand an e-mail you will be able to see the sender and the receiver of the mail. 6. · Mark infected messages .infected attached documents are automatically disinfected and sent to the original recipients. · Expand TNEF . · Block encrypted messages . · Block unencrypted messages .DAT file.allow the delivery of Rich Text Format attachments produced by some versions of Microsoft Outlook that cannot be completely decoded at present. · Include warning as attachment .8. · Quarantine infections . Inc. If this option is not selected then the warnings will simply be included as inline text. even if the addresses were chosen at random by the infected PC and did not correspond to anything a user intended to send.enable expanding of TNEF attachments that are joined in one WINMAIL.enable blocking of encrypted messages. · Sign clean messages . If you select an e-mail.enable the conversion of all HTML tags into plain text.3 Quarantine View the incoming or outgoing e-mails that are put under quarantine (blocked) by edgeBOX because they may contain files with virus. If you don’t check this option then the filenames within the TNEF attachments will not be checked. for some reason had its attachments removed.enable blocking of unencrypted messages. · Mark unscanned messages .8. 6. .

Definitions of spam usually include the aspects that e-mail is unsolicited and sent in bulk. A common synonym for spam is unsolicited bulk e-mail (UBE). involves nearly identical messages sent to numerous recipients by e-mail. Type in the e-mail address of the person you want to forward the e-mail to. A short summary is presented. Click the Unblock and then the Apply button.. Select the e-mail from the e-mails list. Critical Links.9 Scanning E-Mail for SPAM E-mail can also be scanned for spam.Security 87 To remove a blocked e-mail from quarantine and deliver it to its intended receiver: 1. A dialog window will appear. What is spam ? E-mail spam. then specify: · Also log spam-related events: this will make spam related activity to show up in the logs. In the Security section you'll find the Mail Scanner configuration menu. Click the Delete and then the Apply button. · When spam is found: · · Deliver: The message is delivered to the recipient as normal. 4. Inc. button. "UCE" refers specifically to unsolicited commercial e-mail. 3. also known as junk e-mail. Click the Configure. 2. Forward an e-mail to another person If you want to send a blocked e-mail to a different person than its original receiver: 1. Delete an e-mail 1. If so. Spam usually confuses and annoys e-mail users. Click OK and then Apply to forward the e-mail. The e-mail will be sent to its original receiver. 2. . You can also make operations to the attachments of the e-mails. Select the e-mail to delete from the e-mails list.. This is particularly useful to remove virus from the e-mails without deleting the e-mail. Delete all attachments with viruses. Select the e-mail to unblock from the e-mails list. Make sure you remove all infected files of an e-mail before you unblock it. 2. Click the Anti-Spam tab. 6. This way you can remove the files that are infected and then still deliver the e-mail to the receiver. Delete: The message is silently discarded. Please choose if messages will or will not be filtered for SPAM. Click Forward.

or DNSBL. · RBL servers: this feature allows you to have a anti-spam protection based on existing spammers' databases (The Realtime Blackhole List . . See details in http://en.88 edgeBOX 5.spamcop.dsbl.RBL).org and bl. Inc. These lists are dynamic.org/wiki/DNSBL Related Topics: · Install and Manage Anti Virus Engines · E-mail Server Critical Links. At the time of this publication examples of hosts providing such lists are: list.wikipedia.net.0 Help · Attachment: The original message is converted to the attachment of the message. contains lists of internet servers that are considered to SPAMers or abusers. What is an RBL server ? An RBL server. After checking this option you will have to provide hosts serving these lists.

you can setup and deploy any amount of virtual Internet or Intranet http servers transparently. to alter this: · Maximum Accesses: the maximum amount of simultaneous connections the web server will allow before starting refusing new connections.. You may wish to: · Configure your company's .one or several .like edgeBOX's . the default configured value is 150 which should me more then enough for the majority of situations.. This important feature is usually referred to as Virtual Hosts: with a Virtual Hosts enabled web server . in the Office Servers section. To do this just hit the New button at the top of the Websites managed by edgeBOX list and follow the details.. these are all tasks for edgeBOX's Web Server. . you can safely lower this value.. Adding new Internet websites or web-based intranets edgeBOX's internal Web Server can simultaneously serve and manage several distinct and separately configurable virtual webservers. Click Change.Office Servers 89 7 Office Servers This section allows you to explore and configure several services that enable communication between the people and integration of software resources in your company/office.websites and intranets · Setup your e-mail server and enable Webmail · Create Windows Shares for network file storage · Allow users to use edgeBOX attached Printers · Allow users to autonomously create public shared directories · Configure edgeBOX to act as a Windows PDC (Primary Domain Controller) 7. Inc.1 Manage your web sites and intranets Whether you need to bring up one or several web sites for you company or you want to configure a web-based intranet to propagate information throughout your company. Critical Links. Changing global settings The Web Server menu displays a short summary of the global settings.

a DNS related warning may popup.somedomain. So. the FTP root directory will initially contain two directories ("intra" and "inter"). · Website URL: the name of this virtual host such as mycompany.loc.somedomain. · Personal Webpages: check the box if users will be allowed to have personal web pages. .com/users/jsmith · Webmaster account: this option allows you to change the password for user 'webmaster'. Otherwise. just to remind you that an A or CNAME record needs to be added to the DNS for this setup to be complete. Smith's webpage will be accessible at: · http://yourcompany.somedomain.1 Setting up multiple websites This panel allows you to configure one or several HTTP Virtual Hosts.com. and you add a virtual host for docs. Critical Links. for example. note well: you have just entered a name for a host. . if you stop the Webserver. corresponding to these websites.. 7. or edegBOX must translate it.. if your domain is local.com. Please note: the Webmail service depends on the Webserver. if so. with username jsmith.com/~jsmith or · http://yourcompany. or · the main edgeBOX http URL + "users/jsmith". under the public_html directory. the user will be able to manage their personal webpage through FTP – after logging on. How do I access my personal page ? Let's assume user John Smith. keep in mind that your Webmail users will lose access to the Webmail. so. those pages will be located in the user's home directory.local.. The user's personal webpage URL will be formed from the concatenation of: · the main edgeBOX http URL + "~jsmith". in this case. This account is initially disabled so you will have to set a password in order to use it.loc. no one will be able to reach this website. edgeBOX will either create an appropriate DNS host entry for the domain. or remind you that you will need to create one manually.. then you need to a DNS entry for host docs pointing to edgeBOX’s IP Address. then Mr.0 Help unless you plan to setup several web sites and expect to have considerable amount of traffic for all of them. the 'webmaster' has FTP access and owns the directory tree for the Intranet and Internet websites.mydomain.1. they will automatically be placed in their directory. Inc.90 edgeBOX 5. but more may be created. if the main URL is http://edgeBOX. simply because the DNS name-to-IP translation can not be performed. either this name is translated to IP in the outside world.

a request to the edgeBOX for www. type the username. be redirected to other URLs that you specify in the table below. · Internal Website: if this website is only accessible internally (like an Intranet). this dir will be located under /home/wwwhost. and Remove buttons to manage the list of redirection URLs. it will send the request to the proxy (as nominated in the URL field) and add the path (if there is one) to the request.clk. · and the edgeBOX is the master domain. the webmaster password must be activated before the account is created.100. options are: · In the public_html directory: of a given user... the webmaster must now access edgeBOX using FTP and transfer the website's files into the correct directory.com/support will be redirected from the virtual host to the proxy at http://192. this website will correspond exactly to the given user's personal webpage. or if it will be globally available.. if Path=/support/4..Office Servers 91 If the domain for the new web server entry does not exist: · and the edgeBOX is not the master domain. · The files are not stored locally: this option enables you to setup a web site by aggregating several other sites solely by using redirection of requests. · Additional redirect requests: use the Add.150. png images. if the edgeBOX receives a request for the proxy domain. . other) will be stored.150/support/4. all URLs accessible on this site. Inc. · Files Location: where this website's files (html pages. then the new host for that domain will be added to the DNS domain and the administrator will be informed via a popup.7/.100.7/ and url=http://192. the administrator will be informed that the DNS entry needs to be added manually on the system which is hosting the domain. will actually.168.. please refer to Webmaster Account in the previous section. which is the filesystem directory where the webmaste user will be placed after logging on through FTP. Edit.168. · In the directory: just type-in the name of a directory to store this site's files (if it does not exist it will be created). For example. if someone tries to load an non- Critical Links. · Webmaster E-mail: the optional webmaster e-mail address. The DNS entry will only be created if the above condition exists and if the condition shown in the following table is true: Internal Website DNS Domain Access = Internal Yes (LAN IP) Yes DNS Domain Access = External No Yes (WAN IP) Yes No DNS host information will not automatically be deleted when the web server host is deleted.

· Forward: click the Forward button after selecting an e-mail. · Add new e-mail domains. Inc. this options allows you to perform such attempt immediately.2 E-mail Server and Webmail Please refer to the E-mail server menu in the Office Servers section if you need to: · Review. deliver. · Configure other settings and permissions like relay control and message size.1 E-mail Queue Choose the Queue tab. please be sure to reload this panel after some seconds or minutes (especially if there are many messages to be processes in the queue).2. for some reason (destination SMTP server temporarily unreachable. or other reasons) are queued in edgeBOX's e-mail server awaiting delivery. Critical Links. · Add your own aliases and manage simple mailing lists. in the E-mail Server menu . .0 Help existent URL. forward or delete e-mails currently in queue.92 edgeBOX 5. an e-mail is blocked in queue because its destination e-mail is invalid.Office Servers section. in the end some messages may still remain undeliverable. please note that the process of attempting delivery may take some time. The table presented shows you the queue of incoming and outgoing e-mails that edgeBOX e-mail server is processing at the present moment and also e-mails that. a warning page will be return with this e-mail address as footnote just in case the person wishes to get in contact. 7. for example. Related Topics: · Scanning E-mail for Viruses · Scanning E-mail for SPAM 7. You can: · Deliver All: a delivery operation will immediately be attempted. you can forward queued e-mails to another receiver. · Enable and Disable Webmail. despite edgeBOX tries to deliver all incoming and outgoing e-mails in queue every 10 minutes. this can be useful when. so.

you may edit the aliases' list. uncheck if you dont want webmail.. You can add as many domains as you wish. Domains E-mail domains let you configure more than one virtual e-mail server for your company.3 Aliases and Mailing Lists Choose the Domains tab. Inc.Office Servers section. 7. edgeBOX will accept e-mail. To specify the webmail domain click the Change. keep in mind that your Webmail users will lose access to their e-mail. that the Web Server must be running to access Webmail. Also note. Size and Status. E-mail aliases allow forwarding of e-mail to alternative e-mail recipients Critical Links. For details on using and accessing the webmail functionality. Date. Subject. Webmail Only one domain may be a Webmail domain.Office Servers 93 · View Message: click the View Message button after selecting a message to get the details. For example you could receive e-mails being sent to: · @mother-house. directed at edgeBOX's users.mybusiness. · Delete: to delete an e-mail. In this panel. in the E-mail Server menu . Just hit the New button and enter the desired domain..com. · Domain: choose the domain for which webmail will be accessible.Office Servers section. so. if you stop the Webserver.com and · @spin-off.2.2. . check Web Mail. button and: · Enable webmail for the specified domain: check this if you wish to have enable webmail. This topic is not related to domain relaying: see Access Control for details on relaying. for any of the domains specified. 7.mybusiness.2 E-mail domains and Webmail Choose the Domains tab. in the E-mail Server menu . From. To.

4 Settings and Permissions Choosing the Settings and Permissions tab. Office Severs section. That's it.. hit the Add button. All you have to do is: select the help-24-7 / jsmith entry in the aliases table. you gain access to some advanced configuration options for your E-mail server and users. Mr. button. Smith instead (the help-24-7 account doesn't actually exist: it's an alias). forward e-mail to another host or create mailing lists.2.94 edgeBOX 5. Just hit the New button and enter: · Alias: type-in the new alias help-24-7. You can create an e-mail alias for the maintenance service called help-24-7. so that they receive the messages. All e-mails sent to help-24-7 will actually be received by Mr. type wecanfixit@niceandclean. . Creating a simple mailing list Following the above example.com in the text field. E-mail Server menu.. let's say your company has hired the services of an external maintenance company called Nice&Clean. This table has some predefined aliases related with management that can not be deleted. Inc. Starting now.0 Help With this element you can provide alternate names for individual users. all e-mails sent to the help-24-7 alias will be delivered to Mr. You can choose to redirect e-mail for these aliases to another user. Save all in the end. in the popup. Smith has determined that all e-mails requesting help will also be received by the guys at Nice&Clean. The details are: Critical Links. 7. hit the Edit button and. Smith and to the people at Nice&Clean. · E-mail addresses that will receive the messages: click Add and type jsmith. Server Settings To change any of these hit the corresponding Change. The panel shows you summarized information as a quick overview. Creating a simple e-mail alias Lets imagine edgeBOX user jsmith is actually the person in charge of maintenance in your company. Inc.

if you choose a different host for storing e-mail. the default setting is Unlimited. · Message Size Limit: e-mail messages with size greater than this value are not accepted. · Storage Location: by default e-mail will be stored in edgeBOX. sender and receiver. just check the Send messages through a SmartHost box and enter: · Hostname/IP: the hostname or IP Address of the SmartHost. in an example situation. connections will be rejected. Click the Change.. pop. · Whether users can send e-mail to external domains from outside (relay support). despite the e-mail will be received. SMTP. Inc. to change this. imap) with the storage server instead of edgeBOX... edgeBOX will initially accept e-mail directed at any of it's e-mail domains and them forward those messages to the e-mail storage server. above this value. · SmartHost server: A SmartHost is an e-mail server through which outgoing e-mail is relayed: that host will actually perform delivery to the final destination e-mail server.Office Servers 95 · Connections Limit: the maximum number of simultaneous connections. E-mail permissions A short overview is presented: · Whether users can send e-mail to external domains from within the local network. from a distinct server. the default setting is None. some ISPs block outgoing e-mail traffic and require their users to send out all e-mail through the ISP's e-mail server: that server will be the SmartHost for edgeBOX. please specify: · Hostname/IP: the hostname or IP Address of such server. be preserved. to which the e-mail was originally sent. check the box and enter the value you need. you can change this. instead of edgeBOX. Critical Links. · Whether e-mail from unresolvable domains is or is not to be accepted. · Keep original e-mail envelope address: check this if you wish that the domain name. You can also create advanced access control rules based on host. · Check the box if the SmartHost requires Authentication and type the Username and Password. . if you choose to Save e-mail data in an external server. these are typical values. check the box and enter the value you need. button and follow the details here. domain. your network users will typically interact directly (Webmail.. by the user. say. depending on your specific needs you might wish to limit the message size to. 10 MB or 50MB. the default value is Unlimited.

1 for a 10.Office Severs section you can click the Change. n ormally you only permit e-mails to be relayed (sent) from within your own network.. and select source: · From specific domain: type-in the domain to which this rule applies.ex. Accept and relay e-mails.. check the box if you want to: · Accept e-mail from unresolvable domains. Reject e-mails.100 for a 192. p.255. Inc. button in the E-mail Permission area: Unresolvable Domains When a sender domain can't be resolved. criticallinks. the server notes the IP address from which the connection was made.168. this a time limited authorisation. button.100. this setting is particularly useful for users who are connecting from external networks (while traveling for example) and for which we want to allow relaying. You'll get two lists: · Accept or Reject e-mails based on the connection · Choose action: Accept e-mails. as it will expire some time later. Critical Links.96 edgeBOX 5. 10.1. and permits relay from the IP for a limited period. or 192.0 segment).4. for security reasons the default behaviour is not to accept. .0 Help 7.ex.0/255.2. this technique is widely used by spammers.. the e-mail's origin can not be verified.0/16 segment. Advanced Permissions Allows further refinement of acceptance/denial rules for incoming e-mail based on domains..168.1 SMTP Access Control Choosing the Settings and Permissions tab on the E-mail Server menu .0. Hit the Change. IP addresses. E-mail to external domains Check the corresponding box if you want to: · Allow users to send e-mail to external domains from within the local network · Allow users to send e-mail to external domains from within outside (relay support): by checking this option you are allowing relay to users authenticated while reading e-mail through pop3 (usually referred to as pop-before-smtp).255. senders and receivers.com · From specific subnet: type-in the first 2 or 3 fields of the subnet address (p. but some users travel and connect from other places and you want to let those users send (relay) e-mail through your server: whenever someone logs in via pop3.

you may use wildcards (“*”). . You should use the Critical Links. edgeBOX may also act as a Primary Domain Controller (PDC) and WINS server. If edgeBOX is configured to belong to some workgroup it will be visible and accessible to other Windows Workgroup hosts. With the Advanced Settings you could come up with complex rule sets to meet very specific situations. this makes the task of accessing their files (ex: documents. all sub domains will also be included in the rule. Besides the usual file/folder sharing and printer sharing services. edgeBOX can actually be the network's Primary Domain Controller or edgeBOX can just act as a Workgroup computer. The panel displayed shows you a summary of the current configuration.. Inc. If a given domain is listed.. · Accept or Reject e-mails based on the sender/receiver · Choose action: Accept e-mails or Reject e-mails. a) users' desktop preferences can stored in edgeBOX and b) their home directory can be mapped to windows network drive Z: automatically. 7. Note: When entering a value (eg the address or IP). personal webpage) in edgeBOX much simpler and intuitive (this setting is not represented in the panel summary). Learn more.Office Servers 97 · From specific e-mail address: type-in the sender e-mail address to which this rule applies. When edgeBOX acts as a PDC and Roaming Profiles are enabled.3 Windows Server edgeBOX can interact with other hosts in your network just as if it was a regular Windows server. · Coming From / Going To: select and type the e-mail address to which this rule applies. To set this up point to the Windows Server menu in the Office Servers section of edgeBOX's web based administration interface: Primary Domain Controller / Workgroup You have two main options for the behaviour of edgeBOX as part of the Windows network.

More details. · Domain SSID: this setting is not available for configuration. this is the Workgroup name that all computers on the network should use to associate to the Workgroup. and · the users will have their home directory mapped onto drive Z: (if you choose not to select this option the user's home directory will still be available but not automatically mapped onto a drive). · Description: a descriptive identification string. those users will still be able to login in that computer even if you remove the computer from the popup list.. . Inc.. in this case the settings are: · Domain Name: enter the desired Workgroup Name. In the popup you can: · hit the Update button if you need to search for new hosts entering the domain or · the Remove From Domain button if you need to remove a host currently loggedin. Critical Links.. · edgeBOX Description: enter a descriptive string for easy identification of edgeBOX in the network. If a given computer has been added to the edgeBOX domain and some users have successfully logged-in the domain from that computer. you should specify: · Workgroup Name: enter the desired Workgroup Name (all computers with the same Workgroup name will be associated to the same network group and so will edgeBOX). it's created and managed automatically by edgeBOX and displayed in the initial panel for your convenience. · store the user's Desktop preferences on the edgeBOX: · when logging into the Domain.98 edgeBOX 5. How to add computers to the domain? See Appendix C. edgeBOX just belongs to the windows network. button to alter this behaviour or change any of the settings: · edgeBOX is the Primary Domain Controller of the Network. This happens because the trust relationship is still valid between the users and that machine.0 Help Change. · Click the Computers of the domain link to review the workgroup computers currently connected. the host will download the user's Desktop preferences from edgeBOX.. · PDC support is disabled.

Critical Links. Inc.wikipedia. Options are: · Use edgeBOX as the WINS Server: edgeBOX will deal with all domain registration and resolution requests · Use a remote server as the WINS Server: if another WINS Server exists on your network and you wish edgeBOX to use it. users always have access to their home directories and the Allow/ Deny button is not available. · If edgeBOX is the PDC. · Relay registration and resolution requests to the remote server: with this option checked edgeBOX will just send the response from the remote server back to the original client..org/wiki/ Windows_Internet_Name_Service Click Change.Office Servers 99 WINS Support Provides the WINS service. 7. in the Office Servers section. with fine-grained control of permissions and ownerships. Home Directories Access · If edgeBOX is not the PDC you can determine if you want or don't want users to be able to access their homes. What is WINS? WINS performs name registration and resolution.4 Windows Shared Folders The Windows Shared Folders functions.. To learn more http://en. instead of using the usual broadcast method. use the Allow/Deny button to change this. and check the Provide WINS Support box if you wish to activate WINS. . · Server IP Address: type-in the remote WINS Server IP Address. are sub-divided into two major features: · Shares: shared network folders managed by the edgeBOX administrator. thus resulting in an improvement in performance (the hosts don't need to process broadcast packets). Windows clients can query a WINS server directly.

. · Description: a description string specifying any comment for further details (this will be visible only if the windows user selects the Details option when viewing his network resources) Critical Links. or change details. for this to be possible.to edit an existing share the interface is similar: Please note: · the setup of a shared folder will require the choice of a network user for the role of Share Owner and you can pick up specific permissions for specific users or specific Privileges. This share is fully accessible to all users. A list with currently active shared folders is presented.1 Shares To review the currently configured shares. blocked services list. at any time. otherwise no access to shares whatsoever will be possible (the Firewall settings are always superimposed on anything else). · moreover.. . you must have at least one Privilege with access to the Samba service enabled and. go to the Windows Shared Folders menu in the Office Servers section. please make sure that the Samba service is not listed in the Internal Connections.100 edgeBOX 5. it's users will loose access to the Shares (the Privilege setting is always superimposed on the Share permissions).0 Help · Temporary Shared Folders: temporary and size-limited. then none of this will be possible. network shared folders freely created by your network users. · your Firewall may also come into play here: if the Firewall rejects access to the Samba service. if necessary. add more Shares. Share Details · Share Name: type a name for the share. Inc. some users actually using that Privilege. if it is listed you need to remove it. Related Topics: · Shared Folders Scanning 7. For your convenience edgeBOX is shipped with a pre-configured shared folder named Public. disable the Samba service on any Privilege. To add new Shares hit the New button .4. it should be related to the contents or the purpose of the share. otherwise the dialog windows for configuration of the Share will not show you any valid entries to add. if you.

button and follow the details here. .. click the Select Owner. Share Options · Inherit Owner: new Folders and Files will be owned by the share owner. · Inherit Permissions: new Folders and Files will always have the permissions defined in Share Permissions.. · Hide Unreadable: do not show files users cannot read. Administrators are users who have full control of a share.. in this case please hit the Specify Users Permissions.. Read access will depend on each user's permissions.Office Servers 101 · Owner: the share owner. · Disable Write access for regular users. How do I map/mount an edgeBOX Share onto a X: drive on my Windows desktop ? Related Topics: · Users · Privileges Critical Links. button and pick-up a user from the list. this user will be the share owner (the role of the owner in a share will be clear ahead) Share Permissions · All users can access this Share: · uncheck the box if you wish to adjust permissions on this share to specific users and/ or Privileges. Inc. Only the Owner and the Administrators will be able to Write: other users will not be able to write on the Share. Administrators · Select Administrators.. check the box if you want this restriction... · check the box if you do not wish to adjust permissions for specific users or Privileges.. button to add or remove Administrators of this share.

Now. The popup dialog will let you choose among remaining Users and Privileges and. when a new Privilege is created users in that Privilege will have read access to all non-Public shares and Read-Write access to all Public shares.102 edgeBOX 5. Inc. His permissions will be defined by his Privilege permissions.0 Help If you change the properties of a shared folder using Windows XP or Windows Vista.1.. On the other hand. for the ones selected. The details are: · User/Privilege: the name of the user or Privilege for which each permission applies. in the Security tab of the shares properties window.4. If you remove a user from the list. specify: · Read only access to this share: to Allow Read.. Otherwise Windows will remove the user or access profile from edgeBOX share permissions' list. .1 Setup Share Permissions Setup Share Permissions By clicking the Specify Users Permissions. Please keep this in Critical Links. the user may still have access to the Share. · Deny all access: to Deny All. selecting any of the entries and clicking the edit button or clicking the New button you can reconfigure permissions. If you remove a Privilege from the list. · Write only access to this share: to Allow Write. leave always selected at least one deny or allow option when editing the permissions of a user or an access profile. · Read and Write access to this share: to Allow Read and Allow Write. 7. you get a list of Users and Privileges currently configured with permissions for this Share (please note the icons: Privileges are shown with a different icon than Users). no user that belongs to that Privilege will be able to access the Share unless the user has a specific entry in the list. · Allow Read: a green check icon indicates Read permission for this User/Privilege on this Share · Allow Write: a green check icon indicates Write permission for this User/Privilege on this Share · Deny All: a green check icon indicates no Read nor Write access will be allowed for this User/ Privilege on this Share.

· Status: Connected or Not Connected (if a printer is shared but not connected it will be displayed as Not Connected). you can choose from 8 to 1024 MB. Critical Links. · Maximum Number: the system will not allow the simultaneous existence of more than this maximum number of shared folders. For each of them: · Name: the printer's manufacturer and model. These folders are deleted automatically after a while. all files and folders inside will be lost. You might need to come back to this section and change these default settings. If you want to use this feature please go to the Windows Shared Folders menu in the Office Servers section.2 Temporary Shared Folders Enabling Temporary Shared Folders allows users to dynamically create network shared folders to share files when necessary. maximum 240 minutes. Simply connect the printer to one of edgeBOX's USB port (s). . button. if you use the Disable Write Access for regular users option and you give a specific Write access. The list displayed will show you your printer(s).4. Ex.. · Maximum Size: the folder is limited in size to this value. Power-up the printer and go to the Windows Shared Printers menu in the Office Servers section.Office Servers 103 mind when creating new Privileges. click the corresponding Change. At the bottom. minimum: 30 minutes. How does one create a shared folder ? 7. 7. if the limit is reached users will have to wait for any of the folders to be automatically erased before they can create any more folders. Check the Allow users to create temporary shared folders box. and set the values for: · Maximum Life Time: each folder will be automatically erased after this time. Inc. the user will still only be able to read the share.5 Windows Shared Printers Printer sharing is an easy task in edgeBOX. you can choose from 1 to 20 maximum simultaneous folders. Note that these particular permissions do not override the general permissions of the Share..

edgeBOX supports any printer supported by the Common Unix Printing System. To start sharing a printer. Inc. . Please note that the Windows Server must be running for the shared printers to be accessible on the network. To stop sharing it hit the Unshare button.104 edgeBOX 5. Critical Links. just select it and press the Share button.0 Help · Share: Shared or Not Shared.

incoming call rules apply. specific extensions. together with the real time status of the phone system. ACD. Tasks to configure your phone system To setup your VoIP system. calls. Those messages will be converted to (and from) phone calls. phones. DISA. extensions and correspondent configurations like voicemail. You can divert the call to automated attendants.Defining Incoming Call Rules: Whenever the system receives a call from the outside world. voicemail. including call conferences. Voicemail main number. The fax documents will be sent and received through e-mail messages. Identified system warnings will also be displayed providing a quick way to identify and follow up on potential system problems. · Managing Conference Rooms: This is where you create and manage conferencing rooms. This is where you can define the route(s) and prefixes to use to make a call. . like connections. and those calls can't be always answered immediately then you should use queues. Here you can also organize your phones into groups for better organization and access policy definition. Call parking number. and others. · Managing Call Queues: Queues are perfect for Customer Support and Sales Departments. The PBX allows for the integration of ordinary VoIP extensions with plain standard analogue or digital (ISDN) phone lines. If you're using PSTN voice cards (ISDN or Analog) you shall setup the country settings since it may impact on the voice quality because some parameters vary from country to country.Understand your phone system deployment: In this section you can see the overall phone system logical scenario. LCR. parking and forwarding. · Overview . · Phones .Defining Outgoing Call Rules: Every time a user makes a call to the outside world. and the automated conference rooms service. twinning. · Incoming Call Rules . · Mailfax accounts: Mailfax provides a facility where you don't need an actual fax machine running in your company. among others. Inc. You can also restrict access to calls based on dialed number. The queue will place the calls in music-on-hold until an agent is available to answer the call. codecs. · Advanced Setup Options: In this section you will find advanced setup options like Country. Here you can define the flow of every incoming call depending on caller (CallerID) and callee (DID) numbers and time schedule.Managing your phones: In this section is where you define and configure everything about the phones. Whenever you have a stream of customer calls to be answered. outgoing call rules apply. IVR and others.IP-PBX and VoIP 105 8 IP-PBX and VoIP edgeBOX IP-PBX provides all the telephony features a small business needs. IVR. fallback to PSTN. Call recording rules and others. configuration options are divided into categories having in mind the main tasks you need to perform. Critical Links. These tasks are accessible directly as main topics on the left menu of the UI's IP-PBX section. · Outgoing Call Rules . type of call and time period.

Allows the Operator to view the current status of the PBX and can use drag and drop functionality to make. like connections. Critical Links. calls add move calls to queues. and others.0 Help Working with the phone system Having the phone system setup and running. together with the real time status of the phone system. user's can start using it for daily work. providing a number of keycode operations like transfer. In this section you can see a complete list of phone operations and default keycodes. · edgeDESKTOP: This is an application that provides a self-service operations for the end user. See below the pointers to how users can interact with the phone system: · Phone Operations: The most basic tool to use the phone system is of course the phone itself. calls. Inc. IAX and Analog phones. phones. edgeBOX supports SIP. forward. Understanding the IP-PBX Overview panel The picture below presents the main areas and the correspondent information contained in each one.1 IP-PBX Overview When you load the IP-PBX section in the webadmin interface you get an overview display where can see the overall phone system logical scenario. Identified system warnings will also be displayed providing a quick way to identify and follow up on potential system problems. All extensions and phone operations are available from the application's UI.106 edgeBOX 5. for example. park and others. seamlessly integrated with the user's phone. twinning. . 8. · Flash Operator Panel: This is an application specifically for PBX receptionist/operator use.

· Services: status and operational details regarding the Authentication for Outgoing Calls and Autoconfiguration services. Critical Links. the green/gray circles on the left show you the current administrative status of these services. Realtime Status Shows you realtime status in terms of: · Calls Status: the counts displayed show you the current usage intensity of several of your PBX features. · PBX: m conferences. . n groups and k queues are currently configured. colors.IP-PBX and VoIP 107 The IP-PBX Overview is refreshed every 30 seconds and gives you several useful informations in the form of values and labels. Additionally. Inc. icon behaviours and tooltip texts. many of the values and labels displayed are actually hyperlinks to detailed information regarding the topic involved: clicking on them will load additional status panels and configuration menus concerning the topic clicked. The IP-PBX Overview is composed of the following major sections: Configuration Displays a summary with your current configurations regarding: · Phones and Faxes: m Phones and n Fax Accounts are currently configured.

from which edgeBOX accepts calls as internal. attempting to provide a quick grasp of their current operational status. Inc. Point your browser at the Phones menu. the red 'X' and '!' icons displayed tell you that something is not Ok. Up to four lines are displayed linking edgeBOX to the four possible outside world voice connection types: · Remote Offices: SIP or IAX connections to other remote edgeBOX's. through a trusted ISDN Line. In any case. 8. IAX.108 edgeBOX 5. these Warnings give you a little more insight onto what is not ok. Synoptic The central synoptic of the IP-PBX Overview focuses on the connections of your IP-PBX to the outside world. gray will denote total failure or all connections bad. From there you can acomplish the following goals: · Understanding the Phones list · Create SIP. a red exclamation mark '!' tells you something is wrong concerning those types of connections.2 Managing your phones This section brings together several aspects related to the manipulation and configuration of your phones and the corresponding edgeBOX features. · Public Telefony Network: connections to the PSTN through FXO interfaces. for each type of connection. · VoIP Providers: connections to VoIP service providers on the Internet. · PBX: connections to other PBXs. a red 'X' tells you there is no connectivity whatsoever in that(those) connection(s). · Connections Status Icon: a green 'V' sign means everything is Ok. you may get only a subset of the picture. .0 Help · Warnings: the warnings displayed help you diagnose the reds in the central synoptic. the following global colouring rules apply: · Line Color: green will tell you that at least one of the connections of each type is healthy and working as expected. in the IP-PBX section of edgeBOX's webadmin interface. BRI cards and others. Topics are separated in a task oriented approach. Depending on the specific characteristics of your setup. Analog and ISDN phone extenxions · Use Phones Automatic Configuration Critical Links.

this list may prove to be a useful diagnostic and overview tool for your installed VoIP infrastructure. The list is divided into six columns: Extension This column displays the extension's number and name. Inc. . The list provides information in the form of text labels. colors and icon behaviours. Data is refreshed every 30 seconds.IP-PBX and VoIP 109 · Create Groups of Phones and Manage Access control in bulk · Understand and Manage Twinning Related Topics: · Groups · Automatic Call Recording · Internal Dial Plan · Voice Lines · Network Users 8. If this extension is currently assigned to a Critical Links. This manual section helps you understand it fully as it may help you getting a quick overview of your phones status and also provide immediate detailed information regarding each of them. In conjunction with the Overview panel.1 Understanding the Phones list The Phones list in the IP-PBX section displays a considerable amount of information about all phones configured in edgeBOX.2.

indicating it's current connectivity status.. The extension's name is poly607 and it is not assigned to any specific user. despite the feature is enabled. Let us consider extension 1607 in the screenshot above. IP / Port / MAC The phone's IP and MAC addresses. OffHook.. Status The Status shows you the current connectivity status and operational conditions of each phone. · ISDN Phones: Up. Online. Down. A small green/ gray circle is displayed on the left. analog phones are identified with the ANALOG label. · Forward (nnnn): Follow Me is active for this extension. if known. A Port number in case of analog phones. a short status each of those features is added within parentheses: · Voicemail (m msgs): Voicemail is active for this phone and there are currently m new messages. Brand / Model The Brand and Model of supported IP Phones. Setup Mode The Setup column tells you if the phone is configured Automatically by edgeBOX or Manually by yourself.110 edgeBOX 5. The information displayed depends on the type of phone: · IP Phones (SIP or IAX): Offline. Show me a detailed example. · Analog Phones: OnHook. Ringing or Busy. calls are being forwarded to number nnnn. The green circle at the left indicates the extension is online (meaning that edgeBOX can actually communicate with the phone over the Ethernet TCP/IP Critical Links. Inc. there is no twinned phone at this moment. In some cases. Ringing or Busy.0 Help specific user then it's username will be shown in shaded color below the number. · Twinning (nnnn): Twinning is enabled for this extension. if nnnn is missing then. this phone is twinned with the phone at number nnnn. Ringing or Busy. Configuration The Configuration column provides a quick summary of the most relevant configuration features currently active for each phone. other IP phones are simply identified by the VoIP (SIP) or VoIP(IAX) labels. .

The Setup Mode is Automatic meaning edgeBOX will automatically configure this phone. Analog or ISDN) there's some information that is common among them. For details regarding the Synchronize. You need the ISDN BRI card option in your edgeBOX. the phone is currently Busy . You can dial this name to call the extension. Common properties among all phone types Independently of the phone type (SIP. There are four different types of phone extensions supported: · SIP: Used for IP Phones compliant with the SIP protocol.IP-PBX and VoIP 111 infrastructure). IAX. Follows a description of each one of them: · Name: This is the “friendly” name of extension (like John) and the login name for the VoIP account.2. What are SIP URI calls? Critical Links. 8. . Actually. · ISDN: Used for ISDN phones. You need the analog card option in your edgeBOX with FXS ports. Inc.168. · Analog: Used for Analog phones and Fax machines. Contact your Reseller/Support before planning a ISDN Phones scenario. The phone is connected directly in one of the ISDN BRI ports in edgeBOX's back panel using an ISDN cable.101. The phone (or fax machine) is connected directly in one FXS ports in edgeBOX's back panel using a RJ11 cable. The Phone's Ethernet Hardware Address is 00:04:F2:18:D3:E6 as and it's currently assigned IP Address is 192.199. When you call from this extension. The Brand / Model is the text displayed in the 3rd column: it's a Polycom IP phone. for any phone you want to connect to edgeBOX you need an account (extension) to register into. · IAX: Used for IP Phones compliant with the IAX2 protocol. To use ISDN phones you need to have an ISDN card with ports configured in NT mode. · Number: The number used to dial to the extension (like 2010). This requires hardware configuration. the name will be displayed at destination's extension. · This extension can be called directly through incoming lines (Publish Extension): When checked means that this phone will be able to receive SIP URI calls. There are three new messages in the Voicemail account.as displayed in the Status column. Manual Config and Phone-to-Extension Assignment buttons please refer to the Automatic Configuration section of this manual. The Configuration column tells you that this extension has Twinning and Voicemail configured.on a call or similar . The SIP protocol is the most widely available in IP phones.2 Creating phones Extensions in edgeBOX work like phone accounts.

and to configure the number which will be used together with the extension. · Phone "user" .Extension Number: "1000". · Phone "desk" . or handed over to the voicemail system if voicemail is active for the extension. are not associated with any user. The fields you need to provide are the PIN number to access extension's voicemail account an e-mail address were edgeBOX will send notification about new voicemail messages. Extension Password: "1000". · Ring Duration: Time the extension will ring without being answered.com) instead of using a number. The other two phones. · Voicemail: The voicemail settings are also common among all extension types.. Please follow the links below for details: · IP Phone extensions · Analog Phones and FAXes · ISDN Phone extensions Default configured phones edgeBOX comes with 3 already configured example phones. · Phone "room" . Extension PIN: "1000".0 Help SIP URI calls are calls made from IP SIP Phones using a URI (like john@mycompany. Usually identifies the person using the extension. · Twinning: The twinning feature can be used with any phone type. The phone "user" is associated with one of the example users that also exist by default. · Identification (Caller ID): The name and number by which calls will be identified to the called party. Related Topics: · Voice Lines · Groups · Automatic Call Recording · Network Users Critical Links. phone "desk" and phone "room". You can enable or disable the ability of the user to have twinning. Extension PIN: "1010".Extension Number: "1020". Extension PIN: "1020". Inc. More details about Voicemail. For more details see Twinning. Extension Password: "1020". This field is placed in the advanced tab.Extension Number: "1010".. and by default is generated using the data introduced previously in the Name field. com or 2010@mycompany.112 edgeBOX 5. Extension Password: "1010". After this time the call will be finished automatically. .

IP-PBX and VoIP 113 8.2.2.1 SIP and IAX phone extensions SIP is the most widely available VoIP protocol in IP phones. Another protocol, called IAX is also supported by edgeBOX. Please navigate to the Phones menu in the IP-PBX section to create and manage SIP and IAX phones/extensions. Below you can find the most common operations regarding these types of IP phones. Quick steps to create a VoIP phone extension 1. Goto IP-PBX > Phones. 2. Click New, and select New SIP/IAX Phone. 3. Enter the number you want to assign in the Number field. This number will be used to dial to this extension. 4. Enter the name you want for your extension (like MeetingRoom) in the Name field. 5. Enter the password you want for this extension in the Password field, and repeat in Repeat Password field. When using Phone Auto-Configuration system in Callback mode for configuring phones, use numbers for the password instead of letters, it will be easier to enter when using the phone keypad. Phone Auto-Configuration applies only to SIP phones. 6. Click Add to save the phone settings. Only basic properties are mentioned above, those that are mandatory (an typically the the only ones you need), for a description of other properties see Common Properties and other Advanced Phone Properties below.

Configuring Codecs Codecs affect the quality and the bandwith consumption at the same time, higher quality means higher bandwidth consumption. In the Codecs tab of the new/edit VoIP phone extension dialog you can define the codecs allowed to be used by the phone using this extension. By default when you create a new VoIP extension G711 codecs are selected. As best practice use high quality codecs (like G711) for phones connected in the LAN, and low bandwith codecs (like GSM or G729) for phones connected in the WAN. This way you will provide high quality in your internal phones and avoid large Internet bandwith consumption by your external phones. You have to make sure that your phone is also configured to use the same audio codecs as the extension. For more information see Codecs.

Enabling Video Calls If you have a video enabled phone (or a softphone with video support and a video camera) you can make video calls using edgeBOX.

Critical Links, Inc.

114 edgeBOX 5.0 Help

In order to do that you must allow the extension to use video codecs (like H261, H263, H263p or H264) in the Codecs tab of the extension's properties dialog. You have to make sure that your phone is also configured to use the same video codecs as the extension. See your phone's manual for instructions.

Allow phones to connect in peer-to-peer mode (Can Reinvite) By default the voice traffic between two VoIP phones flows through the edgeBOX, meaning when a phone A is calling phone B, voice traffic flow is A > edgeBOX > B. You can change this flow to be A > B directly, thus reducing traffic and CPU consumption in edgeBOX. Peer-to-peer mode is specially relevant in scenarios where you have phones connecting from the Internet (registering through the edgeBOX's WAN port). Imagine the same two phones A and B in the WAN making a call between themselves, you'll have both of them consuming your Internet line, if they could connect directly your Internet line would not be used at all (except for residual SIP traffic). To allow phones to connect in peer-to-peer mode you need to enable the Can Reinvite option in the Advanced tab of the extension's properties dialog. In peer-to-peer calls DTMF shortcuts (like transfer or park) are not supported, because edgeBOX is not listening the tones anymore. In this case you need to use the correspondent special keys in your phone.

Other Advanced options · Disable NAT Support: to enable/disable this option; necessary when the phone is behind devices as a router or a firewall; see more in Advanced NAT; · Do not Send Keep alive packets to this phone: without this option selected edgeBOX will send keep alive packets to this phone every 2 seconds; · When not registered this phone is reachable at static IP Address: use this only if this phone will have a static IP address; · DFTM Mode: the way the client deals with DTMF signaling; this parameter should be the same as in the phone itself; options are: RFC2833 - selected by default; INFO; INBAND DTMF signaling within the call; note that this type of signaling is not supported by the GSM codec.

Critical Links, Inc.

IP-PBX and VoIP 115 8.2.2.2 Analog phone extensions and fax machines If your edgeBOX includes an analog card with FXS ports, you can connect your analog phones or fax machines directly to those ports.

If you are using analog phones connected through ATA (Analog Telephone Adapters) you must use SIP extension type instead of Analog. The ATA will connect into the LAN and will behave to edgeBOX as a SIP phone.

Please navigate to the Phones menu in the IP-PBX section to create and manage analog phones/ extensions. If your edgeBOX includes an analog card with FXS ports configured, you will see the New Analog Phone option when you click the New button in the Phones list. Below you can find the most common operations concerning analog phones. Creating an analog extension to connect a analog phone 1. Goto IP-PBX > Phones. 2. Click New, and select New Analog Phone. 3. Enter the number you want to assign in the Number field. This number will be used to dial to this extension. 4. Enter the name you want for your extension (like MeetingRoom) in the Name field. 5. Select the port number (like Zaptel/11 for port number 11) where you will connect the phone in Line (FXS) field. What is the port number? The Port Number will match the numbers written on the physical ports in the back of your edgeBOX. 6. Click Add to save the phone settings. Only basic properties are mentioned above, those that are mandatory (an typically the the only ones you need), for a description of other properties see Common Properties and Advanced Analog Phone Properties. Creating an analog extension to connect a fax machine An fax machine is connected to edgeBOX the same way as an analog phone, so the steps to create the extension are the same. However there's a very important detail when configuring the fax's extension, which is about echo cancellation. Fax machines are very sensitive to variations in the sound timings, and echo cancellation algorithms tweak those timings. So, in order to have a proper fax extension, make sure you disable the echo cancellation for the respective extension. To disable echo cancellation edit the phone extension, and in the Advanced tab uncheck the option "Use Echo Cancellation...". Advanced Analog Phone properties There are a couple of settings for analog phones that you shall have in mind at this time. This settings are available in the Advanced tab of the extension's properties dialog in edgeBOX. You can fine tune these parameters with a few test calls from the extension you're configuring. · Use Echo Cancellation: This enables/disables the echo cancellation algorithm for calls to this extension and by default it's enabled. Disable only if you are using a fax machine

Critical Links, Inc.

116 edgeBOX 5.0 Help connected to this extension and you're experiencing reception problems. · Transmission Gain: Amount of gain applied to sound transmitted from this extension. The variation is from -8db to + 8db being the default 0db (middle position of the slider). Increase when the other end (the callee) is barely listening; decrease if other end is listening too loud, with too noise or with echo. · Reception Gain: Amount of gain applied to sound received by this extension. The variation is from -8db to + 8db being the default 0db (middle position of the slider). Increase when the you can barely listen; decrease when listening too loud, with too noise or with echo. 8.2.2.3 ISDN Phone extensions Please navigate to the Phones menu in the IP-PBX section to create and manage ISDN phones. Below you can find the most common operations regarding this type phones. Quick steps to create an ISDN phone extension 1. Goto IP-PBX > Phones. 2. Click New, and select New ISDN Phone. 3. Enter the number you want to assign in the Number field. This number will be used to dial to this extension. 4. Enter the name you want for your extension (like MeetingRoom) in the Name field. 5. Select the Line to which you want to connect the ISDN Phone in the Line (BRI)/MSN field. 6. Click the Advanced Tab 7. Check the box if you allow the extension to be called directly through incoming lines 8. Select also the Ring duration. 9. Click Add to save the phone settings. Only some properties are mentioned above. For a description of other properties see Common Properties.

8.2.3 Connecting phones
The following sub-sections give you details on how to connect your: · VoIP Phones · Analog Phones and FAXes · ISDN Phones

Critical Links, Inc.

IP-PBX and VoIP 117 8.2.3.1 Connecting VoIP Phones VoIP phones are the most common phone types used today and the most flexible. You have available on the market a number of these phones with a wide range of prices. edgeBOX works seamlessly with Polycom, Linksys, Aastra and Granstream phones but any phone following the SIP standard protocol will be able to use edgeBOX. You have two options for VoIP phones, both suitable for use with edgeBOX: · Hardware phones, that work pretty much as a plain old phone, and · Software Phones that you can run in your laptop.

Manually configuring and connecting a SIP Phone The configuration of SIP phones is generally the same among all brands/models. Usually the configuration is done through a web page provided by the phone itself (open your browser at a url like http://192.168.100.195) or follow the built in menu on the phone. See your phone's user manual for more details, or look for a specific edgeBOX How-To document for you phone model. There are really only three fields you usually need setup: · SIP Proxy: this is the name (like sip.edgebox.com) or the ip address (like 192.168.100.254) of the edgeBOX. Pay attention were you are connecting your phone, in the LAN or the WAN. Usually you connect the phones directly in the LAN of the edgeBOX for local personnel and remote workers will connect to the WAN from the Internet. · Account: the Extension Name (like MeetingRoom) that you want your phone to use. · Password: the password of the extension. Other fields you may need to have in attention are: · DTMF: This is the type of Dual Tone Multi-Frequency, and affects the conversation with dial tones between the phone and edgeBOX. They must match in both sides (the phone and extension's properties in edgeBOX). The default value in edgeBOX is RFC2833, and that's usually the same in the phones. · Codecs: The codecs configured in the phone must match the ones configured in the extension properties in edgeBOX. The default codecs of a new extension are G711 a-law and G711 u-law and those are usually supported by default in the phones. Order the list of codec by preference, edgeBOX will always try to use the first, then the second and so on.

Automatic configuration of SIP Phones edgeBOX provides an automatic configuration system for Polycom, Linksys, Aastra and Grandstream phones (see more details here). When the auto-configuration system is enabled, at the moment you connect the phone's ethernet cable to the LAN of edgeBOX, the phone will be detected (by mac address) and displayed in the Available Phones list, you can then assign it to an extension.

Critical Links, Inc.

decrease when listening too loud.2.3. Increase when the other end (the callee) is barely listening. 8. Contact your Support before planning an ISDN phone deployment. · Reception Gain: Amount of gain applied to sound received by this extension. the edgeBOX Online Help or the Phone Configuration How To available in the edgeBOX documentation.3 Connecting ISDN Phones ISDN Phones edgeBOX supports EuroISDN BRI phones seamlessly. These settings are available in the Advanced tab of the extension's properties dialog in edgeBOX.0 Help See Phone Auto-Configuration How To guide. with too noise or with echo.3. decrease if other end is listening too loud. · Echo Cancel: This enables/disables the echo cancellation algorithm for calls to this extension and by default it's enabled. The variation is from -8db to + 8db being the default 0db.2. . Just plug the phone (or fax) RJ11 cable to the proper FXS port in the back panel of your edgeBOX.2 Connecting Analog Phones and FAX machines Analog Phones and Fax Machines Connecting analog phones or fax machines to edgeBOX is quite simple. Increase when the you can barely listen.118 edgeBOX 5. with too noise or with echo. Inc. The variation is from -8db to + 8db being the default 0db. 8. but there's a number of details and complexities arising from the underlying ISDN phone technology and the number of different proprietary signaling built by ISDN phone manufacturers. Critical Links. · Transmission Gain: Amount of gain applied to sound transmitted from this extension. Disable only if you are using a fax machine connected to this extension and you're experiencing reception problems. Analog phone settings There are a couple of settings for analog phones that you shall have in mind at this time. You can fine tune these parameters with a few test calls from the extension you're configuring.

Only supported SIP phones can be configured directly on the edgeBOX . Why the phone is not listed? · Phones that have been connected just a few seconds before may not be listed yet.Auto Phone Configuration. 57i and Snom 190. New phones are detected upon the DHCP dialog between the Phone and edgeBOX. 480i. wait a moment for the automatic panel refresh (up to 30 seconds). thus only phones configured through DHCP will be automatically detected. Learn more. SPA 941. Each phone downloads a configuration file from the TFTP (Trivial FTP) service. avoiding the users to have to configure the phones themselves. 53i. or. avoiding the configuration on the phone itself. IP670. 51i. This configuration is basically the configuration of the phones account to be used by the phone. Polycom SoundPoint IP320 IP330. In the popup window select the phone extension you want to assign and click Add button. You'll see the phone in a line with <not configured> in the column Extension. 4. SPA 962. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. 55i. Critical Links. Inc. the configuration of each phone locally on the phone itself. avoiding this way. Select the phone in the list. · Make sure the Phones Auto Configuration System is running (the service bar at the top of the panel must be green). Aastra 9133i. Linksys SPA 901. . IP601. SPA 942. At this point the phone reboots automatically and downloads the new configuration file. Using the Auto Configuration System you can configure phones remotely. SPA 932. SPA 922. Forcing the configuration of other models than the ones mentioned above may result in damage of the configuration of your phone. Configure a detected phone To configure a phone that was connected to the network: 1. just using the edgeBOX's web interface. When you connect a phone to the network for the first time.4 Automatic configuration of phone devices The Auto Phone Configuration allows you to configure VoIP phones of your network directly on the edgeBOX. This file is generated and maintained by edgeBOX based on the phone brand and model. a new file is generated and the phone is informed that a new file is available. You can identify uniquely the phone by the MAC address. 360. Whenever you change the settings of the extension. 2.2. 3. All the configuration of the phones is available through the IP-PBX > Phones panel. Click Assign Extension to Phone button. The currently supported phones are Grandstream GXP 2000. it needs to be configured in order to make calls.IP-PBX and VoIP 119 8. How does it work? The Phone Auto Configuration allows you to configure VoIP phones directly on the edgeBOX. and reflects the configuration of the extension associated with the physical.

Why should I ignore phones? Ignoring phones can be usefully if you have some phones on your network being managed by a device other than the edgeBOX. Ignore a phone You can ignore a phone so that edgeBOX doesn't try to send it configurations nor try to call it to start the Configuration Assistant. 3. a user changes incorrectly the configuration of a phone. Inc. . Go to IP-PBX > Phones. Critical Links. Depending on the Autoconfiguration Mode and the status of the physical phone you may need to reboot the before it gets the configured. Select the phone in the list.120 edgeBOX 5. To synchronize the phones configuration with edgeBOX's saved configuration: 1. Remove the configuration of a phone To remove the configuration of a phone: 1. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. 2. for example. In these situations you don't want edgeBOX to be trying to send configuration information to those phones. The phone will restart automatically and will get the original configuration upon boot. Select the desired phone in the list. Stop ignoring a phone If you want edgeBOX to stop ignoring a phone and start sending configuration information again just proceed as if you would configure it from start. by using the Assign Extension to Phone button in the toolbar. At this point edgeBOX will no longer try to configure this phone automatically. In these cases you can resend the correct configuration to the phone. the phone may stop working properly. Click Synchronize button in the toolbar. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. Click Manual Config button in the toolbar. At this point in the phones list the previously <not configured> phone is not listed anymore. 3. The Setup Mode will change to Manual. To ignore a phone: 1.0 Help 5. so it can work properly again. Synchronize a phone's configuration with edgeBOX If. Click Unassign Phone from Extension button in the toolbar. 2. and the line corresponding to the extensions you've selected in step 2 contains the Brand. 2. 3. IP and MAC addresses of the phone. Select the desired phone in the list.

You can now physically replace the old phone by the new phone. the assistant call doesn't happen. you can delete it (if the phone was definitely removed from the network). At this point you'll see a new item in the list with <not configured> in the extension column. they will immediately receive the configuration you have defined and become configured and ready to use right away. 4. meaning that when in Callback mode. Select the brand of your new phone in the Phone Brand field. and select New SIP Phone to create the a new extension). Select the new brand of your new phone in the Phone Brand field. Critical Links. or assign it to another extension. You can pre-provision phone independently of your configuration mode (Callback or Silent). 3. 3. 5. When those phones are plugged in the network for the first time. and also in the package. When it arrives the end user just needs to plug it to the network and it's ready to use without further issues. Select (double click) the desired phone in the list (or Click New. . Replace a broken phone When a phone it's broken and needs to be replaced by another one proceed as follows: 1. 2. Pre-Provisioning Phones You can also configure phones that haven't yet been connected but will be connected in the near future. 4. Pre-provisioning is very useful when you're managing the office from a remote location and you need to install a new phone. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. and then mail it to the office. and another line corresponding with the extension (like 1020). Inc. 6.IP-PBX and VoIP 121 4. 2. Click Unassign Phone from Extension button in the toolbar. Pre-provision a new phone 1. Preprovisioned phones will be configured as soon as they connect to the network. 5. This item corresponds to the physical phone that was previously associated. You can just create the phone in the system. Enter the new MAC address of the new phone in the MAC Address field. Select the desired phone in the list (like 1020). Click Save button. The phone is now free of any configuration. This item corresponds to the physical phone that was previously associated. The new phone will be configured automatically as soon as you connect it to the network. Enter the MAC address of the new phone in the MAC Address field. Edit the phone extension in the list (1020 in this example). Enable the option Assign a physical phone to this extension. Where can i find the MAC address? Usually the MAC address is printed in a sticker placed at the bottom of the phone. 6. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. At this point you'll see a new item in the list with <not configured> in the extension column.

Plug/Restart the phone 2. 7. The Silent mode doesn't use any interaction on the phone's end. 6. At this point you should answer the call.122 edgeBOX 5. Phone will reboot and start with the configured settings. Dial password of the extension.2. Plug the phone. Which configuration mode shall I use? Use the Silent Configuration Mode: · When you already have phones configured in the office. Dial number of an already existing extension. 4. The configuration assistant calls the phone. Press “1” to start auto configuration. One mode (Callback) is focused in configuring the phone by using the phone itself. · When you don't know mac-addresses. Use the Callback configuration mode: · When you need your customer to configure the phones. Use Case for Callback configuration mode 1.0 Help Related Topics: Auto Configuration Modes 8. 4. . and all the configurations are made through the administrator's panel.4. Assign the phone to the extension by pressing the Assign extension to Phone button in the toolbar. 3. · When setting up a new office on the field. 2. Restart/Replug the phone to get the new configuration. Call phones when they are first connected and start the Configuration Assistant Critical Links. Hang up the phone. 3. Inc. Your phone will be listed in IP-PBX > Phones panel as <not configured>. · When you know mac-addresses. Use Case for Silent configuration mode 1. 5. the phone will receive a call with a configuration wizard where you can dial the extension to assign and respective password (numeric passwords only).1 Auto Configuration Modes edgeBOX provides two different operation modes for auto configuration of the phones.

3. .. How to call the Configuration Assistant? To call the Configuration Assistant from a phone of the network. Click button Change. Click the Save button. Critical Links. which is the configuration assistant number. where you can specify to which Groups a specific rule is applicable to. Click the Save button. Do not call phones when they are first connected to start the Configuration Assistant If you don't want the user to receive the Configuration Assistant call when he connects a phone for the first time (Silent Mode): 1. Note: It is only possible to dial the Configuration Assistant if the configuration was interrupted previously due to some problem and needs to be finished to configure the phone. 5. Select the option Automatically call the phone and start the Configuration Assistant. 4. The same applies to Outgoing Call Rules. Inc. Click button Change. 5. Make sure the Auto Configuration System is running (you should see a green bar at the top of the panel). and then define what operations that group can execute. Go to IP-PBX > Phones 2.2. If it is not running click Start Service.5 Phone Groups and Access Control edgeBOX allows you as an administrator.. if they do not answer the Configuration assistant call) from a given phone to start the phone configuration process. 4. If it is not running click Start Service... Related Topics: Phone Auto Configuration 8. Select the option Do not make the Auto Configuration Assistant call. to define access control policies restricting the operations and types of calls that user's or specific extensions can execute. Go to IP-PBX > Phones 2. The phones access control mechanism has in it's base Groups of Phones. Basically you need to create a Phones Group. You or the network users can also call the Configuration Assistant at any time (for instance. 3. Make sure the Auto Configuration System is running (you should see a green bar at the top of the panel). you or the user need to dial 1234.IP-PBX and VoIP 123 To configure the system to start the Configuration Assistant call each time a user plugs in a new phone in the network (Callback Mode): 1..

4. Inc. Click New button. The policies are organized by the operations: Call Pick Up. Enter a phone number (like 450) for the group in the Extension field. You can choose: · any network phone can initiate Intercom Calls to the phones on this group (this is the default setting) · only phones in the group can initiate Intercom Calls to each other · this group will not accept Intercom Calls Call Listening policies With Call Listening you can listen to ongoing calls on other extensions. . Enter a description (like Sales Personnel) in the Description field.124 edgeBOX 5. select and add the phones to make part of the group (use Ctrl key to select multiple phones at the same time). The choices are: · any phone can pick up calls on this group (this is the default setting) · only the phones that belong to the group can do this · no phone. Intercom Calls.0 Help About Phone Groups Basic steps to create a phones group. In this panel you can Critical Links. 7. when defined enables Group Calls. like calling all phones in the group at the same time. 8. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. Select the Access Control tab. can pick up calls ringing in this group Intercom Calls policies With Intercom Calls someone could make a phone call to this group in which the destination phone will go into loudspeaker mode and the call will be listened to by the people near that phone. To create a group of phones proceed as follows: 1. not even from the group. 10. This number is optional. Call Listening and Call Recording. 3. Description of the Access Control policies The access control policies of a phones group are configured in the Access Control tab when you create or edit a group.Click Save button. 9. Call Pick Up policies With Call Pick Up you can specify the set of phones that can pick up calls on this group. Enter a name (like Sales) in the Name field. Click Add button. 5. Define the access control policies to apply to the phones in the group (see examples below for better understanding). Click Groups in the Related Topics section of the menu. 2. 6.

For the scenario above execute the following steps: 1. can pickup calls ringing at any phone of the group by dialing *8 followed by the group extension number (300 in the example). and · if phones on this group can or can't be recorded (see Recording calls. 2. When using the group's extension number like *8300 the user will randomly pickup a call ringing in the group. . when using *8<phone extension number> the user will pickup the call ringing at the specific phone (*81001 will pick the call ringing at phone's extension 1001). but they don't want other people outside the group to pick their calls. 7.IP-PBX and VoIP 125 specify if: · if phones on this group can be used to listen to calls on other phones (default setting is 'no') · if calls on these phones can be listened (default setting is 'no') Call Recording policies The Call Recording settings for a group allows you to specify: · if these phones can record calls (see One Touch Recording. Select the Access Control tab. 6. Other phones not belonging to the group Support won't be able to execute pickup to the group.Click Save button. Enter a phone number (like 300) for the group in the Extension field. 8. lets assume that you have a group of support personnel and they want to pickup calls that ringing in another extension of the team (because the person is not at his desk). 4. Enter a description (like Support Personnel) in the Description field. or specific extensions belonging to the group. 10. How to create a group of phones that can pickup calls only between them? In this example. 3. This number will be used to identify the group from where to pickup the call. with many variations of access control policies building from the most simple to the most complex set of policies. Click New button. At the Call Pick Up section. Below you can find some examples of the most typical configurations. Configuration examples You can configure any number of phone groups. Critical Links. select the option Only phones of this group can pick up calls ringing on these phones. default setting is 'no'). depending on your company requirements. select and add the phones to make part of the group (use Ctrl key to select multiple phones at the same time). Enter a name (like Support) in the Name field. 5. At this point any phone within the group Support. 9. Inc. Click Groups in the Related Topics section of the menu. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. default setting is 'no recording'). Click Add button.

3. Create a group called Supervisors. Otherwise the extension will keep on ringing despite the call had already been answered by the user. 6. 5. the user needs to press the # (pound) key after answering. Add to the group the supervisors phones.0 Help How to create a group of phones that can listen and whisper calls. He is able to answer calls to his extension on his cell phone. Activate Twinning for an extension Critical Links.Calls on these phones can't be listened by other phones 4. while others can't? In this example. . for example.6 Twinning Twinning enables you to almost duplicate the behaviour of an extension of the network on another external phone. Learn More. This is useful. In Access Control panel. Inc. To listen and give instructions at the same time (whisper mode) dial *991*1001. The user can then make internal calls just by dialing the extension he wants to call or make outgoing calls that will appear to the recipient as being made by user's regular work phone. at the Calls Monitoring section leave both policies unselected. For the scenario scenario above do the following: 1. a cell phone: · When a call arrives at the network phone (for example. The phone that will pick up the call is the one that will be first answered. 8. In Access Control panel. when the user answers a call on his cell phone that was sent by egdeBOX through an analog line. The user just needs to dial the number of the company. Add to the group the phones of the help desk team. This will inform edgeBOX that the call was picked up and edgeBOX will stop ringing the extension of the user. select both policies: . as a cell phone for example. for example. Create a group called Help Desk. At this point any phone within the group Supervisors. when a user goes out of office. However. and give instructions to them during the call. 2.126 edgeBOX 5. If you activate and configure twinning with. extension 2001) then both the network phone and the cell phone will ring. The call will be answered by edgeBOX and the user will hear the dial tone again.2. even if he is at home. · The user can make calls with his cell phone as if he was on his extension at work. lets assume we have a group of supervisors that need the ability to listen ongoing calls in the Help Desk group.These phones can be used to listen to ongoing calls on other phones . at the Calls Monitoring section. can listen ongoing calls of any phone in the group Help Desk by dialing *990* followed by the extension number of the phone to listen (*990*1001 to listen phone extension 1001).

To turn twinning off of a phone: 1. Select the desired network phone from the phone list and click the Edit Phone button. Twining will be now enabled. But you. dial *91. Enter the phone number to be twinned to in the Phone Number field. Configure Twinning using the phone The user of the phone with twinning can also enable. Click Save button. so you can switch off twinning so just the company phone rings when a call is received. it is just not enabled at the moment. . See Configure Twinning using the phone. Select the option Activate Twinning. · Disable twinning . 4. 2. having both phones ringing at the same time is not really useful. · Enable twinning . But to do so. the network phone and his personal cell phone. In this cases. Change the twinned phone number 1. Turn off twinning This is particularly useful when the user is close to both phones at the same time. Note that the feature is still allowed at the phone. Unselect the option Activate Twinning.on your phone. To allow a phone to twin with another one: 1. for example. directly on the phone itself instead of the edgeBOX. can enable it again at any time. disable and change the number of the phone your extension is twinning with. for example. Click Save button. 3. Click Save button. 2. this phone is not twinning with another phone. 4. through the phone. 3. Select the desired network phone from the phone list and click the Edit Phone button. or you can leave it blank for the user of the phone to configure it himself. this is. dial *92* Critical Links. Select the desired network phone from the phone list and click the Edit Phone button. By default phones are not allowed to twin with other phones like cell phones. Enter the new phone number in the Phone Number field. In the Twinning section you can see the number of the phone this extension is currently twinning with. twinning must be Active on that phone. 3. Inc. dial *90.on your phone. Twinning will be disabled. through edgebOX's interface. 2. or the phone's user. · Change the phone your phone is twinning with .IP-PBX and VoIP 127 The twinning feature is defined at each specific phone.on your phone.

Inc. The Internal Dial Plan should only be used for advanced configurations. in the IP-PBX section.7 Internal Dial Plan The Internal Dial Plan popup window is accessible in the Related Topics corner of the Phones menu. . if your cell phone is 912154014 you can dial *92*912154014. As usual. · on the right: when you select an extension on the left. a Duplicate button is provided for quickly creating new entries based on the existing ones.on your phone. 8. The popup dialog shows you initially: · on the left: the list of Extensions currently active in the Internal Dial Plan: each new phone created is automatically added to the Dial Plan and each phone deleted is automatically removed. the right-hand panel shows you the Extension Dial Plan: the configured sequence of actions the PBX will execute upon reception of a new call for this extension.128 edgeBOX 5. Don't use the Internal Dial Plan for simple operations like the creation or removal of extensions. You can consider the Internal Dial Plan as a set of individual Extension Dial Plans. Critical Links.2. · Transfer an ongoing call from the cell phone to the network phone . you can use the New button to add new extensions or the Edit button to change existing entries. The Configure the Extension Dial Plan popup window will show. Configure the Extension Dial Plan This dialog lets you configure. For your convenience. The Internal Dial Plan menu gives you access to a finer-grained control of the way edgeBOX processes calls: it allows you to route each call through a set of simple or complex sequences for each call processed.0 Help followed by the phone number you want to twin to. · with Caller ID: check the box and type-in the Caller ID if you wish to further specify that this applies only to that specific Caller ID. for a specific entry: · Extension: type-in the extension name to which this Extension Dial Plan applies. dial *93 and the call you are answering in the cell phone will continue in the network phone. For example. Those operations should be performed in the Phones list.

8. . For each action you can: · Forward to Phone: this action forwards the call to a phone. you must select the phone from the drop-down list that appears below. The Incoming Call Rules menu is accessible in the IP-PBX section. use the Up and Down arrows to change the sequence. the selected sound file will be played and all numbers entered by the caller will be ignored until the sound has finished (see here for details on sound files).3 Configuring incoming call rules Incoming Call Rules instruct edgeBOX on how to deal with a call coming from the outside world. · Forward to Queue: with this option the call will be forward to the queue you choose (see Queues). · Hangup: the call will be hung-up. you may choose any extension with an active voicemail.IP-PBX and VoIP 129 · Actions: an ordered list of actions edgeBOX will try to route the call through. · Answer: the call will be answered. When configuring Incoming Call Rules you have at your disposal the following tasks: · Creating Incoming Call Rules. · Play: the caller will listen to the sound file you choose. Inc. · Forward to Voicemail: the call will be forwarded to the chosen extension's voicemail. · Wait: this action makes the call wait for the specified number of seconds. · Build Automatic Attendant voice menus. use the New and Delete buttons to manage the contents of the list. · Forward to Group: here the call will be answered by some phone in the group you specify from the drop-down list. · Define Schedules (or calendars). · Forward to external number: this action forwards the call to an external number. you must specify the number you want in the text filed. Related Topics: Critical Links. · Forward to Conference: you can choose a conference number for the call to be forwarded to (see Conferences).

Go to IP-PBX > Incoming Call Rules. . Rules are applied in the order of appearance. Click Add button to add the action to the rule. to voicemail or to automated attendants. A rule is composed by: · a rule priority. Repeat from step 7 for as many conditions as you need. Select a condition in the Conditions combobox. The Incoming Call Rules menu can be reached in the IP-PBX section. · a rule name. 3. Select an action in the Actions combobox. Click on a rule and use the UP and Down buttons to change the order. Each rule as a set of conditions and a set of actions. 8. It can be redirected to a specific extension. Click Add button to add the condition to the rule. 5. Inc.3. Critical Links. 4. 7. to determine the order by which the rules are evaluated. There are two default example rules: work-hours and after-hours.0 Help · Voice Lines · Groups · Sound Manager · Music On-Hold · Automatic Call Recording · Automatic Attendants · Schedules 8.1 Creating incoming call rules Incoming Call Rules define how an incoming call is routed through the system.130 edgeBOX 5. · rule actions. which is a human readable name describing the rule. 2. 9. Enter the parameters for the action in the fields at right side of the action. Conditions determine if the rule is to be applied or not not. Click New button. Enter the parameter value for the condition in the text field at right side of the condition. · rule conditions. Enter the name of the rule in the Rule name field. and how it's going to be answered. Repeat from step 4 for as many conditions as you need. 6. that define how the call is to be treated. Basic steps to create an Incoming Call Rule 1. to determine if the rule is to be applied or not not. while the Actions specify how the call is to be treated.

Click Save button to save the rule. · Schedule: This conditions evaluates if the call is being made at a particular time or day (see Schedules for more details). to that destination within some period of time''. 11. you must choose a Schedule from the drop-down list at the right side of the condition type. · Forward to external number: this action forwards the call to an external number. Critical Links. you must select the phone from the drop-down list that appears at the right side. This condition is useful when you have multiple public phone numbers. you must specify the number you want in the text filed that appears at the right. The rule's actions will be executed if (and only if) all conditions together are true. use the Move Up and Move Down buttons in the toolbar to place the rule in the order you desire to be evaluated. So you could easily build up complex rules such as ''from this origin. Inc. each one with a different destination department or receptionist. the sequence of actions specified are executed. the conditions of each incoming call rule are evaluated. · Calls to (DDI): This condition tries to match the destination number (DDI) of the call with the supplied value. You can: · Forward to Phone: this action forwards the call to a phone. Rule Actions The Rule Actions determine the behaviour in case the rule conditions are met. but out of hours (or at vacations periods or holidays) you want an automated attendant to answer. · Forward to internal number: this action forwards the call to an internal number. you must enter the CallerID in the text field at the right side of the condition type. you must enter the DDI in the text field at the right side of the condition type. .At the rules list.IP-PBX and VoIP 131 10. · Ring Phone: this action tries to forward the call to the specified phone by making it ring. · Calls from (CallerID): This condition tries to match the originating number (CallerID) of the call with the supplied value. you must specify the number you want in the text filed that appears at the right. you may choose any extension with an active voicemail. · Forward to Conference: you can choose a conference number for the call to be forwarded to (see Conferences). · Forward to Queue: with this option the call will be forward to the queue you choose (see Queues). In a single rule you can use as many conditions as you want. This condition is useful for example when at work hours (or days) you want the call to be answered by a person. Rule Conditions When a call is received by edgeBOX. This condition is useful when you need to redirect a call based on who's calling. if the phone is not answered then the next action will take place. · Answer: the call will be answered. · Forward to Voicemail: the call will be forwarded to the chosen extension's voicemail. For the first rule to match all conditions. · Forward to Group: here the call will be answered by some phone in the group you specify from the drop-down list at the right side.

the user will hear dialtone on which a call may be placed. Is it secure? This type of access has SERIOUS security implications. first is asked the user to enter the passcode before getting dialtone. specify an action like ''Forward to Internal Number 99XX''. wait for 10 seconds and then forward the call to some Conference. and GREAT care must be taken NOT to compromise your security. In each call the XX sequence from the DDI will be evaluated and re-used in the action. followed by the pound sign (#). you specify ''Calls From (DDI): 9876543XX'' you could latter. you must type it on the right. We advise you to ALWAYS enter a passcode. This way you could compose complex sequences for edgeBOX to execute on the call. when the action DISA is executed. · Change CallerID: to change the CallerID to a diferent one. In this case a call from 987654321 would be forwarded to internal number 9921. · Wait: this action makes the call wait for the specified number of seconds. · Change Music On Hold: to change the music to be played if the call is placed on hold. As an example you could play a sound. If you do not enter a passcode. · Pattern '*': the symbol * accounts for any digit sequence. You can add several rule actions. Rule actions can be moved Up and Down with the help of the corresponding buttons. If the passcode is correct. · Pattern 'X': each X accounts for exactly one digit. if. you must type the code on the right. The DISA application may require the user to enter a passcode.0 Help · Hangup: the call will be hung-up. the user gets authenticated automatically. · Start Automated Attendant: this action will start the execution of the specified automated attendant menu. Use of pattern characters You can make use of patterns in your rules. · Play: the caller will listen to the sound file you can choose. · DISA: Stands for Direct Inward System Access. Inc. If you select that option and indicate the passcode. the selected sound file will be played and all numbers entered by the caller will be ignored until the message has completed. . · Set Project Code: to label the call detail record (CDR) with the supplied code. Critical Links. for example.132 edgeBOX 5. you can use constructs like "Ricardo Loureiro <916291182>" or even the usual * and X signs for field replacement (see more on this below). in the same rule. Allows someone calling in from outside the telephone switch (PBX) to obtain an "internal" system dialtone and dial calls as if from one of the extensions attached to the telephone switch. when the DISA action is executed.

you may choose any extension with an active voicemail. · Forward to external number: this action forwards the call to an external number. Select the desired action in the Action combo box. Enter a name to identify the automatic attendant in the Name field.IP-PBX and VoIP 133 8. like when a key is pressed. Enter the parameter values for the action in the fields shown below the Action combo box. 10. 9. · Ring Phone: · Forward to Voicemail: the call will be forwarded to the chosen extension's voicemail. 7. play sound files. Repeat from step 5 to add more actions. and click Add Action (steps 5 to 8). Click New button in the toolbar. Automatic Attendant's Actions · Forward to Phone: this action forwards the call to a phone. An automated attendant menu is built with actions and conditions: · Actions define what is to be done in the call. allowing the administrator to create response menus for a large range of applications. you must specify the number you want in the text filed that appears at the right. joining conferences or jumping to another automated attendant menu. Callers using a touch tone phone will be able to navigate these menus by pressing the appropriate numbers. Click Add Action button in the toolbar. select the condition in the list. 6. Click Save to confirm the action.Click Save button when finished. . 5. making it easy to understand the concept of flow of actions and conditions. To change to action's order execution use the up and down arrow button in the toolbar. Click Add Condition button in the toolbar. 11. you must select the phone from the drop-down list that appears at the right side. Automated Attendants are displayed as a tree structure. Click Automatic Attendants option in the Related Topics section of the menu 3. Critical Links. Go to IP-PBX > Incoming Call Rules 2. like answer. 12.2 Defining Automated Attendant menus edgeBOX provides a flexible Automated Attendant builder.Select the type of action desired. Inc. 4. 8. Each child node is either an action or a condition which may be expanded to see it's underlaying actions. · Conditions are used to respond to user input. Basic steps to create an automated attendant 1. fully integrating all of edgeBOX's VoIP PBX functionalities.3. or a number is dialed.For actions to be executed when a condition is met.

· If user pressed keys: This condition will compare the keys typed be the caller. · Hangup: the call will be hung-up. This way you could compose complex sequences for edgeBOX to execute on the call. You can add several rule actions. As an example you could play a sound. · DISA: Stands for Direct Inward System Access. Automatic Attendant's Conditions Conditions are used to execute a set of actions based on the user's input. . Inc. wait for 10 seconds and then forward the call to some Conference. You must enter the set of keys that should be pressed in the Keys field. the selected sound file will be played and all numbers entered by the caller will be ignored until the message has completed. · Forward to Conference: you can choose a conference number for the call to be forwarded to (see Conferences). Allows someone calling in from outside the telephone switch (PBX) to obtain an "internal" system dialtone and dial calls as if from one of the extensions attached to the telephone switch. the drop-down list will show you all currently configured automated attendants for you to choose the one you want. Critical Links. · Play in background: similar to Play.134 edgeBOX 5. · Forward to Group: here the call will be answered by some phone in the group you specify from the drop-down list at the right side. first is asked the user to enter the passcode before getting dialtone. · If user pressed invalid keys: This condition will execute the underlying actions. when the action DISA is executed. the user gets authenticated automatically. The DISA application may require the user to enter a passcode. and will execute the underlying actions if the keys match the ones you specified on this condition. · Answer: the call will be answered. instead of being forced to wait for the sound to finish. If you select that option and indicate the passcode. if the user didn't pressed any keys (after a 5 seconds timeout). the user will hear dialtone on which a call may be placed. · If user didn't press any key: This condition will execute the underlying actions. If you do not enter a passcode. We advise you to ALWAYS enter a passcode. · Start IVR: this action will start the execution of the specified automated attendant menu (IVR). Is it secure? This type of access has SERIOUS security implications. Rule actions can be moved Up and Down with the help of the corresponding buttons.0 Help · Forward to Queue: with this option the call will be forward to the queue you choose (see Queues). · Wait: this action makes the call wait for the specified number of seconds. and GREAT care must be taken NOT to compromise your security. followed by the pound sign (#). · Play: the caller will listen to the sound file you can choose. when the DISA action is executed. if the sequence of keys pressed by the user is not matching any of the previous conditions. but in this case the user can press keys while listening. in that case the caller will be able to dial the internal extension he wishes to reach. additionally you can also choose the Internal Extensions option. If the passcode is correct.

4. Next you must specify a set of time Rules. · Days: you can either specify a range of week days or a single week day.IP-PBX and VoIP 135 8. Incoming Call Rules menu.. 3. 2. vacations. holiday periods that you can then easily use when defining your call rules. You would call this schedule WorkHours2ndSemester09. To define a schedule proceed as follows: 1. You can specify multiple rules for a schedule. Inc. As an example you could specify a three rules based schedule as: ''Date: from 1/7/2009 to 31/12/2009'' AND ''Time: from 9h00m to 18h59m'' AND ''Days: from Monday to Friday''. reducing the overall cost of your voice communications. You can have distinct rules based on Phone Dialing. . 5. · Time: you can specify any time span within a day. You can do this based on: · Date: you can either specify a range of calendar days or a single day. Enter a name identifying the schedule in the Name field. Dialed Number and Time.3. since you can create rules based on destination number in order to use the least cost route for that destination. Go to the IP-PBX section. In that case the schedule will actually be defined as the superposition of all rules (logic AND).4 Define your outgoing call rules Outgoing Call Rules instruct edgeBOX on how to route calls to the outside world. Please refer to the IP-PBX section's Outgoing Call Rules menu. This is very useful to specify working hours. From that menu you can: · Configure edgeBOX to require PIN authentication for outgoing calls · Configure Outgoing Call Rules and Access Control policies for specific Groups or Devices · Configure the Emergency route Critical Links..3 Schedules Schedules allow you to define periods of time for executing rules in Incoming Call Rules. Click New button. Usually Outgoing Call Rules are used with Least Cost Routing (LCR) in mind. from 0h0m up to 23h59m. Click the Schedules option in the Related Topics section of the menu. 8. Give me an example.

136 edgeBOX 5. 8. you can use patterns such as 123*: this will match all calls to numbers starting with 123. Inc. but only to find the correct Route to use. When active the PBX will block outgoing calls if the user supplied invalid credentials or if the user doesn't have the necessary permissions to make the call. · Time of day: the period of the day for which this rule will apply · Routes: in the routes section you define · Route: which line (or lines) should be used to make the call · Outbound Pattern: the number to dial out. · Type of call: Free. i. . Click the Require users to authenticate/Don't require users to authenticate to change it. namely: · Inbound Pattern: the Dialed Number. the system will still check the type of each call. International or Special Call.0 Help Related Topics: · Configuring Voice Lines · Phones Groups Access Control · Automatic Call Recording · Configure usage of ENUM routes 8.1 Authentication edgeBOX supports authentication of outgoing calls. Critical Links. Local. In this mode of operation users are not required to supply a PIN when making calls.4. Mobile. here you can reuse pattern matches from the Inbound Pattern. the type of outgoing calls a user is allowed to make.e. The Outgoing Call Rules menu in the IP-PBX section displays the current status of the authentication service at the top.4. As usual the green/gray colors are used to show the operational status of the Outgoing Calls Authentication service. are also set on user creation. more details below. Authentication is based on a PIN assigned on user creation. Outgoing call permissions.2 Rules Definition An Outgoing Call Rule is defined by the following data: · Conditions: this is where you define the conditions when to apply the rule. Long Distance. When inactive.

Enter the amount of time in seconds (like 30).Repeat 7 to 11 adding all routes you wish to use as fall back routes. One example is when you need to add prefixes to select a specific provider. Goto IP-PBX > Outgoing Call Rules.Click Add. 5. Critical Links. Enter the dialed pattern (or number) you want as a condition to apply this rule (like 001* for all numbers started with 001. you may use several X characters to match a specific number of digits. 3. this would indicate a 9 followed by exactly 3 other digits (which may or may not include the digit 9) 9. in these cases edgeBOX will change it at the protocol level but produces no effect as the provider will override it. Not all providers allow this to be changed. X matches exactly one digit. The 'X's must be uppercase. if you wish to transform the number. Enter a name for the rule (like US_Calls) in the Name field. Enter the number (pattern) that should be dialed (usually the same as the Inbound Pattern you entered in 3) in the Outbound Pattern field. . If you entered 9XXX.. 7. Select the route (or line) you want the call to follow through in the Route field. The outbound pattern may differ from the inbound. 2. thus your inbound pattern would be 9* (all numbers starting with 9).Select the Access Control tab. Click New button in the toolbar. whilst your outbound pattern would be 10109*. Steps to create a new outgoing call rule 1. · CallerID: outgoing caller ID. More details. 12. All these additional routes will be used if the previous one is not available or times out. in the From and To fields.IP-PBX and VoIP 137 · Timeout: timeout for this route. 13. or 800XXXXXXX for all 10 digit numbers started with 800) in the Inbound Pattern field. More details. 10. Other situation is when you want an outbound prefix like 0. in this case the Inbound pattern would be 0* and the Outbound pattern would be *. 4.If you want to enforce a specific Caller ID for the call.. Examples: The 9* indicates a digit 9 followed by any other numbers. Enter the time period you want this rule to be applicable. Inc. 8. The rule is only applied to calls made during the specified time period. 6. this route shall ring before ending the call (or falling to the next route if defined) in the Timeout field. In the both patterns (outbound and inbound) you can use two special characters: * matches all remaining digits. 11. check the Caller ID and enter the number (or text) you want in the CallerID field. This way you can have different rules in different time schedules to the same destination number. Caller ID is the identifier displayed (usually the number associated with the phone line) in the destination phone. Classify the type of access level required to use this rule (like Free) in the Type of Call field. say a prefix of 1010 needs to be added...

Default Outgoing Call Rules There are two pre-configured outgoing call rules in edgeBOX: · Demo rule: This rule is meant for testing purposes only. Critical Links. You can easily identify it by the red cross icon .0 Help 14. The emergency rule it's a system rule and cannot be deleted. Goodbye”. If everything is working properly your call will be answered and you'll listen an automated attendant saying “Welcome. 3. and then the call will finish. Steps to setup the Emergency call rule 1. 15.4.138 edgeBOX 5. In a sentence this rule could be read as “Calls to any number (*). Inc. or if the call is coming from a Device in the Allowed area (like DISA). for whom you want to be able to use the rule. meaning that every connected phone (even phones in "not registered" state due to bad password) are allowed to make the call. and will match all calls (except if rules with more specific conditions are applicable). . at any time (00:00 – 23:59) made from any phone (Access Group Default) will follow routes specified”. demo-proxy is a ITSP connection to Critical Links data center for you to test your edgeBOX setup. · Default rule: This rule is the most generic rule. See more in Configuring Voice Lines. The rule will only be applied if the phone making the call belongs to a group in the Allowed area. Thank you for calling. Note: You can test the Demo rule by dialing 123 in one of the already connected phones. Note: When you first receive an edgeBOX.Move the Groups and the Devices from Denied to Allowed. thus your edgeBOX needs a working internet connection for this test to work. Goto IP-PBX > Outgoing Call Rules. 8.g: 911 or 112) is dialed. 2. made from any phone will follow demo-proxy route”. Select the rule Emergency and click Edit button in the toolbar (double mouse click also works). Please note that this call is made through a connection to Critical Links servers. Enter the emergency number (like 911) in the Emergency Number field. so you need to edit this rule and add the routes you've connected. In a sentence this rule could be read as “Calls to number 123.Click Save to save the rule. the Default rule doesn't include any routes (lines) to the PSTN.3 Emergency number The Emergency rule is a special rule to be used when the emergency number (e. at any time. This rule behaves pretty much the same way as other rules but authorization and authentication policies are bypassed.

say a prefix of 1010 needs to be added. The Voice Lines panel allows you to manage all these interfaces in a consistent unified approach. 10. The 'X's must be uppercase.. More details. you may use several X characters to match a specific number of digits. Enter the amount of time in seconds (like 30). in the Related Topics corner. 8. The outbound pattern may differ from the inbound. 7. If you entered 9XXX.IP-PBX and VoIP 139 4. this route shall ring before ending the call (or falling to the next route if defined) in the Timeout field. Enter the number (pattern) that should be dialed (usually the same as the Emergency Number you entered in 3) in the Outbound Pattern field. . One example is when you need to add prefixes to select a specific provider.5 Configuring Voice Lines edgeBOX can be connected to the public telephony network or to the IP network in a number of ways.. If you want to enforce a specific Caller ID for the call. this would indicate a 9 followed by exactly 3 other digits (which may or may not include the digit 9) 6. Select the route (or line) you want the call to follow through in the Route field.Click Save to save the rule.. or pure VoIP interfaces such as SIP or IAX2.. Not all providers allow this to be changed. More details. Click Add. the Outgoing Call Rules and the MailFax Accounts menus. With edgeBOX you can manage your connections such as ISDN or FXO-FXS hardware. if you wish to transform the number. Other situation is when you want an outbound prefix like 0. 5. Voice lines are classified as follows: Critical Links. check the Caller ID and enter the number (or text) you want in the CallerID field. Repeat 5 to 8 adding all routes you wish to use as fall back routes. in these cases edgeBOX will change it at the protocol level but produces no effect as the provider will override it. Examples: The 9* indicates a digit 9 followed by any other numbers. When the panel loads you get a summary display of all your phone lines and corresponding status. Inc. whilst your outbound pattern would be 10109*. 9. Please go to the IP-PBX section. Caller ID is the identifier displayed (usually the number associated with the phone line) in the destination phone. All these additional routes will be used if the previous one is not available or times out. You can reach the Voice Lines popup from the Incoming Call Rules . 8. X matches exactly one digit. in this case the Inbound pattern would be 0* and the Outbound pattern would be *. thus your inbound pattern would be 9* (all numbers starting with 9). In the both patterns (outbound and inbound) you can use two special characters: * matches all remaining digits.

0 Help · Public Lines: Lines connected directly to the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). The signalling protocol used is SIP (Session Initiation Protocol).. press the Settings. Inc.1 VoIP Providers To enable edgeBOX to connect to a VoIP provider on the Internet. Authentication · Authentication is not required · Authenticate with credentials: if the provider requires authentication please fill in the Username and Password. · IP Address / Hostname: type-in the IP address or the FQDN of your provider. Calls received on this lines are considered internal calls. supported signalling protocols are SIP and IAX2. 8. How to create a remote office connection? · All Lines: Display all the above mentioned connection types plus FXS lines. Step 1: in the first dialog you need to define the destination host and authentication for the connection. The panel will automatically display all lines installed based on your hardware configuration. button and type-in: · Register Name · Authentication Name · From User · From Domain · Outbound Proxy · Realm · Contact Critical Links. How to create a VoIP Provider connection?. please load the Voice Lines dialog and click the New button. meaning that extensions can be called directly. Calls received on this lines are considered internal calls. · Remote PBX: Lines connected to a PBX (includes ISDN BRI and ISDN PRI). Please fill the details regarding your VoIP provider account: · Name: type in an identification name for this provider. where you can connect directly analog phones or fax machines. . meaning that extensions can be called directly.5. additionally you can Customize Authentication Fields. The supported line types include FXO. · VoIP Providers: IP connections to VoIP providers.140 edgeBOX 5. In the subsequent dialog choose Connect to a VoIP provider on the Internet and press Next. ISDN BRI and ISDN PRI. · Remote Offices: IP connnections to other office..

This will make for every call routed through that rule. press Next. 2. Go to IP-PBX > Outgoing Call Rules. so if for a given Outbound Route you want ENUM service to be used. you just need to add the ENUM line to your route. Step 2: in the second dialog you will define codecs and other advanced options. 1. info and rfc2833 8. Use the Up and Down buttons to place the ENUM at your desired execution order (typically it should come first). you need to add ENUM line to your list of routes. . Inc. 4. You can also select the preferred order of use. In edgeBOX ENUM service is conceptualized as a voice line. 3. · Manage Codecs to be used on this connection: select the codecs to be used (these codecs have to be supported by the provider). meaning that whenever you want a given Outgoing Rule to search and use ENUM service. Critical Links. 5. to send a query to each active ENUM server to try to lookup the called PSTN number.5.IP-PBX and VoIP 141 For convenience you can use the Test Connection button to validate the connection. Click Add. How to use ENUM service? ENUM service is used like a Voice Line. and enter the desired Outbound pattern. For more information see Codecs section. For more details about ENUM see Telephone Number Mapping. which is a service to map PSTN telephone numbers into VoIP URLs. Select ENUM in the Route combobox. You may choose to provide: · Max Calls: maximum number of simultaneous calls allowed.2 ENUM service edgeBOX supports ENUM. Double click the rule where you want to use ENUM (or create a new rule). Please note that calls coming through trusted SIP proxies are only trusted if the proxy name is equal to the FROM header. · Manage DTMF and other advanced options: · Disable NAT support · Disable Keep Alive · DTMF Mode: inband. Once you're done. and if found the call will proceed as an URI call.

resulting in a better use in bandwidth.3 Remote Offices The Remote Office functionality allows the creation of an IAX or SIP trunk between two edgeBOXs. Click Save button. Authentication · Password: the password to use in the connection.arpa). If you need to use others follow the steps below: 1. Select Voice Lines option in Related Topics section. 2. To enable edgeBOX to connect to a Remote Office. please load the Voice Lines dialog and click the New button. Advanced Options · Manage Codecs: click the Codecs. 3. Click Save button.. Now all the Outgoing Rules that you've configured to use ENUM will query the specified servers. as if the phone was registered on edgeBOX A. Now. ). Go to IP-PBX > Outgoing Call Rules. button and use the following dialog to enable/ Critical Links. . allowing you to make a conference call between two remote offices with no costs. How to configure ENUM service? By default edgeBOX comes preconfigured with two ENUM server (e164.142 edgeBOX 5.5. Step 1: in the first step you need to define a name and a security key for the conection: Name: a descriptive name for the connection (such as office2. 8. Calls between these devices benefit from an optimised connection. for example).org and e164..0 Help 6. 4. etc. Inc. making call conferences. all VoIP functionalities will be available for the remote edgeBOX users (making local calls. Use Add and Remove buttons to setup your ENUM servers. Note that besides calling internal extensions. In the subsequent dialog choose Connect to a Remote Office and press Next. A benefit of this configuration is that an extension from edgeBOX A is able to call an extension registered in edgeBOX B. outbound calls following this rule will be converted to URI Calls whenever the ENUM server returns a valid URI for the dialed number. Double click the ENUM Service line. 5.

ports in NT Mode are available when you configure your Incoming Call Rules. IP-PBX menu. For each specific type follow the details below: · ISDN BRI · ISDN PRI · Analog FXO-FXS 8. .. All supported VoIP card types are automatically detected and the system is automatically configured so these cards can be used by the IP-PBX. 8. you can configure the following parameters: Mode Choose the desired operating mode: · This line connects to an ISDN Phone: if this line will be used to connect a phone.4. button and choose the protocol SIP or IAX.IP-PBX and VoIP 143 disable and prioritize the application of audio and video codecs for this connection. select the desired entry and click the Edit button. Each card type has it's own specific set of configurations. for SIP don't forget the Max.1 ISDN BRI When editing a BRI port.5. Simultaneous calls value..5. Click Next. To access them. · Manage Protocol (IAX or SIP): click the Protocol. Critical Links.4 Hardware edgeBOX supports automatic hardware detection. Step 2: in the second step you need to specify the Remote Office location: · IP Address / Hostname: type-in the IP address or the FQDN of the remote office IP-PBX. All supported card types are displayed in the Voice Lines popup. Press the Finish button when done. Inc. NT Mode . See Codecs section for more information. · Automatically configure remote server: check the box and type-in the administration password of the remote host.

you get a two tabbed dialog window: General · Mode: shows you the current operating mode for the port. Connection Type Choose the desired connection type: Point to Multi-Point (PMP) or Point to Point (PTP). · Point to Multi-Point (PMP) · Point to Point (PTP) MSN numbers The MSN numbers are your public phone numbers.144 edgeBOX 5.0 Help · This line connects to an ISDN Line: if this line will be used to connect edgeBOX to the exterior using ISDN.5. How to change mode? Critical Links. additionally the number of ports (31 ports in E1 mode. 8. PMP links allow to connect up to 8 terminals in parallel along the bus.4. it allows edgeBOX to integrate with PBX's which work with overlap digits. Edit and Remove buttons to manage the list of numbers to which this line accepts calls. it can be E1 or T1. You can use this option to restrict the inbound calls you accept on this ISDN line.2 ISDN PRI When editing a PRI port. Others Select the following two options as required: · Consider calls on this line as internal calls (Trusted Line): select this option if you want inbound and outbound calls through this line to be considered internal calls by edgeBOX. Accepting calls restrictions: · Accept calls to any number · Accept only calls to the following numbers and ignore other calls: use the Add. 22 ports in T1 mode). ports in TE Mode are available as outbound routes when you manage Outgoing Call Rules. this means that the inbound call rules and outbound call rules will not be applied to these calls. · Wait for all incoming digits before fallback to Dial Plan: select this option if you want to wait for all incoming digits before fallback to Dial Plan. PTP links allow only one TE to be connected. TE Mode. NOTE: changing this option requires restarting edgeBOX's PBX and thus hanging-up all ongoing calls. Inc. .

Inc. the following settings may be changed: · SwitchType: switching used by the line. used on the client side. · QSIG. Available options are: · EuroISDN. Note that this option is only displayed for cards that support echo cancellation. · E&M · Timing: · Primary Master · Secondar Master · Slave · Coding: · HDB3 · AMI Critical Links. · Consider calls on this line as internal calls (Trusted Line): select this option if you want inbound and outbound calls through this line to be considered internal calls by edgeBOX. used in Europe. · NET. · Group: the current Group. it allows edgeBOX to integrate with PBX's which work with overlap digits. . Advanced The advanced tab gives you access to further configuration details In the Advanced tab of the configuration details for PRI cards. · Signalling: signalling used by this span. · Wait for all incoming digits before fallback to Dial Plan: select this option if you want to wait for all incoming digits before fallback to Dial Plan. · Enable Echo Cancellation: select this option if you want the card to use the embedded echo cancellation mechanisms. this means that the inbound call rules and outbound call rules will not be applied to these calls. Available options are: · CPE.IP-PBX and VoIP 145 · Ports: the current port assignment (example 5-35 for an E1). used on the network side.

146 edgeBOX 5. National. · FXS Module: should be connected to an analogue phone or fax machine. Be careful not to connect phone lines (PSTN lines) in the FXS port. National. please refer to your support service for more information on how to proceed. the port will stop working. Inc.2.5. 8. If you do so.4.3 Analogue FXO-FXS To allow connection to analogue lines. the port will still not work. Local.0 Help ISDN Signaling · Dial Plan: choose from Unknown. International. 8. International. edgeBOX supports TDM Digium cards. Dynamic. Private.1 How to change configuration mode (E1 / T1) To change the mode from E1 to T1 (or vice-versa) you need to access the hardware and configure jumpers accordingly.5. Local. · Local Dial Plan: choose from Unknown. · International Prefix: check the box and enter the desired prefix. To see more information about E1 and T1 see here. Private. Dynamic. allowing you to receive or make calls using the PSTN network. When editing an FXO-FXS port you'll be prompted by a panel with two tabs: Critical Links.4. Customize National and International Prefixes · National Prefix: check the box and enter the desired prefix. you will have to reboot edgeBOX. FXO and FXS modules may be installed in this card: · FXO Module: should be connected to an analogue line. . Even if you unplug the phone line cable and connect an analog phone into the port.

. · This line has a direct phone number assigned: only for FXO mode. when an analog phone is in Twinning. · Sound Volume Gain (dBs): adjust the volume for transmission and reception on this line. so it is necessary to the user to press the # (cardinal) key after answering. Inc. · Enable Echo Cancellation: only if card supports echo cancellation. edgeBOX is not able to know if the call was answered or not because it is an analog line. Advanced · Enable "#" confirmation for outgoing twinned calls: only for FXO mode. . check then box and type-in the desired direct phone number for this line. · Mode: FXO or FXS.6 Phone operations This section of the manual brings together hands-on information on how to execute several useful operations or configurations directly with your phone: · Blind and Supervised Transfers · Group Calls · Intercom Calls · Call Listening and Call Whispering · Call Pick-Up · Twinning · Follow Me Critical Links. only for FXO mode. if the call is answered on the twin phone. · This line receives dialtone: select the period: immediately or up to n seconds.. 8. otherwise the extension will keep on ringing despite the call having already been answered by the user. this will inform edgeBOX that the call was picked up and edgeBOX will stop ringing the other extension. show me more details.IP-PBX and VoIP 147 General · Number: number of lines for this card. you need to select this option if you have Twinning enabled on your analog phone and you are not in the USA.

If you make a mistake when dialling the number you're transferring the caller to.148 edgeBOX 5. 4. Inc. If the person says yes. You will hear the busy line tone. · Supervised Transfer: transfers a call to another phone by putting it on hold and allowing you to talk to the transfer destination phone. for example.How to do it? 1.1 Blind and Supervised Transfers edgeBOX allows you to execute Calls Transfers from your phone to other phones. Supervised Transfer . After the person answers. Blind Transfer . hang up your phone and the call that is on hold will be transferred to the recipient. When you are answering a call. Critical Links. Example: #12001 to forward the call to extension 2001. Dial the prefix for a blind transfer and the telephone number you wish to transfer the incoming call to. inform the caller that you are going to transfer the call. this allows you to determine if the transfer will succeed and if the person at the other end will actually be able to accept the call. ask if you can transfer the call. . To do that use a Supervised Transfer instead. When you are answering a call. There are two major kinds of transfers: · Blind Transfer: immediately transfers the call to another number. Also. The caller is immediately connected to the number you transferred the call to. which means the transfer is complete and you can hang up. you cannot check to see if the number you are transferring the call is busy or offline. The call on hold will be transferred back to you and you can inform the person holding that it is not possible to transfer the call.How to do it? 1. If the person says no wait until he/her hangs up. Dial the number of the phone number you wish to transfer the incoming call to. Dial the prefix for a supervised transfer (*2 by default. The caller will no longer be able to hear you. before making the transfer. 3. 2.6. 2. 4. but you can change it). inform the caller that you are going to transfer the call. you and the caller will be disconnected from the original call. 3. it is also know as Attended Call Transfer.0 Help · One Touch Recording · Labeling CDR records with Cost Centers 8.

then you added Mr. Mr. Mr Sousa's and Mr. When you create Groups of phones you are prompted for an optional Extension number to be assigned to the group. Alves' and Mr Sousa's phones will stop ringing.2 Group Calls Group Calls are calls directed at a Group extension number (instead of a Phone extension number). Mr Sousa's and Mr Carreira's phones will start ringing. That's the group's extension.3 Intercom Calls An Intercom Calls is a special kind of call for which the destination phone will automatically answer the call and go into loudspeaker mode.How to do it? To end a Supervised Transfer and get back to the initial caller you can dial the Hangup Key Code (*0 is the default key code for Hangup but you can change it if you want to). all three. Critical Links. Carreira's phones to the group. Related Topics: · Operation Key Codes (Prefixes) 8. .IP-PBX and VoIP 149 If the person to whom you've are transferred the call doesn't answer it in about 15 seconds. This also happens if that person answers the call but hangs up the phone before you do. Give me an example.. that's how a Group Call works. Let's assume you've just created a new group of phones called whosincharge and you've chosen the 5432 extension for the group. Inc. The call will be listened to by the people near that phone. When anyone picks up the call on any of the group's phones all the others stop ringing. Hangup a Supervised Transfer . the call is transferred back to you. Why is this useful ? This is useful for making quick announcements (for example: a short request for the sales team to gather for a quick meeting in the hall).6. Mr Alves'. if Mr Carreira picks up his phone first you will start talking to him. if you dial 5432 from your phone. 8.. or to try to reach someone that might be nera the phone but might not be authorized to answer it without being specifically requested to. The result of a call directed at a group extension is that all phones in that group will ring: that's a Group Call. Alves'.6.

6. The access to this feature is can be restricted based on the Phones Access Control policies. without B's knowledge (just like whispering in the A's ears). The availability of these features is restricted by the Phones Access Control policies and depends on the three phones involved: if any of the target phones can not be listened to. while listening to the conversation between A and B.150 edgeBOX 5.4 Call Listening and Call Whispering Call Listening This feature is gives you the ability of a user at a phone C to listen to a call between phone A and phone B. Additionally. Phones currently supported for this feature are: · Snom · Linksys · Aastra · Grandstream · Polycom Related Topics: · Phones Access Control 8.0 Help To make an Intercom Call you need to dial *9<number> (if you dial *9 followed by a group number. . To do this dial *990*<extension number>: you will listen the ongoing call at that extension. only phones with loudspeaker mode can receive such calls. only the person at phone A. Call Whispering This feature consists in the ability to secretly talk to the person at phone A. Inc. then all phones that belong to the group will answer the call and go into loudspeaker mode). The person at phone B does not ear your voice. instead of an extension number. You need to dial *991*<extension number>: your phone will allow you to listen to the ongoing call at <extension number> and you will be able to "whisper" to that extension. or Critical Links.

To: · Enable twinning: dial *90. Call Pick-Up operations are bound to the limitations defined for the Groups the phone belongs to (please make sure to review those settings in the Groups section of this manual). Related Topics: · Phones Access Control 8. Related Topics: · Phone Groups 8. Make sure to check out the details at the Phones Access Control section in this manual. Your phone will be able to pick up calls: · by pressing *8: will pick-up any call that belongs to any of the groups the phone belongs to.6.6. Twining will be now enabled. to pick a call ringing at extension 2001. Inc. · Change the phone your phone is twinning with: dial *92* followed by the phone Critical Links.5 Call Pick-Up Call Pick-Up is the ability to grab a ringing call at a given extension. then none of this will be possible. to some extent. dial the Pick Up prefix *8 plus 2001: *82001. disable and change the number of the phone the extension is twinning with. . · by pressing *8<phone extension number>: will pick-up a call to that specific extension. directly on the phone itself instead of the through edgeBOX (twinning must be allowed on that phone).IP-PBX and VoIP 151 your own phone can not listen to calls. be managed directly through the phone: the phone user can enable. · Disable twinning: dial *91. · by pressing *8<group extension number>: will pick-up a call to that specific group. For example.6 Twinning The Twinning feature can. Twinning will be disabled.

*92*912154014 (to actually start the twinning process). . Critical Links. if you are on a meeting room and you want to forward calls that arrive at your extension (ext: 2013) to the phone that is on the meeting room. · If you are close to another extension . you should pick up your work phone and dial. Related Topics: · Twinning 8. let's assume your cell phone is 912154014 and you want your work phone to twin with your cell phone.Allows you to forward calls that arrive at your internal extension to another extension or phone where you are at the moment. then. For example. pick up the meeting room phone and dial *12*2013. dial *93 and the call you are answering in the cell phone will continue in the network phone.0 Help number to twin with.Dial *14* plus the phone number or the extension number you want your calls to be forward to. · If you are close to the extension you want to forward calls to . you can pick up the call on any of them. How to do it? To enable Follow Me: · If you are close to your extension . Or you can indicate your personal cell phone number instead ( *14*912154103). for example. You can't do this operation in edgeBOX's interface.. For example. from now on if your work phone rings your cell phone will ring too. Calls that arrive at your extension will not be forward to another phone anymore.Dial *13*. *90 (to enable twinning) and. · Transfer an ongoing call from the cell phone to the work phone: on your cell phone.7 Follow Me Follow Me . that you can pick up your extension and dial *14*4002. Calls that arrive at your extension will not be forward to another phone anymore.152 edgeBOX 5. and there is a phone there (extension 4002). only in the network phones. first.Dial *12* plus your extension number. To disable Follow Me: · If you are close to your extension . show me an example.6. this way all calls that arrive at your extension will be forward to your cell phone. if you have a meeting on a meeting room. and all calls that arrive at your extension will be forward to the meeting room phone. All calls that arrive at your extension will be forward to the meeting room phone.Dial *13* plus your extension number (example: *13*2013).. Inc.

An e-mail message will be sent to the user's e-mail account. Inc. Depending on global Voicemail configurations the sound file may or may not be attached to the e-mail. if the phone on the other end of the conversation belongs to a group that can not be recorded then the recording will not take place.9 Labeling CDR records with Cost Centers CDR Project Codes If. Related Topics: · Logs · VoIP activity logs . during a call. The availability of the One Touch recording (OTR) feature for a given call is configurable on a per Group basis and depends on the phones at both ends: if the phone trying to use OTR belongs to a group that can not record calls then the recording will not occur.6. the user dials #79<code> the call will be marked with that <code> in the corresponding CDR log line.8 One Touch Recording Users can start the recorder by pressing *9 during the call. .IP-PBX and VoIP 153 8. are available through the logmaster FTP account.CDR Critical Links. After the call finishes the file with the call recorded will be available at the user's Voicemail. The CDR files. Related Topics: · Phone Groups and Access Control 8. additionally.6.

· Static conferences: created by the administrator. Conferences menu.7 Conference Rooms You can setup edgeBOX's conference support in the IP-PBX section. the number users dial to access the service.to show you the current service administrative status. you can Change.green or gray . . · Security-enabled Conference: the access to this conference will be restricted to users that know the conference PIN.0 Help 8. The default is 9000. other users should to dial the pre-defined dynamic conference extension and enter the conference room number. Critical Links. · Conference Pin: type the desired conference PIN. Any registered user may dial the pre-defined dynamic conference extension (9000 by default) and create a conference just by dialing any desired number. · Music On-Hold: choose the music Playlist for this conference. or Conference Room Number) · Type: you need to choose from · Public: this conference will be accessible by anyone that tries to join it and you can not specify a moderator. That number will become the conference room number. If you want to. Two major types of conferences are supported: · Dynamic conferences: created freely by the users. Inc. additionally you will have an option to choose a moderatror PIN. Static Conferences This other type of conference is created by the administrator. Dynamic Conference service To enable dynamic conferences you need to start the Dynamic Conference service in the usual service bar at the top of the page: you should click the Start Service/Stop Service links on the right and the bar will change color . The list of static conferences configured is displayed in the list at the bottom of the Conferences menu. To create a New static conference a two tabbed dialog window will show: General · Number: type-in the desired Conference Number (also known as the Room Number... To join this conference.154 edgeBOX 5.

Creating Queues To create a new Queue you need to press the New button (to edit an existing Queue the operations are similar). you can choose one of the following options: Critical Links. Configured queues are shown in a tabular manner. An appropriate dialog window will popup. · Conference Pin: 9910. While in a conference. This popup contains two main tabs. and others. · Have a moderator for this conference: check the box if you want a moderator and type-in the Moderator PIN and repeat for safety · Don't allow members to communicate until moderator joins the conference: check the box if you want this behaviour. Inc.IP-PBX and VoIP 155 Advanced · Maximum: maximum number of simultaneous members the conference may accept. · Announce when a user joins or leaves the conference: select or deselect the check box. The conference moderator has the same privileges as normal users plus Lock/unlock conference and Eject last user. edgeBOX is shipped with a pre-configured Static Security-enabled conference for your convenience: · Number: 9010. · Assign the calls to: this option allows you to specify the so-called Ring Strategy . 8. · Moderator Pin: 9911. In the General tab you'll find: · Name: type a name for the queue (when editing an existing queue you cannot change it's name).the algorithm used to assign calls to agents. mute. .8 Managing Call Queues The Queues menu in the IP-PBX section allows you to manage edgeBOX's call queuing system. you can press the * to listen to the available options like increase/decrease volume.

· The agent that answered less calls. this way you can assign calls to users in a way that is independent of the extension the user might wish to use when starting work. which is the extension number of the callback login service. then. Type your password (same as the User PIN number). these extensions will be used by the queuing system to assign calls to. agents and/or extensions must be assigned to the queue. · Each agent in turn. Dial *22 followed by your by the User PIN number (see IP-PBX Authentication for more details). Inc. An automated attendant will answer. Callback Extension. you can use the Add and Remove buttons to manage the contents of the Agents list for each queue. a new popup will give you a list of users. without requiring the agent to have the phone off-hook (on call) to receive calls. Together with the status of the service there's also a parameter that you can change. · The agent that has been longer without calls. · Agents: since queued calls are answered by the queues's agents. This agent login method is useful for agents that are not fully dedicated to answering queue calls. users that don not have a PIN will be assigned one. Please follow the details here. Using this service whenever a call from a queue needs to be delivered to an agent. allowing them to have the phone on-hook as apposed to the standard method of having the call into the queue system always on going. · Each agent in turn but keep track of the order. Critical Links. The status of the callback login service is controlled by the service bar at the top of the page where you can Start and Stop the service. select an extension from the list and hit Add. the extension where the agent has logged in will ring. whoever is near that extension will now start receiving calls from this queue. · Add Agent: this options allows you to add users to the Queue. when you click the Add button please choose: · Add Extension: this option allows you to add extensions to the Queue. followed by the # key. In the Advanced tab you get to configure several advanced features of edgeBOX's queues. · A random agent.156 edgeBOX 5. 2. 1. CallBack Login Service CallBack agent service is a way for agents to be logged in. How can an agent login? The standard login for an agent is through the following steps. the last screen shows you this assignement.0 Help · The agent that picks up the phone first (all ring). select the users you wish to assign to the queue and click the Next button. . in order for it to function correctly.

and listening "Music on-hold". How can an agent login through Callback Service? The steps for an agent to login at the Callback Service are: 1. or you can · Play music from the Music On Hold library: in this case the caller will listen to music while waiting. Type your password (same as the User PIN number). followed by the # key. which is the User PIN number (see IP-PBX Authentication for more details). 3. 4. At this point the agent is logged in. Type your agent number. also remember to select the check box immediately below if you want the users to get also an estimate remaining time for the call to be answered. When asked by the extension number.. This method is very useful for "professional agents" that use an headset and are 100% dedicated to answering queue calls. 2. followed by the # key.IP-PBX and VoIP 157 3. Inc. which is the User PIN number (see IP-PBX Authentication for more details). Dial the Callback Login Extension (by default the number is 8000). Type the extension number where the calls to this agent shall be delivered. It will be logged in as long as the phone stays off-hook (on call). followed by # key. Type your password (same as the User PIN number). followed by # key. An automated attendant will answer. 8. 3.1 Advanced Settings for Queues In the Advanced tab you get to configure several optional features of edgeBOX's queues: · Waiting Sound: you can choose to · Play the regular ring tone. An automated attendant will answer. 4. How can an agent logout through Callback Service? The steps for an agent to logout at the Callback Service are: 1. just type # key. Dial the Callback Login Extension (by default the number is 8000). seconds: select this box and choose the time interval for edgeBOX to update the caller about his position on the queue. you should additionally specify: · Playlist: select the desired playlist from the drop-down list.8. · Indicate the postition in the queue every . 2. Type your agent number. Critical Links. · Calls Hangup: · Hangup the calls in the queue when there are no agents online: check the box if you want this. Calls delivered to the agent will be proceeded by a "bip" sound. .

at the expense of bandwidth.729? You need to download the codec from Digium web site. x86-32 directory on the Digium site. Inc. because it is compatible with most phones and softphones available on the market. a G.158 edgeBOX 5.0 Help · Hangup the calls that are not answered in . After downloading to your PC. Medium. and as such. edgeBOX supports several types of codecs allowing a flexible client configuration. which will then upload the file to the edgeBOX. The choice of the codec to be used usually results from a compromise between sound quality and bandwidth used. . select the browse button and choose the codec file and then the upload button. to be able to use it you have to activate it and purchase. unless one of the current users has completed their call. · Speex: Audio codec designed specifically for speech. It is the codec used in PSTN and ISDN lines. · G. The codec to purchase is: codec_g729a_v32_i386 in the asterisk-1. After uploading the file. If there isn't a specific system requirement. Provides good quality sound. well suited for VoIP. High.711 (ULAW): Known as the native codec in modern communication lines.711 version used in E1 European lines. · G. · Dialogic ADPCM: This is a legacy codec. it has the lowest latency as no type of compression is used. Audio Codecs · G.9 Codecs Codecs are used when converting an analogue voice signal to a digital one. you will need to activate the license(s) (which will be locked to your edgeBOX hardware). by pressing the activate button. This codec is selected by default in edgeBOX. It is the most commonly used codec for VoIP calls because. besides being supported by most VoIP providers. · Agent Answer Time 8. However. Thus. 3 users can simultaneously use the codec. seconds: please activate the box and choose the time in seconds if you want this behaviour for calls that don't get an answer in time. This codec is selected by default in edgeBOX. kept for compatibility with version 3 of edgeBOX. the fourth person will not be able to use this codec. · GSM: Usually used on European mobile networks. · Other Settings: · Maximum Number of simultaneous calls waiting · Relative priority of this queue: Low.711 (ALAW): Basically. Critical Links.729: Offers good sound quality with conservative use of bandwidth. Very High.4. if you purchase 3 licenses. Each license you purchase allows a single simultaneous use of the codec. How to activate G. this codec uses a small amount of bandwidth providing an acceptable quality of sound.. the choice should be ULAW.

Click the New button in the MailFax Accounts list. E-mail address: enter the e-mail address account of the person of your company that will receive all incoming faxes.IP-PBX and VoIP 159 After pressing the Activate button. for example. A dialog window will appear: FAX Account: Incoming Fax Settings 3. and PBX networks if the PBX networks are configured to support ADPCM. The data rate of the coding algorithm was designed to be able to operate between 40 Kbits/s and 2 Mbits/s. The e-mail will be converted to fax format and sent to the remote fax machine. incoming faxes are converted by edgeBOX to e-mails and then delivered at this e-mail address. The standard supports CIF and QCIF video frames with resolutions of 352x288 and 176x144 respectively (and 4:2:0 sampling with chroma resolutions of 176x144 and 88x72. Create a new fax account 1.324 based systems (PSTN and other circuit-switched network videoconferencing and videotelephony). you can. Press Activate to complete the process. This fax is then converted to an e-mail and sent to the fax mail account. PSTN. · G.264: Is a standard video codec capable of providing good video quality at substantially lower bit rates than previous standards (e. · H. 8.g. · H. or MPEG-4 Part 2). Inc. · iLBC: Low bit rate · G. 4. . this is the number people use when they sent faxes to your company. 2.726: ADPCM can be interchanged between packet voice. H. half or less the bit rate of MPEG-2.261: An 1990 ITU video coding standard originally designed for transmission over ISDN lines on which data rates are multiples of 64 kbit/s.263: is a video codec designed by the ITU-T as a low-bitrate encoding solution for videoconferencing. this is commonly known as HD-Voice. You can find the MailFax Accounts menu in the IP-PBX section. you will need to enter the License ID and other details which you entered when you purchased the License (as shown below).722: High quality voice codec. RTSP (streaming media) and SIP (Internet conferencing) solutions as well.10 MailFax Service With the MailFax service you can send faxes (via a software modem) from a fax machine to edgeBOX's fax gateway. It was first designed to be utilized in H. FAX Number: the DDI associated to your FAX line.263. fill this field with the e-mail account of your company's receptionist. Go to the MailFax Accounts menu. Fax E-mail Account: type the name of the e-mail address that will be used by the Critical Links.323 (RTP/IP-based videoconferencing). FAX Account: Outgoing Fax Settings 5. H. but has since found use in H. respectively). Video Codecs: · H.320 (ISDN-based videoconferencing). You may also send a fax via e-mail.

You can change the format the attachments and the language of the e-mails sent by edgeBOX. To change any of these settings: 1. click the Change. In the Authorization Type. if you type fax_account and the domain on edgeBOX is example. Go to the MailFax Accounts menu in the IP-PBX section. · Local + Password means that the users have to use the Webmail or the SMTP server of edgeBOX to send the e-mails and they also have to specify a password in the body of the e-mail to authenticate.0 Help network users to send e-mails that will be converted to faxes. The From field in the e-mails sent by edgeBOX with the incoming FAXes. for example. 8. if they have their edgeBOX e-mail account configured on Outlook and they send a fax through it. choose PDF or TIFF From E-mail 6. · Password means the users can send e-mails from any e-mail account.com.160 edgeBOX 5. the fax will not be accepted. in the Incoming section: 7. button. Retry Attempts: the number of times edgeBOX tries to send a fax when the number it is trying to fax to is busy. indicate from which e-mail accounts users can send the emails and if they are required to indicate a password. Display Number: your fax number. a new dialog will come up. 2. A short 3 fields summary displays the current configurations. usually this will be the DDI you typed above.com. Please enter: E-mail Language 4. then the fax server account will be fax_account@example. For instance. the fax will be accepted. select the desired language for the mailfaxes Attachment format 5. .. Inc. for example. but if they send the fax through a Gmail or Hotmail account or through an e-mail account of another edgeBOX. edgeBOX converts the received faxes to pdf files and sends them as e-mail attachments to the fax reception e-mail account you specified. Display Company Name: your company name to be displayed at the top of faxes sent bty edgeBOX. Change the type of the attachments. Authentication 9. edgeBOX sends all the faxes it receives as e-mails to the e-mail account you specified in English language. How to send a fax using MailFax service? Critical Links. Also. 3.. by default. change the language or change the From field of the emails By default. however they have to specify a password on the body of the e-mail to authenticate. 6. · Local means the network users can only send e-mails from the Webmail or from the edgeBOX local SMTP server.

it will convert the file in attach into a fax and try to send it to the phone number you indicated in the Subject of the e-mail. Open an e-mail client as Thunderbird or Outlook or edgeBOX's Webmail and create a new email. If authentication is required. Enter the e-mail address of your edgeBOX fax account in the To field. type PASSWORD: plus the fax account password in the first line of the body of the message. After edgeBOX receives this e-mail in the fax e-mail account. 6. 3. 4. .1 How to send a fax using MailFax? Lets suppose you wish to send a invoice to a customer: 1.10. Convert the document you want to send to PDF or TIFF format and add it to the e-mail as an attachment. Note that the document cannot have more than 25 pages. 2. Critical Links.IP-PBX and VoIP 161 Related Topics: · Voice Lines · E-mail server 8. 5. Send the e-mail. you will receive an e-mail from edgeBOX indicating if edgeBOX was able to deliver the fax to the recipient or if it couldn't deliver it because of some error or because of the receiver fax being busy. In the Subject type the fax number of your client. Inc. A little while after.

E-mail body Critical Links. · Name: the name to be used as the sender of the e-mail.0 Help 8. several global options allow you to configure the way users access their voicemail and the way the feature works globally. Go to the Options menu in the IP-PBX section. wether edgeBOX sends the voicemail file attached on the e-mail warning about voicemail.1 Voicemail When you created your SIP.11.162 edgeBOX 5.11 Advanced VoIP Options Several VoIP related advanced features are accessible via Options menu in the IP-PBX section. Click the Voicemail options.. Inc. this is important as some e-mail servers may reject this e-mail if the sending domain (the part at the right of the @ in the address you type) is unresolvable. In Voicemail you'll fin the current settings for: · Voicemail Number: 9999 is the default value. E-mail message from · Address: e-mail address to be used in the From field. · Voicemail · Call Parking · Automatic Call Recording · Operation Key Codes · Customize Sound Files · Define Country Zone · Echo Cancellation Options · G. In the popup dialog please enter: Extension Type the extension to be used for users to listen to voicemail. or does not exist. Analog or IAX phones you were prompted to configure individual Voicemail account for each. if users experience instability or don't receive the e-mail warnings please make sure you are using a resolvable domain. link to further specify other details.729 Codec License · Billing Interface Service · Asterisk Manager Interface · Network Address Translation (NAT) 8. · Attach sound file: Yes or No.. Additionally. .

Go to the Options menu in the IP-PBX section. Critical Links. park size. you can do it in the Options menu. You can rise or lower the available parking base number and the park size. 703 as example. The Operation Key Codes area shows you the current configuration for those operations. Inc. link and enter the values desired for: · Number to dial for parking: you need to dial this number for a call to be parked. 8. Blind Transfer. · Min length of message: voicemail messages shorter than this will not be saved..11. after this period the call is hungup. . IP-PBX section. Click the Call parking options. as usual.. 8. · Max length of message: voicemail messages longer than this will not be saved.. and immediately puts the conversation on hold. Pickup a call and Hangup operations.IP-PBX and VoIP 163 · Attach sound file to e-mail: check this box if you want the voicemail file to be attached to the e-mail notification messages.11.3 Operation Key Codes If you need to change the current key codes for the Assisted Transfer.. It is activated by dialing the parking number (by default 700. The Phone Operations section in this manual shows you the details on the usage of these codes. · Signature: signature of the notification messages. link and change the keycodes as needed. · Language: language used in notification messages. You can up the parked call from another internal phone later on by dialing 703 on the desired phone. if you wish to save your changes. · Parking available lines: total number of parking lines available.. button and enter: · Max Messages: Maximum number of messages that a user can have in his/her mailbox..2 Call Parking Call parking allows a person to put a call on hold at one telephone and continue the conversation from any other telephone set. in seconds. The pre-configured park numbers ranges from 700 to 714. Voicemail quotas Click the Properties. In the end. This action transfers the current telephone conversation to an unused park extension number. Hit the Change the keycodes. press the Save button. but you can change this). · Parking Max Time (seconds): enter the parking maximum time.

or Automated Attendants.. 5. You can now use this sound file when creating Incoming Call Rules. Click the Browse button and select a sound file from your file system (. Click Add button. for convenience. You can access it in the Related Topics area of the Incoming Call Rules menu or. Select the Sound Manager option at the Related Topics section. Upload a language sound bank 1. 4. like the voicemail prompts. 3. 7. Enter a description for the file (usually a text script of what the sound says). Select a sound bank file from your file system (. 5. 4. link in the Options menu.gsm files).11. Go to the IP-PBX section. . 2. Click Add.. both in the IP-PBX section.gz or . and select Sound Bank option. · System Sounds: contains all sounds used natively by the PBX. edgeBOX will use the language pack correspondent to the Country Zone definition in the Options menu.0 Help 8. Critical Links. Select My Sounds package. Upload a custom sound file 1. Click Add button and select Sound File option. In this process edgeBOX may be configured to playback instructions to the caller or warnings of several types. Go to the IP-PBX section.. Select the Sound Manager option at the Related Topics section. Click Open. Incoming Call Rules menu. The language pack will now be listed below System Sounds with the name of the language (like Portuguese). 2. · Language sounds: sound packages that contain system sounds translated for a given language.. The sound files used to accomplish this are accessible to you through the Sound Manager dialog. The sound files are divided in three groups: · My Sounds: your own custom sounds. Inc. you can reach it at the Customize Sound Files. conferences.zip format). where you can upload new sound files to be used in Automated Attendants.tar. Incoming Call Rules menu. 3. etc.4 Customize Sound Files edgeBOX can use sound prompts in several situations such as the process of receiving and routing an external call to a Queue for example. 6.164 edgeBOX 5.

Inc. The options are: · KB1: The default echo canceller. 8. Changing echo canceller will issue a restart of the VoIP service engine. the default sound bank will be used (system sounds). . user must check the checkbox. edit as needed.6 Echo Cancellation This panel offers a range of choices to allow for software echo cancellation. A popup dialog will open: · Zone: choose the appropriate country/zone for your needs. It's an evolution of KB1 and MG2 using a different approach. · National Prefix: may be filled by default. · Language: User may want to selected a language for the sound prompts different from the country tones applied to the phones. · The language for the sounds prompts.2. · OSLEC: Stands for "Open Source Line Echo Canceller". and it's considered the best configuration option for software echo cancellation.. which have echo cancellation checked. · MG2: A variation of KB1 to solve some of the scenarios where KB1 fails. edit as needed. and selected a different language. This is important because the ring and busy tones may differ from country to country · The frequency of the generated tones for the PBX phones. This is the built-in Zaptel echo canceller since Zaptel v1. if not. link in the Options menu. Note that the soundbank for the selected country must be installed. The software determines the best configuration from the initial line characteristics and preserves the settings for the period of the call. The echo cancellation will only be applied to analogue phones. This setting will apply country settings to three different areas: · The tone zone for all analog cards (if installed).. If this is the case. · International Prefix: may be filled by default.IP-PBX and VoIP 165 8. Usually produces much better results where KB1 and MG2 fail. and thus all CURRENT CALL WILL BE TERMINATED! Critical Links.11.11.5 Define Country Zone To configure specific regional/country settings go to the IP-PBX section and click the Define Country (Zone).

3 users can simultaneously use the codec. Thus.90.8 Billing Service Allow billing software.168. .729 Licensing This panel allows you to add support for the G. What is billing software? Billing software is an application used to calculate call costs. 255. 192.729 Licensing G. Once there hit the Run the G. if you purchase 3 licenses.. the fourth person will not be able to use this codec. to connect to edgeBOX's database. Options menu. retrieve that information all calculate and the cost for a billing service.0.0. x86-32 directory on the Digium site. only hosts on this IP segment will be allowed. If it can only be used from a specific computer of the local network then you need to type the fixed IP address of that computer. only this IP address will have access.128.4.0 Help 8.. in the IP-PBX section and click the G. · Only from a specific network: type in a network IP address and a Netmask..255. Critical Links.11. for example.7 G. Show me an example If the billing software can only be used from computers on the local network. Activate the Allow computers with billing service to connect to edgeBOX option and fill in the rest of the deitails: Authorized Computers Only the IP address(es) specified will be allowed to access the Billing service: · Only from a specific computer: type in a host IP address. the duration of the call or the user that made the call.168. 192. 8.166 edgeBOX 5.. In the following screen just fill in the license details as obtained from Digium and finish up the process. You will be requested to browse your computer for the file and then you need to click Next. To allow billing software to connect to edgeBOX go to the IP-PBX section. You need to download the codec from the Digium web site www.729 codec. The codec to purchase is: codec_g729a_v32_i386 in the asterisk-1. as the time of the day a call was made. and then the netmask of your network..11.. Each license you purchase allows only one usage of the codec at a time. link.729 installation wizard.90.255.com. edgeBOX saves all important information about calls. Inc.digium. then you have to indicate the IP address of your local network.729 Codec License. Billing software can connect to edgeBOX's calls database. Please go to the Options menu. the line used. for example. After downloading the codec to your PC you can install it with the help of edgeBOX's webadmin interface. link. such as Easylink for example. unless one of the 3 calls has finished. Click the Billing Interface Service options.

Follow the Asterisk Manager interface options.Database Name: edgereporting .Fields: all fields of the cdr table 8.Database Model: Asterisk . · The database structure: . · Password: the respective password. allowing you such diverse administration options as placing calls remotely or receiving events related to the state of calls and extensions.9 Manager Interface Manager If you enable the manager interface you will be able to establish a telnet connection to edgeBOX's IP PBX. only this IP address will have access. Configuring your billing software To connect the billing software on a computer to the edgeBOX. link and select the Allow computers with manager interface to connect to edgeBOX option. If at any time you don't need to allow the Billing Interface anymore just deselect the Allow computers with billing service to connect to edgeBOX option. you need to indicate: · The username and password you specified on edgeBOX when you activated the billing service. · Repeat Password: repeat for verification. · Only from a specific network: type in a network IP address and a Netmask. depending on the billing software you will use. In the end you will need to allow the Billing service in the Firewall.Table: cdr .11. . Inc. To configure the Manager Interface go to the Options menu in the IP-PBX section. · The port used for the billing service: TCP port 5432. Critical Links.. only hosts on this IP segment will be allowed.. Authorized Computers Only the IP address(es) specified will be allowed to access the Manager Interface · Only from a specific computer: type in a host IP address.IP-PBX and VoIP 167 Authentication Here you must configure a username and a password for the manager software to be able to access edegBOX: · Username: a username to be accepted by edgeBOX used for authentication. This interface may be useful if you own some kind of monitoring software which you want to integrate with edgeBOX.

168 edgeBOX 5.0 Help

Authentication Here you must configure a username and its password for the manager software to be able to access edegBOX: · Username: a username to be accepted by edgeBOX used for authentication; · Password: the respective password; · Repeat Password: repeat for verification. In the end you will need to allow the CTI service in the Firewall. If at any time you don't need to allow the Manager Interface just deselect the Allow computers with manager interface to connect to edgeBOX option.

8.11.10 Advanced NAT
You need to configure Advanced NAT if you have a scenario where edgeBOX does not connect directly to the Internet but is behind a Router with NAT and Port Forward, and you want to allow remote phones (a phone you have at home, for example) to register in edgeBOX and behave as internal extensions.

That being the case, please go to the Options menu in the IP-PBX section and follow the Network Address Translation (NAT) options... link. The Advanced NAT settings dialog window will come up. To indicate that edgeBOX is behind a router: 1. Activate the My box is behind a router with NAT option. 2. Indicate in the following field below the router WAN IP address or its hostmane.

Critical Links, Inc.

IP-PBX and VoIP 169 3. If you have local networks that are managed by the router and you have phones on those networks, select the option I have additional networks with phones to be served, and then, in the table below add an entry for each of those networks. Learn More... edgeBOX can detect phones that are on its local networks (LAN, DMZ and the VLANs). However, as you have a router in front of edgeBOX you may also have local network managed by the router. And you may also have phones on those networks. edgeBOX cannot recognize these phones automatically because it is not managing these networks. So you need to indicate to edgeBOX the networks so it can recognize the phones and allow them to register.

4. Click the Save button to save the settings. 5. To finish, you need then to configure on the router port forward from port 5060 of the router to port 5060 of edgeBOX.

8.12 Music On-Hold
Music On-Hold (MOH) allows you to specify a number of Playlists to be used when putting calls on hold. Playlists are lists of sound files to be used in several possible situations: · Queues: you can specify the playlist to be used on a per-queue basis (see the Queues section); · Conferences: you can specify the playlist conference members will listen to while they wait for the conference to start (please refer to Conferences section); · ICR: you can choose the playlist to be used for each call (see Incoming Call Rules).

Critical Links, Inc.

170 edgeBOX 5.0 Help You gain access to the Music On-Hold (MOH) configuration popup from the Related Topics corner in the Queues, Conferences and Incoming Call Rules menus in the IP-PBX section. It displays the current playlists on the left side. If you click a paylist you'll get it's contents on the right side. You can upload your own MP3 sound files to edgeBOX. These sound files will be kept in edgeBOX's MOH Gallery. You'll be able to build your own playlists by choosing sound files from the Gallery. Managing Playlists To add a new playlist just hit the New button and select Playlist. A new dialog will ask you for: · Playlist: enter the desired name for you new play list; · Play tracks randomly: select this box if you wan the tracks from this list to be played randomly. To add tracks to the Playlist choose the play list you want to add files to, click the New button and choose Track. The Gallery pop's up. Just select the tracks you'dd like to add and press Ok. You've just added a new track from the Gallery to your playlist. For each sound file displayed you can execute several actions with the buttons at the top: remove that file from the list, bring that file to the top of the list, bring it up one position, bring it down one position and bring in to the bottom if the list. Managing the Gallery To access the Gallery click New button and choose Track. The Gallery window will popup: · Available Tracks: at the top, a list shows you the available sound tracks in the gallery; · Delete: deletes tracks from the gallery; select a track and hit Delete to remove a track from the gallery; · Upload Track...: use this button to search your computer for more MP3 files to add to the Gallery.

8.13 Automatic Call Recording
edgeBOX can record phone calls automatically. The recordings are kept in edgeBOX internal storage. You can, at any time, access the recordings by FTP, download them to your computer and erase them to avoid disk space saturation. If you wish to activate this service please go to the IP-PBX section and choose the Options menu. Once there, search for the Automatic Call Recording area. You get a short summary showing you: · Status: states witch types of calls are currently configured for automatic recording; the possibilies are: Not recording any calls, Record all calls, Record all incoming calls, Record all outgoing calls; · Disk Usage: a coloured horizontal bar will show you, in graphical form, the relative disk space your call recordings are currently taking up.

Critical Links, Inc.

IP-PBX and VoIP 171

Hit the Call Recording options... link to configure the service. The Automatic Call Recording popup appears. As usual, you can globally enable and disable the service by hitting the Start Service / Stop Service options at the upper-right corner.

Types of Calls and Maximum disk size The types of calls being recorded and your current disk occupation are shown just below the service status bar. Hit the Change... button to configure this: · Record incoming calls (includes internal calls): select this option to record incoming and internal calls; · Record outgoing calls: select this option to record incoming and internal calls; NOTE: Select both of the above options to record all types of calls; unselecting them both is the same as not recording any calls; · Maximum disk space for recordings: type in the maximum amount of storage space you allow for recordings; above this value edgeBOX will not record calls any more; All call recordings are made available through the logmaster FTP account. Through that account you can download and delete any call recordings. If the recordings take up more than the configured maximum space you need to remove the current recordings from edgeBOX. After removal the recordings will continue automatically.

Phones, Groups and Queues to be recorded The table shown, displays the phones, groups or queues currently configured for recording. Click Phones to filter table in order to show you only Phones; the same applies for Phone Groups and Queues. Click All to display all entries. You need to specify which phones, groups and queues you wish to record. To do this, click the Add button. From the drop-down list select Phone, Phone Group or Queue; from the list shown select the entries you want and click the Add button. Queues will only be recorded if the incoming/internal check box is selected. Please note that the permissions defined in Phones Group Access Control will be applicable, so if you have a group of phones with call recording disabled, those calls won't be recorded.

In order to remove an entry, or several entries, from the list, just select them and click the Remove button. The same goes for the process of adding new entries to the list.

Critical Links, Inc.

172 edgeBOX 5.0 Help

8.14 VoIP activity logs - CDR
You can obtain the VoIP activity log files (also known as CDR) via FTP with the logmaster account. They are stored with the filename Master.csv (the current log file). The log files are rotated daily (Master.csv.1-7) and kept for seven days, after which the oldest file is overwritten by the new log file. The entries in the Log file have the following meaning: accountcode src dst xt clid channel dstchannel lastapp lastdata start answer end duration billsec disposition amaflags uniqueid What account number to use (Only used when Authentication is enable) Caller*ID number Destination extension Destination context Caller*ID with text Channel used Destination channel if appropriate Last application if appropriate Last application data (arguments) Start of call (date/time) Anwer of call (date/time) End of call (date/time) Total time in system, in seconds (integer) Total time call is up, in seconds (integer) What happened to the call: ANSWERED, NO ANSWER, BUSY Flags used: DOCUMENTATION, BILL, IGNORE The unique ID for this call

8.15 Default Predefined Phone Numbers
The initial edgeBOX configuration uses a set of pre-defined phone numbers (that you may eventually change overtime). These are: · Voicemail: 9999

Critical Links, Inc.

IP-PBX and VoIP 173 · Call Parking: 700 . given the importance of the Emergency number . Inc. .715 · Conferences: 9000 · National Prefix: 0 · International Prefix: 00 · Emergency Number: 112 (for EU countries). Related Topics: · Voicemail · Parking · Conferences Critical Links. please make sure to review and configure it's Outgoing Call Rules.

remove or change network users · Assign a Phone to a user · Configure Privileges network and service access · Assign a configurable set of administration capabilities to a Local Administrator user · Manage User authentication locally or remotely with Active Directory.1 Authentication Authentication is the process by which your network users identify themselves before edgeBOX when using the network. This process is fundamental for all subsequent access authorizations or denials in several possible situations. Critical Links.managing network users is an essential part of edgeBOX. LDAP and RADIUS · Configure Groups · Customize the login page for user authentication Related Topics: · Connected Users · Groups · Local Administrator · Phones · RADIUS 9. This section lets you: · Add. such as access to the Internet. Authentication and access Privileges . ability to make some or all kinds of phone calls. Inc.0 Help 9 Users In the Users section you can manage Network Users.174 edgeBOX 5. . and many more.

. This permits an optimal usage of resources such as bandwidth and processing power. edgeBOX will still manage granting and revoking of access by means of a default access profile. . or you can assign specific permissions for granting and revoking access to specific users or groups of users. Inc. Why should I do this ? It renders your network more secure: access to the network and network services will be granted only if the user successfully logs-in. The password is "password" for any of them. More on this. RADIUS or LDAP server for autehtication Related Topics: · Connected Users · Local Administrator · Phones · Firewall · RADIUS · Groups 9. the All Users Privilege. Managing Authentication comprises several related aspects.1. Managing Network Users edgeBOX is shipped with two pre-configured users. You can use them to review their configurations and to do quick experiments. Their usernames are "user" and "user2"..1 Managing network users You can allow everyone to use your network and the network services. furthermore. You might wish to: · Add or change a network user · Configure Privileges for users · Configure local authentication · Configure a remote Active Directory. Critical Links. this additionally allows you to have specific users accessing specific services and other users being blocked and granted access to different sets of services.Users 175 Even if you choose not to use Authentication.

· Network Login Information: username and password.. Phone (VoIP) · Allow the user to make phone calls (VoIP): use the Select Phone. National. you won't be able to add or import any more users. if he tries to login from a thrid host he will not be able to. what are the rules for choosing a username.. button to search the list of existent phones and assign one to this user. A short overview is provided with a summary of user details including phone extension and online status.0 Help To add or manage existing users go to the Network Users menu in the Users section of the administration web interface. that means that each user may have 2 computers logged into the network with his credentials. Mobile. you can rise or lower this value. for convenience you can also use the Add Phone. · User PIN Number: the pin to be entered if the IP-PBX authentication is turned on. . When editing an existing user. button to immediately add a new phone.. and so on. ? · Newtork Access Privilege: determines the network privileges plolicy for a group of users. if you need. This way the password will not be altered. Local.. A three tabbed dialog appears: General · User Name: First and Last name (up to 127 ASCII characters are allowed). Disk Space. Disk Usage · user's current disk usage and · maximum allowed. Inc. Critical Links. like the services they can use or the type of internet access they get. · Max. leave the password field blank if you do not wish to change his password. ? and the password.. learn more about Privileges.... See details about the different edgeBOX solutions in edgeBOX's website. Mobile calls include both National and Local calls. To create or import new users on the edgeBOX you need to delete existing users first or upgrade your edgeBOX solution.. in this case the process is the same as in the IP-PBX section . Click the New/Edit button. you should choose among the Privileges in the drop-down list (as configured in the Privileges menu). options are Free...176 edgeBOX 5. each of these types includes it's predecessors: National calls include Local calls. If you reach the maximum number of users your licence offers. Sessions: users can be logged-in from 2 computers by default.see details... · VoIP Call Permissions: please select the type of calls this user can make. to check which type of calls the user has permission to make. you can change this: click Change Max. International and All Types of Calls..

you'll find two buttons that allow you to Import and Export the users list.Users 177 9. Export By clicking Export you'll trigger a dialog window asking you to select a Folder in your computer's hard-drive. see an example.. Export the users list onto a CSV file. If you export you users at 11:43 on 21 June.. Users section. hit Next.. 2009. · Step 2: a list is presented with all the available and correct users found in the file... · Step 4: one last step will Export back to your computer a list of the Imports done. Inc. click Next. at any time..43.if field is empty one will be provided · Extension Number · Extension Name · User PIN number Critical Links. You can.csv Import An appropriate wizard-like dialog will popup with a detailed explanation of the process: · Step 1: read the specifications and Browse. This process may take a few minutes. select from the left the ones you wish to add and click the Add button to add them to the list on the right.1 Importing and Exporting Users In the Network Users menu..1. . The reverse operation is also possible. · Step 3: a final list with details about the users being imported is presented. the process will create a new CSV file in this folder. Press Finish.1. the file generated will be named Export_21-0609_11. The Import function allows the import of users with the possible following settings: · Name (first and last) · Username · Password . a CSV file from your computer's hard drive.. the file name is automatically chosen. You can add a number of network users to the edgeBOX by Importing them from a CSV file in your computer. please wait.

username...pin. duplicate extension names or duplicate extension numbers..privilege firstname lastname. etc.178 edgeBOX 5.phoneextension. The other fields will only be taken into account if present and valid.0 Help · Privilege Some of this fields are mandatory: Firstname + Lastname and Username.phonename. firstname lastname.pin.phonename. if possible): extensionnumber and extensionname. that is.phoneextension. If you try to import users with duplicate usernames. depending on the existent users) If we try to import entries with duplicate PIN numbers.password..phoneextension.pin.. How must the information be arranged in the CSV file? The available options are: firstname lastname. Inc. Critical Links. those entries will be ignored.username.username.. for instance..phonename.phonename.phonename..accessprofilefirstname lastname. VoIP fields are only considered if they are valid and if both are present (if only extension number is provided. firstname lastname.username.username. username. privilege About importing users: · You can only import users if you are managing the network users on the edgeBOX. firstname lastname.privilege firstname lastname..username.phonename. if you are not using Remote Authentication. you will be asked if you want to: · keep the existent user · replace the existent user with the new one · keep both and change the new username to "username1" (or "or username2".....username.username.. extension name will be equal to the username.password..firstname lastname.phoneextension. as a LDAP server...password..phoneextension.phoneextension. If we import entries were we have defined valid extensions (name and number) those extensions will be added to system and the extension's password will be equal to the user's passwords.password. firstname lastname.username.privilege firstname lastname.password.. ..

this might be a good reason to configure it. For the remote authentication methods please refer to Using Remote Authentication. Type-in the value you need. regrading the usage of system access Privileges. If the Firewall wasn't previously active. Choose the Authentication Method you want from the Change. But. as configured. To activate authentication go to the Network Users menu in the Users section. · a remote LDAP server or · a remote RADIUS server. Click the Change.1. at the upper-right. one of the following methods: · locally: this is the default authentication method. link below the Disk Space.Users 179 9. an appropriate dialog message will inform you that the Firewall will be activated. then again. then you need not to worry because the Firewall settings will fallback to an "allow" approach. System access Privileges with Authentication Active When you start the Authentication service the message below will be displayed. Press Save and hit the Start Service option. If you Critical Links.1. edgeBOX will grab these credentials and authenticate users using.. Authentication requires Firewall: when starting the Authentication Service you'll also need to activate the Firewall service. Please read it carefully: You are about to Start the Network Users Authentication Service. that's all the configuring you'll need. button. If the Firewall was already active.2 Default Quota When creating new users a default quota is suggested. Inc. If you want to change it go to the Options menu in the Users section. all Users and Privileges are stored internally in edgeBOX's internal database. 9.2 Activating Authentication After you have setup your Users you might want to increase the security and manageability of your network by activating Authentication: users will be required to enter their username and password into a Web based authentication page. ... · remotely using: · a remote Active Directory server.. If it is not already active. this might be a good time to review your Firewall settings as they may potentially interact with users Privileges. If you choose to authenticate users locally.1.

180 edgeBOX 5.0 Help proceed you have to take the following into account: 1. The "All Users" Privilege will not be displayed in the Privileges Panel since Network Users will be asked to authenticate themselves. 2. The "Not Authenticated Users" Privilege will be displayed in the Privileges panel. This Privilege will be applied as a default rule for all non authenticated users, so one must take into account that configurations of this Privilege may affect users that fail authentication or even before they are requested to authenticate. 3. If you have previously changed the "Not Authenticated Users" Privilege those changes will now be loaded. 4. Changes that you may have done to the "All Users" Privilege will be kept and will be loaded the next time you switch OFF the Network Users Authentication. 5. You may reset the "Not Authenticated Users" privilege by opening the Privileges panel and selecting "Reset Not Authenticated Users privilege to factory configurations".

System access Privileges with Authentication Stopped When you stop the authentication service the message below will be displayed, regrading the usage of system access Privileges. Please read it carefully: You are about to Stop the Network Users Authentication Service. If you proceed you have to take the following into account: 1. The "Not Authenticated Users" Privilege will not be displayed in the Privileges Panel since now there won't be any unauthenticated users. 2. The "All Users" Privilege will be displayed in the Privileges panel. This Privilege will be applied as a default rule for all users, so one must take into account that configurations of this Privilege may affect users from other Privileges. 3. If you have previously changed the "All Users" Privilege those changes will now be loaded into system. 4. Changes that you may have done to the "Not Authenticated Users" Privilege will be kept and will be loaded the next time you switch ON the Network Users Authentication. 5. You may reset the "All Users" privilege by opening the Privileges panel and selecting "Reset All Users privilege to factory configurations"

Critical Links, Inc.

Users 181

9.1.3 Using remote authentication
edgeBOX allows you to use remote user authentication. With remote authentication, users are authenticated in a remote server instead of the edgeBOX when they try to login to the network. The whole process is transparent for the user as edgeBOX will do all the work. To activate remote authentication go to the Network Users menu, Users section. Choose the Authentication Method you want from the Change... button, at the upper-right. The currently supported methods are: · Authenticate users on a remote Active Directory Server, · Authenticate users on a remote LDAP Server, · Authenticate users on a remote RADIUS server. In each there's a convenience Test Connection button that allows you to verify basic connectivity to the specified server. When you're done press Save and hit the Start Service option. Please refer to Activating Authentication for common details about the Authentication service. Activating remote authentication will purge all your locally configured users. An appropriate warning, in red color, is displayed warning about this.

Related Topics:
Details about edgeBOX's authentication architecture

9.1.3.1 Using a remote RADIUS Server To authenticate users on a remote RADIUS server type-in: RADIUS Server · IP Address: type the IP address of the remote server; · Password: to be used to access the RADIUS server; · Port: the TCP port to be used on the RADIUS server (defaults to 1812); · Timeout: maximum time waiting for the RADIUS server (defaults to 5 seconds); Privileges Verification Choose if you wish that the access Privileges to the network services (E-mail, Internet, Secure

Critical Links, Inc.

182 edgeBOX 5.0 Help connections, etc.) are always verified in the remote RADIUS server and not locally. How to configure a RADIUS Server to perform users authentication and authorization? · Authenticate users on the remote server but verify the privileges in system · Verify also user's network privileges on the remote server Why is this useful ? This might be useful if your company is already using a RADIUS server for authorizing users on several other services, besides edgeBOX's ones; in this situation it makes sense to have all Authentication and Authorization relegated by edgeBOX into those servers As users login for the first time, and their authentication is verified in the Remote RADIUS Server, their information is saved in the edgeBOX users list. Still, each time the users tries to login, the authentication will be done in the remote server.

9.1.3.2 Using a remote LDAP Server Using an LDAP Server to authenticate the network users: there's an option to toggle between Basic Mode and Advanced Mode. Type-in:

LDAP Server Basic Mode · Domain: the LDAP domain; · Group: the optional LDAP Group; · Username: to be used by edgeBOX's LDAP client to access the LDAP Server; Advanced Mode · Base DN: see example below box; · Bind DN: see example below box; Common to both modes · IP Address: type the IP address of the remote server; · Password: to be used by edgeBOX's LDAP client to access the LDAP Server; · Port: the TCP port to be used on the LDAP server (defaults to 389); · Timeout: maximum time waiting for the LDAP server (defaults to 5 seconds);

Critical Links, Inc.

Users 183 Privileges Verification Choose if you wish that the access Privileges to the network services (E-mail, Internet, Secure connections, etc.) are always verified in the remote LDAP server and not locally in the edgeBOX. · Authenticate users on the remote server but verify the privileges in system · Verify also user's network privileges on the remote server Why is this usefull ? This might be useful if your company is already using an LDAP server for authorizing users on several other services, besides edgeBOX's ones; in this situation it makes sense to have all Authentication and Authorization relegated by edgeBOX into those servers. As users login for the first time, and their authentication is verified in the LDAP Server, their information is saved in the edgeBOX users list. Still, each time the users tries to login, the authentication will be done in the remote server.

When you are using remote LDAP, the network users have first to login one time using the LAN user authentication before they can login in the domain for the first time.

9.1.3.3 Using a remote AD Server Using a remote Active Directory Server to authenticate the network users: there's an option to toggle between Basic Mode and Advanced Mode. Type-in:

LDAP Server Basic Mode · Domain: the Active Directory domain; · Group: the optional AD Group; · Username: to be used by edgeBOX to access the Server; Advanced Mode · Base DN: see example below box; specify the active directory domain configured in the Base Name field; · Base DN 1, Base DN 2: You can set up two additional Base DN. Authentication System will try to search and authenticate users in these locations also. To enable the text fields

Critical Links, Inc.

184 edgeBOX 5.0 Help please select the check boxes on the right of each field; to Learn More... In more elaborate scenarios the Active Directory server might have users spread over serveral Organizational Units (OUs); if that is the case, edgeBOX can be configured to search users in all those OUs. An example follows, for a situation where users should be searched in three OUs (ouone, outwo and outhree), and the administrator user belongs to OU ouone: Base DN: OU=ouone,cn=local,cn=loc Base DN 1: OU=outwo,cn=local,cn=loc Base DN 2: OU=outhree,cn=local,cn=loc Bind DN: cn=administrator,OU=ouone,cn=local,cn=loc

· Bind DN: see example below box; Common to both modes · IP Address: type the IP address of the remote server; · Password: to be used by edgeBOX's LDAP client to access the AD Server; · Port: the TCP port to be used on the AD server (defaults to 389); · Timeout: maximum time waiting for the AD server (defaults to 5 seconds); · Copy the users information from the AD Server to the system's user list: check this if you'dd like edgeBOX to copy information from the AD server into the internal users list. As users login for the first time, and their authentication is verified in the Remote AD Server, their information is saved in the edgeBOX users list. Still, each time the users tries to login, the authentication will be done in the remote server. If the Active Directory server in not reachable, and only in this case, then, the authentication system will try to authenticate users locally.

When you are using remote AD authentication, the network users have first to login one time using the LAN user authentication before they can login in the domain for the first time.

9.1.4 Customize the user login web page
If your looking for information regarding Default User Quotas please follow this link. In the Users section - Options menu you can customize several aspects of the appearance of the login page the local users of the network will use to authenticate:

Critical Links, Inc.

Use a custom login page Completely modify the look & feel of the login page by uploading your own HTML. That is if the Authentication service is running. View the changes To view the changes and the appearance of the login page. Click the Select Image. · The zip file can contain image files. your CSS file(s) and your images. To do so: 1. directly inside the zip file. 3. . Type-in the desired Information text. button and select the image with the logo from your computer. open a web browser. if you enter HTML in this field the browser will display it correctly. create a Zip file (. To change your Company logotype 1. 3. Click Change the Company Logo.. that is. Click the Upload button save the image to the edgeBOX. Inc. go to a computer of the local network. All files must be all at the same level. The new login page with the changes you made will appear. All most common image formats are supported.zip) with all these files. Show the requirements of the files. and type and try to open a random website. Network users will only see this page if they are required to login. Click the Change the company name and information text 2. this text can contain HTML. · The zip file can not contain any folders or sub folders. To show a welcome message and the company name in the login form 1.. Press Save. one or more CSS files and one html file only. · You must include the code <!--AUTHENTICATION--!> in the place where you Critical Links. CSS and image files. Upload the files for a custom login page You can upload the files for your custom login page to edgeBOX to have a login page with a completely different appearance. After creating your HTML file. · Change the company name and information text.Users 185 · Change the Company Logo. · Upload a customized authentication page with your own style. Type-in the Company Name 4. 2. See Activating Authentication for details.

choose simple but meaningful names like 'no-restr'. Boss-10... An overview table is shown.. the basic options are to Allow access to the Internet.2 Privileges The Privileges menu. Allow access to the Internet between . to access further tuning details. Select the Upload a customized authentication page with your own style option. a123. Advanced and Devices: General · Name: the name by which this Privilege will be identified. "[a-zA-Z][azA-Z0-9]*[-]?[a-zA-Z0-9]*[a-zA-Z0-9]". a single '-' can also be used excpet for the first and last postions. the World Wide Web). Services. after you can enter any sequence of letters and digits. by configuring access Privileges (policies) to which users will be assigned. 2. in the Users section provides the means for bulk management of your network users and to control their access to the services and areas your network offers.m and . examples: a-b. hit the Advanced Properties. This code will then be replaced by the necessary code for the login form.h. button.m and Do not allow access to the Internet.. what are the rules for the Privilege name ? the name must start with a letter (lower or upper case). 'servers35' or 'vips'.. On the left. Click one of them to get a summary of it's configurations on the right panel. Services Critical Links.h. Click the Save button to upload the zip file to the edgeBOX Related Topics: Manage the firewall properties 9. 4. · DMZ: same as for Internet. . A dialog window will popup with four sections General..0 Help want the login form to be placed in the HTML file.. 3.186 edgeBOX 5. Inc. · Internet: here you determine how and when your users can reach the Internet (same as saying "the world beyond edgeBOX". Click the New.. a list showing all current Privileges. Click the Browse button and select the Zip file from your computer in the dialog window.

1x Authentication: these users will be able to authenticate in edgeBOX be means of the IEEE802. to learn more. on a per-Privilege basis. that is because these rules are re-applied at most. while trying to use your network services. workgroup or domain services). the edgeBOX services accessible by the users: · Allow access to edgeBOX services listed: users in this Privilege will have access to the services in the list. not services provided somewhere else but accessible through the edgeBOX. This is where you determine. · Remote Users: if these users will be allowed to connect to the PPTP VPN. this option is relevant only when you have a switch or switches in your network infrastructure that support dynamic VLAN assigment. no users in this Privilege will be able to access any File Sharing related resources. additionally you may specify whether you wish to assign a specific VLAN for these users. every 5 minutes). · Allow access to edgeBOX services listed between . Give me an example If you don't add the Samba service to the list of accessible services. one of the supported L2 switches with this feature is the Procurve 2650.. don't choose this option. Please note: these are services running on edgeBOX. · VLAN Routing: a listo of rules specifying inter-LAN-VLANs routing permissions for these Critical Links.. These services will be available for those users if you choose the 1st or 2nd option. additionally you should specify if they will have access to the LAN. Advanced · 802. Temporary Shared Folders or Windows Shared printers (Samba is a short term for any windows file sharing. · Do not allow access to edgeBOX services: access is denied regardless of the composition of the list. if you wish that the users of this access profile belong to the LAN network instead. with this feature active the switch will automatically move the switch port.Users 187 This panel is of utmost importance as it directly affects the way your users experience network access.h. The list below the three options shows the services available for the users with this Privilege..m and . to this VLAN.m: same as the previous on but service is granted only within the given time of day period (please take into account that a delay of up-to 5 minutes may occur.. Inc.. · IPSec: if these users will be able to access IPSec VPNs. Use the Add and Remove buttons to edit the list (this list will not contain the DNS nor the Webadmin services as they are always accessible for host in the internal network). where the user is connected and after a successful 802. See edgeBOX services for a short description of all services available here.1x.1x authentication. Services not included in this list will not be accessible by users in this Privilege. or limitations..h. .

This allows the machine to automatically authenticate with the edgeBOX. see more details. see details. without the usual login screen.. Devices IP Addresses to which this Privilege will also be applied. Related Topics: · Local Administrator · Firewall · RADIUS devices authenticating in edgeBOX · Remote Authentication and Authorization · Adding Users and changing their Privileges Critical Links. see details... what type of traffic these users will be allowed to exchange with the other VLANs in edgeBOX. Additionally.. see details.. If an IP is added. Besides containing users. Use the left side buttons to manage the list. a profile may also contain IP addresses. you can block overall access to certain IP addresses by using a block-all type rule in the Advanced Firewall Rules.188 edgeBOX 5.. You can indicate a specific IP address of a machine or you can indicate a range of IP addresses. want all devices of a VLAN to be automatically authenticated. Indicating a range is most useful when you. How do I restrict access to certain types of web sites ? edgeBOX contains a web filter that allows you specify Website Restrictions based on words present in the website's URL or domain. that machine is allowed the access rights of the profile. Inc. for example.0 Help users. How do I restrict access to services other than edgeBOX services ? You can block overall access to certain IP Addresses and/or Protocol services/ports by using the Advanced Firewall Rules... .

22. · To location: Any (connections to any host). Bronze and Best-Effort traffic classes or your own Pipes.. Thres tabs are presented: This panel presents three tabs: Quality of Service · Class of Service for Upload Traffic: here you can choose to apply the usual Gold..somewhat similar to a Firewall configuration. · Protocol: All. For each rule: Critical Links.2. Network (connections to a specific IP segment.1 Fine tunning Internet and DMZ access This panel allows you Advanced Configuration options for defining how users access the Internet (same for the DMZ). to learn more. port and/or protocol. Inc. Click the Add button to add new rule or Edit to change an existing one. This means that traffic from the internal network to the Internet is granted access. By default all outbound traffic is allowed.. if you have configured any. 80. The approach is based on QoS aspects . The list will display all your rules in an easy to read manner. as specified by an IP Address and a Netmask). Here you can allow incoming traffic based on its origin. individual ports or even port ranges like 21. Device (connections to a specific IP Address). Silver. For each rule: · Policy: choose Allow Access or Deny Access (tipically you'll want to add Deny rules here).Users 189 9. The sequence by which rules appear in the list can be relevant and you can use the Up and Down buttons to change it Inbound Rules By default all incoming Internet traffic is dropped: all connection attempts coming from the Internet are denied. 500-600). You can allow or deny outgoing traffic based on its destination.. Outbound Rules Rules to control access to the Internet.and network services allowance/denial . .assigning traffic classes to users . a short Description string should also be added. port and/or protocol. · Class of Service for Download Traffic: the choice here is Best-Effort or Premium. TCP (you can choose All ports. UDP (same as TCP) and ICMP. to learn more. Click the Add button to add new rule or Edit to change an existing one.

if you have specific needs you can overcome this default behaviour by indicating exceptions: locations (services/ports) on other VLANs the users will be able to access even though not belonging to that specific VLAN. .2 Access to other VLANs Inter VLAN Access By default. · Protocol: All. · From location: Any (connections from anywhere). 80. a short Description string should also be added. Network (connections to a specific IP segment. users in a given VLAN cannot communicate with users of other VLANs. Please note that controlling access for Inbound traffic may be particularly useful in some very specific scenarios such as situations where edgeBOX might act as a router for inbound traffic directed at specific IP addresses that might belong to each Privilege. 22. 22.2. UDP (same as TCP) and ICMP. 500-600). UDP and ICMP.190 edgeBOX 5. Click the Add button to add new rule or Edit to change an existing one. individual ports or even port ranges (like 21. · To Ports: if TPC or UDP are selected you can choose All ports. For each rule: · Protocol: All. TCP (you can choose All ports. as specified by an IP Address and a Netmask). · To Address: Any (connections to anywhere). Nevertheless. It's good practice to keep your VLANs isolated from each other: that's one of the advantages of using VLANs. 80. Critical Links. 500-600).0 Help · Policy: choose Allow Access or Deny Access (tipically you'll want to add Allow rules here). as specified by an IP Address and a Netmask). The LAN is also know as default VLAN. individual ports or even port ranges like 21. Device (connections to a specific IP Address). This also includes the LAN. Device (connections from a specific IP Address). Network (connections from a specific IP segment. TCP . Inc. the sequence by which they appear in the list can be relevant and you can use the Up and Down buttons to change it. The sequence by which they appear in the list can be relevant. Related Topics: · Firewall · QoS 9. you can use the Up and Down buttons to change it. As for the outbound rules.

Click the Local Administrator option. Network Users menu. edgepacks.com. the local administrator has to: 1. A short descriptive table is shown with the currently configured groups. What are edgepacks? edgePACKs are optional modules for edgeBOX that add functionalities for particular markets or add a new set of features.. button.3 Groups You can use groups if you have edgeBOX third-party applications. With a browser. users can be part of one group. their description and number of users in each. If you want to create groups of users that have common privileges and types of accesses in your network. use the Add Users. you should to use Privileges instead. in the Related Topics corner. Learn more details about edgepacks at edgeBOX's website. The local administrator is one of the users of your local network that you give the permission to manage parts of your network and configure some of your services. (or as an alternative. Go to a computer of the local network (LAN). Groups have no direct use in the edgeBOX or the network. 9. Some examples are: edgeLMS and edgeDESKTOP. point the browser to the IP address of any of the WAN or LAN interfaces. If you need to manage groups go to the Groups link in the Related Topics corner. How can local admin user access the edgeBOX web interface? To have access to the edgeBOX.4 Delegate a Local Administrator Go to the Users section.. Inc. this will be needed only if edgeBOX is not your DNS server) Critical Links. in the Users section. 2.. Click the New. open the webpage https://myedgeBOX. someone that can access some sections of the edgeBOX web interface.. and Remove buttons to manage the contents of the list. A dialog window will popup: · Name: choose a name for this group · Description: Type-in a short description · Users: the list of users that belong to the Group.Users 191 9. several groups or no group at all. .

After the page opens. Now you need to indicate the areas and functionalities of the edgeBOX the local administrator will have access to: 1. Create a local administrator of the edgeBOX To make a user of your network local administrator hit Select. A tree like data structure is presented. and choose from the list.. Type the username and password he uses to authenticate to the network. 2. click the link Login. Click the Login button.. You can collapse and expand the tree by clicking the '+' and '-' signs. Inc.0 Help 3. View an example Critical Links. you need to check the ones you want.192 edgeBOX 5. edgeBOX initial page 4. Each section (main menu option) of the edgeBOX is represented by a branch and the menus inside it are represented by subbranches. Check the areas you want the local administrator to have access to. 5. .

Click the Save button. and a some time later you changed the local adminitrator to 'david_parker'. View example For example. your local administrator will still be 'david_parker'. if your local administrator was 'john_simmons' and you made a backup of the edgeBOX at that time. and now you restore that old backup you made. the local administrator will not change. . However. edgeBOX has a backup and restore option that allows you to make backups of all the configurations and data. Inc.Users 193 3. Remove the local administrator Just hit Remove on the dialog window If you restore an old backup. for security reasons local administrator settings are not saved in edgeBOX backups. Critical Links.

· Confirm Password: retype the password. · Password: the password edgeBOX will use to access the device and encrypt RADIUS packets. among other settings: · IP Address: the device's IP Address. · Type of device: select the most appropriate from the drop-down list. · Privilege: the Privilege under which the user is logged. Inc.0 Help 9. Related Topics: · How do I add more users ? · How do I configure network access privileges ? 9. It will show you a table with the list of users currently authenticated. You'll need to specify their IP Addresses and the type of device. · VLAN Assignement: check this if you want edgeBOX to assign a VLAN when performing Critical Links.194 edgeBOX 5. · Name: the device's name.6 Configure authorized RADIUS clients When you need to authorize network devices to access RADIUS authentication in edgeBOX. go to the Users section and hit the RADIUS option in the Related Topics area. The details are: · Name: the user's full name. · MAC Address: the hardware address of that host/computer. · IP Address: the IP Address of the host/computer from which the user made his login. · Login: the user's username (or login name). .5 View currently Connected Users If you need to get a list of Users connected to the system you can do it: just navigate to the Users section and click the Connected Users in the Related Topics corner.

1x user authentication. You must use a compatible port based authentication device. Inc. the IP address is the IP of the AP/Switch and the password the RADIUS client password configured in the remote AP/Switch. The edgeBOX supports different types of 802.1x Switch from the drop down list. Critical Links.Users 195 authentication for this device.1x Access Point or Generic 802. These are normally called NAS (Network Access server). independently of the port / SSID the user is currently connected. Name is any text you wish to enter to identify this unit. If you select the Generic 802. .1x switches with dynamic VLAN assignment like the Procurve 2650 or the Procurve 420 Access Point for Wireless communications with multiple SSID and dynamic VLAN assignment. delete and add remote RADIUS clients for user authentication. If "Enable Dynamic VLAN assignment" is checked. This page allows you to view. Name is any text you wish to enter.1x port based authenticators. If "VLAN assignment" is checked. the edgeBOX internal RADIUS server sends the correct VLAN id to the Switch or Access Point according to the User Access Profile. the edgeBOX internal RADIUS server sends the correct VLAN id to this switch according to the User Access Profile. This option allows the Procurve switch to put the user in the correct VLAN. This feature allows the remote port based authentication device to put the user in the correct VLAN. and after a successful 802. Supported EAP methods: PEAP-EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-TTLS. independently of the port the user is currently connected. Some of the devices supported include 802. the IP address is the IP of the Switch and the password the login password of the switch. If you select the "HP ProCurve 2650" drop down.

button.and receive related notifications by e-mail · Backup edgeBOX settings and user files to a secure medium. like fans. temperature and hard-disk usage statistics · Configure a Remote Management server 10. enter the desired Date and Time into the popup dialog and press Save. Adjusting date and time is not possible if you have configured an Internet Time server.0 Help 10 System The System menu allows you to configure a variety system related aspects of the edgeBOX: · Adjust the Date. perform Restore operations and scheduled Backups · Configure edgeBOX's Hotbackup redundancy system · Receive e-mails and SNMP Traps when relevant status changes occur · Review or download system logs and configure logging to a remote log server · Send user's Accounting records to a RADIUS server · Globally enable/disable the embedded SNMP Agent · Schedule regular maintenance operations to optimize edgeBOX's relational database performance · View and change the status edgeBOX's main network services · View the current status of your hardware devices. . Inc.. Date and Time menu. Otherwise just hit the Adjust..1 Adjusting Date and Time To adjust time related settings please point the browser to the System section. the current Time. Critical Links.manually or automatically . your Timezone or use an Internet time server · Change the language or the administrator's password and e-mail address · Shutdown or Reboot · Manage Software Updates . In that case your Date and Time are adjusted automatically.196 edgeBOX 5. There you can view and adjust edgeBOX's date and time and synchronize with a preferred Internet Time Server to keep the date and time always accurate.

2. edgeBOX will try to synchronize with the selected server every day. This way you can keep an the same. edgeBOX can also work as a Time Server so you can synchronize all your network devices as phones. How to synchronize all the network devices with edgeBOX's date and time Besides synchronizing its date and time with an Internet Time Server.. Indicate that the the time server you want to synchronize with is edgeBOX.100. Search for the option to Synchronize with an Internet Time Server.com and edgeBOX's IP address is 192. Critical Links...254.example.System 197 Time Zone Change the time zone 1. Select the Syncronize edgeBOX date and time with a time server on the Internet option at the top. For example. accurate. 2. Pick the world Zone from the list on the left and the City closest to edgeBOX from the list on the right. if edgeBOX's hostname is ebox and the network domain is example.com or 192. . then you can type ebox. time on every device of your network. Internet Time Synchronize the date and time with a Time Server on the Internet You can use a time server on the Internet to keep date and time always accurate. If edgeBOX's date and time is delayed more than 1000 seconds (17 minutes) edgeBOX will not synchronize and create an entry in the Log Viewer and send a notification by e-mail.. Select the NTP server you want to synchronize with from the list. Inc. button. Hit the Change. To synchronize a device with edgeBOX's date and time: 1. Click Change. computers and servers with edgeBOX. Go to the device's date and time settings. 3. Press Save. 2. 3.254. To do that you can type in edgeBOX's IP address or edgeBOX's hostmane..100.168.168. The status/time of the latest synchronization is shown. 3. 1.

To change the password click Change Administrator's password. at any time. Critical Links. A warning message will inform you of the fact. Inc. then you should contact your reseller. example. It is made of the word edgebox and edgeBOX's default internal domain: example... the admin password is by default the word root. You can change it to a valid address so people can reply to those messages. button..2 Administration To change edgeBOX administrations settings you need to navigate to the Administration menu in the System section.0 Help 10. you can change it to a valid e-mail to avoid problems with E-mail Servers because E-mail Servers usually perform validation of domains when they deliver e-mails.com. If you do not wish to receive e-mail messages just choose the Do not send system messages option. So.. Language edgeBOX's web management interface supports several languages. Also.com is an invalid e-mail address. you need to edit it yourself. Hit the Change e-mail. If you find that this password is not working correctly. shutdown or restart edgeBOX. and select the desired one from the list provided.. and type the desired new password in both the New Password and the Confirm text fields. by e-mail.such as warnings or available software updates.com is not a valid public domain and thus edgeBOX may find problems in delivery to the final domain.. System E-mail Messages edgeBOX sends several types of system related messages . Choose the Send system messages to: option and fill in your email address (this is the e-mail address to which edgeBOX will send system e-mail messages). Administrator Password When the edgeBOX is installed. . The recipient of these e-mail messages is not specified by default. How do I choose a good password ? Shutdown or Restart You can. The default sender e-mail address edgebox@example. Click Change language. The browser will reload the management interface with the newly selected language. just choose the option you need and press Ok.198 edgeBOX 5.

the list can be cleared by clicking on the Clear Entries button. Software Updates menu. Automatic Updates You can manually check for and install available updates. · install edgeBOX's third party applications . Status The menu displays a short summary information stating whether you should check for available updates or if there are already updates available (this second information is automatic if you configure automatic checking for updates). Hit the Change.the edgePaks. · View Update Log: reports all the updates that have been applied to edgeBOX..3 Managing Software Updates The updates available are new functionalities. But you can also make edgeBOX check for updates and notify you of the updates so you can install them yourself. · choose the Notify me when updates are available option to receive a graphical notification in the Dashboard.. Inc. · have software updates managed and installed automatically. download new software packages and. . You can also ask edgeBOX to check for updates and install them automatically. security updates or performance enhancements. you will receive Critical Links. depending on your choice. · Check and install updates automatically: this will make edgeBOX connect to the update server. button: · Disable Automatic Updates: edgeBOX will not try to check for updates.edgeBOX will let you install them manually. · receive automatic e-mail messages with information about new software updates. · Install Updates: installs available updates. without installing them.System 199 10.if updated software packages exist they will be automatically downloaded but not automatically installed . Clicking on the buttons you can perform the following operations: · Check Now: will immediately check for new updates. if you need to: · get a list or install available software updates. Please go to the System section. · Check for updates automatically but let me install manually: edgeBOX will check for software updates .

If you want to check every 6 hours. if no restarting whatsoever is needed. see example. all downloaded packages will be installed.0 Help notifications. if necessary. . execute a full restart or. 13h15m and 19h15m. · Notify me when System reboot is needed: choose this option if don't mind that some services may need to be restarted but you don't want edgeBOX to perform a full restart automatically.200 edgeBOX 5. restart the services that need to be restarted. · Notify me when Services restart is needed: you should choose this option if your network users can not tolerate any restarting of services or restarting edgeBOX itself. a notification will be displayed in the web interface indicating you the problem and asking you to try to install the update again. navigate to the Software Updates menu .. The following options are available: · Notify me when Updates are installed: in this situation edgeBOX will actually install the downloaded updates and. in this situation. 7h15m. · Also notify me by e-mail: notifications configured in the previous options will also be sent by e-mail to the administration e-mail address. · Starting at: the base hour/minute at which the check will be started. Inc. if this is the case. you should go to the administration web interface. you will receive a notification. this approach may not be the most appropriate for your needs. otherwise software updates will be installed and the needed restarting of services will be carried out. similar to the ones in the previous option. if services restart is needed or if a full restart is needed nothing will be installed. edgeBOX will check four times a day at 1h15m. as part of the process). you need to use the administration web interface to execute the installation manually (and the needed reboot as part of the process). please note the following two options. 12 or 24 hours. If an error occurs while edgeBOX is trying to update. then nothing will be installed and you will receive a notification accordingly. if applicable.System section . starting at 13h15m.and execute the installation manually (and any needed restarting. Critical Links. Common Settings · Check every: you can choose to trigger the software updates check task every 6..

to prevent the loss or corruption of data. · Local USB disks can not be formatted as NTFS. or on a USB disk connected to the edgeBOX. . Please note: the imap. · Restore is supported from the same architecture to the same architecture only. It's important to setup a backup policy from the start. additionally the Restore operation always requires a system reboot in the end. pop and e-mail services are stopped when executing a Backup. a remote FTP server. · Restore is only supported from the same version of the Operating system to the same version (eg v4.. if at any time you need to execute a Manual backup. day and date. an FTP server or a local Critical Links. if you prefer a time based schedule of cyclic backup operations. or a Windows File Share. Inc. These backups can be stored either on a remote FTP server.. as the backup files have a unique prefix associated with an edgeBOX · Full backups and Incremental backups are supported · The backup can not be stored in the edgeBOX it self. · Multiple edgeBOXes can use the same directory.7). this means that while the Backup is running edgeBOX will not be able to receive or send e-mails and users will not be able to read their e-mail.. remote a Windows File Share. · Schedule. · Both the Backup operation and the Restore operation cause edgeBOX to stop several system and application processes (eg VoIP and authentication).. Backup Using the buttons provided you can choose to: · Backup Now. Restore Here you can manually restore backup files from either a Windows Share.7 to v4.4 Backup & Restore edgeBOX can schedule backups to occur periodically at a predefined time.System 201 10. The following notes aplly: · Backups may only be created/restored to/from a local USB disk.

If the folder specified (for the FTP server. the system will restore a) this backup and b) all appropriate incremental backups and the c) the appropriate full backup. you should click Restore to perform the operation. A dialog will popup with a confirmation telling you that. Inc. the following backup policy: · Sunday: Full Backup · Monday to Saturday: Incremental Backup If you restore the Wednesday Incremental. Lets assume. in the end. Click any of them to get a list of the corresponding Backups points-in-time. or Windows share or USB disk) does not exist. Once all the relevant fields have been entered. press Save to immediatelly start the backup. Selecting one of the three possible backup destinations: · Use an FTP server from the network · Use a Windows Shared folder from the network · Use a USB Flash disk attached to edgeBOX It is not possible to save the backup locally on the edgeBOX itself. It will not automatically create the folder.0 Help USB disk. . edgeBOX will be rebooted. as example. Finally. Press the Change.. 10. Give me an example..202 edgeBOX 5. If you select an incremental backup. the backup will fail.1 Immediate Backup Manual backup allows you to undertake a backup immediately. button to select the device where the files are stored and enter the appropriate details (the details needed are in all similar to those described for the backup operations).. The list on the left will show you all the available Full backups. The options are: FTP Windows Share USB Critical Links. the system will also restore the Tuesday and Monday Incremental and the Sunday Full backup. Click on View details to be assured of the details.4..

. See examples. you can select which one you will use to store the backup files. which will store the backup files Server: IP address of the FTP server Server: IP address of the Windows Server Method: USB allows you to select a local USB disk (Not NTFS formatted) which will store the backup files Refresh Devices: Will scan the local USB devices and present you with a drop down list to enable you to select the device which will store the backup files Device: The chosen device (You may have more than 1 USB disk connected) on which the backups will be stored Partition: If the device has more than 1 partition. Backup Destination A summary information is displayed stating the current Backup destination details. Port: FTP Port (usually 21) Folder: Which folder on the FTP Folder: Which folder on the server where the backups will be Windows Share will receive the stored backup files Use Authentication: If checked Use Authentication: If checked Folder: Which folder on the the username and password fields the username and password fields USB device. where the backups will be active will be active will be stored Username: The username of the Username: The username of the account you are going to use on account you are going to use on the FTP server the Windows File server Password: The password of the Password: The password of the account which you are going to account which you are going to use on the FTP server use on the Windows File server 10. Critical Links. Inc. For full and incremental backups. .System 203 Method: FTP allows you to select Method: Windows Share allows an FTP server which will store the you to select a share from a backup files windows server.2 Scheduled Backups This panel allows you to specify a scheduled backup regime.4..

100. Critical Links. the backup will not take place).13. to change the destination medium of your scheduled backups. The same options are available for Incremental as for Full Backups.0 Help · Backup destination: FTP server (212. Inc. You can choose to perform backup operations onto an FTP server. Typically.204 edgeBOX 5.168.13.. except if you have configured Incremental Backups: the execution of an Incremental backup assumes the execution of a Full backup at some point in time. every day from Monday to Saturday The Full and Incremental backups should not be scheduled to occur at the same day and time (it does not make sense to execute both of them at nearly the same time as the Full backup will render the incremental backup useless or a waste of time and processing power). If you schedule them at exactly the same time (hour and minute) the Full backup will take precedence and the Incremental backup will not occur.55) · Backup destination: USB flash disk Hit the Change. Scheduling Several scheduling approaches are possible. . Incremental Backup Incremental backups backup the files which have been modified since the last Full or Incremental Backup. you can pick up exactly the day(s) you want the backup to be executed. The scheduling possibilities are: · Day: · Every Day: the operation will take place every day. a Windows share or an external USB storage. · Every Month :once a month. · Every Week: any day of week. you would schedule: · Full Backup: on Sundays at 04:00 and · Incremental Backup: at 04:00. so that you can fit the backup tasks to better suite your company's Backup policy. button. The dialog presented for this purpose equal to the one in the Immediate Backup section. at the top right corner.212) · Backup destination: Windows share (192. choose a day of the month (please note: if you select a day such as the 31st and the month has less than 31 days. Full Backup You may create (or disable) a schedule for full backups..

allows you to configure one of them . Assumptions and pre-requisites The stable operation of the Hotbackup feature assumes a set of pre-requisites which must be assured by the adminitrator: · The base hardware on both edgeBOXes must be exactly the same and the extra function cards installed on each must be identical and plugged into the same connectors. NOTE: incremental backups are valid only if there is already a full backup.the Slave.System 205 · Hour and Minute: the exact time of day at which the task should be started. you should start the process on Sunday. 10. So if you plan on executing full backups on Sunday and incremental backups on all other days.. Incremental backups taken before the first Full backup are invalid and should not be used.. ready to take over the Master's place if a failure occurs. the Hotbackup process will not be possible.. For example. See details. if you update only the Master with a new revision of the edgeBOX's software.the Master . The Slave edgeBOX works as a backup (hence the name Hotbackup). Select the Configure this edgeBOX to act as the Hotbackup Slave option. button: 1. Default Gateway and Nameserver to be used in Slave mode. the Hotbackup menu. · The Slave and Master must have identical operating system releases and revisions. in the System section. .5 Using HotBackup for redundancy Using two edgeBOXes. To assure this. Inc.to manage the network and daily replicate its configuration and data to the other edgeBOX . 2. Using Hotbackup Setting edgeBOX as Slave To set edgeBOX as a Slave edgeBOX (backup edgeBOX) hit the Change. Indicate below IP Address. Netmask. edgeBOX's networking is reduced to a minimum necessary only for the Master to be able to access the Slave and replicate it's configs and data Critical Links.. in Slave mode. you should manage both edgeBOX's updates manually and not automatically.

0 Help onto it.0. as long as the Master edgeBOX can access the Slave through TCP/IP. when edgeBOX has finished entering Slave mode an appropriate text mode screen. validate it's configuration and start working as a Master edgeBOX. you can view an "S" in the top right corner of the LCD. if you have an edgBOX with LCD display. then you could choose for the Slave 192. in Slave Mode only the LAN interface is active and it's IP basic configurations are the four values you entered in the previous step.0 and connect the Slave LAN port the the same switch as the Master LAN port (but. in the VGA terminal.254/255. either locally using a keyboard/VGA or a serial console. It will only work as a backup for the Mater edgeBOX. in order to make the replication.255. Set your edgeBOX as the Master edgeBOX You can only set your edgeBOX to run in master mode after you have an edgeBOX configured and working as a Slave edgeBOX. Inc. . Critical Links..255. This way you will be able to perform a limited set of commands that are specific to the Slave Mode. if your Master has LAN address 192.100. the replication is made every day at that time. click the Change. If you have an edgBOX with LCD display. you loose access to the web interface and you can no longer use the edgeBOX for managing your network.206 edgeBOX 5. Still. The most simple way to wire up this setup is to choose for the Slave an IP address which falls into the Master LAN segment. keep in mind that this setup is not the only solution). For example. To make your edgeBOX run in Master mode. indicating that the edgeBOX is running as a Hotbackup Slave. the Slave must be accessible to the Master through the network. or remotely via ssh. you will be able to access it using it's command line interface. because. for example.100. will help you determine and remember these settings. the Master edgeBOX has to stop a considerable amount of services to grant that the configuration and information are correctly replicated.168. indicating that the edgeBOX is running as a Master edgeBOX.255. Click the Save button. it's a good idea to have a VGA and a keyboard connected to the Slave in order to get a better grasp of the process. Ethernet Wiring: you can choose any IP address you wish. Also. please. during dawn. 2. Choose a time of day when your network has less activity. you can view an "M" in the top right corner of the LCD. edgeBOX will search for the Slave. Indicate below the IP address of the Slave edgeBOX and the time of day at which you want to replicate the configuration and data from the master to the slave. 3.168. edgeBOX will reboot and run in Slave mode..253/255. Select the Configure this edgeBOX to act as the Hotbackup Master option. that's the interface to which you should connect your ethernet cable. 4. When you set edgeBOX in Slave mode.255. button: 1. 3. Click the Save button to start the process.

This operation may take a very long time.. please consult the Slave's logs via CLI commands hotbackup view replica status or hotbackup view slave log. To do this just hit the Check Slave button. Still you can check its connectivity status from the Master. Manually replicate edgeBOX's configuration and data to the Slave edgeBOX In Hotbackup. in normal situations you will get an Ok assuring you that everything is normal. In the end you will bet an Ok saying that everything went all right. to take over it's functions: 1. check the status of the last replication in the Slave edgeBOX. in order to replicate correctly. you loose access to the web interface.System 207 Please note: you should avoid performing administrative tasks close to replication time. If you are configuring your Master and the replication procedure starts. edgeBOX has to stop a considerable amount of network services. there could occur severe damage to your edgeBOX compromising stability. As a practical rule do not use the GUI or the CLI at replication hours. . edgeBOX will stop replicating to the slave edgeBOX. the replication of the Master edgeBOX's configuration and data is made everyday at a given hour that you defined when you configured the Hotbackup process. Check the status of the Slave edgeBOX When you have an edgeBOX in Slave mode. To do this just click the Replicate Now button. If the Master determines that the Slave is not reachable or inconsistently configured a detailed message will be displayed. Please wait. then hit the Change. Still you can ask the Master edgeBOX to replicate at any time. Before initializing the process. if you have an LCD unit then just srcoll down Critical Links. Make sure that your network has few activity when you ask edgeBOX to replicate. if the operation fails you will get a detailed diagnostic message. Note that. button and select the Disable Hotbackup option (this operatin will not perform any change of configuration in the Slave). Stop edgeBOX from being in Master mode If you have your edgeBOX running in Master Mode and you want to stop using HotBackup and make the edgeBOX run again in the default normal mode. All other services will continue working normally. As stated above. please avoid doing any other tasks while this one is running. Make the Slave edgeBOX take-over if the Master edgeBOX fails If your Master edgeBOX (the edgeBOX that is managing your network) is malfunctioning and you need the Slave edgeBOX (backup edgeBOX).. Inc.

is a process that should be planned carefully. 3. So. Shutdown or power-off the Master.208 edgeBOX 5. 10. This will not install anything but will periodically query the update server and send you notifications if needed. ISDN. you should manage edgeboxes' updates manually and not automatically to grant that the Master and the Slave have identical software versions. You can activate the Check for updates automatically but let me install manually option in the Software Updates menu. When you stop the Slave edgeBOX to work as a slave and make it take over the master. it becomes a perfect replica of the Master. Inc. · Slave software update The Slave edgeBOX is not able to execute nor to check for software updates by itself. 5. Despite other/mixed approaches may be possible. . 4. Just follow the process described in the Software Updates menu. in the System section. but you forget to update the other one.5. you gain back access to edgeBOX's web interface.1 Managing software updates in a Hotbackup scenario When you use the Hotbackup functionality. 2.0 Help the menus in the Slave and you´ll get the Replica Status with a date and an Ok. this is of utmost importance. as it finishes the return to normal mode operation. Connect all Master's appropriate cables (eg ADSL. the following may be used as a step-by-step approach to executing the software update on the slave: a) Before proceeding with the upgrade of the Slave please note the following: Critical Links. Type in the command hotbackup returntonormalmode or hotbackup return to normal mode. use the password that you used to login on the Master edgeBOX (the administrator password is also replicated onto the Slave). Open the slave edgeBOX's Comand Line Interface (CLI). Analogue etc) to the Slave edgeBOX. · Master software update Updating the Master is quite straightforward. To login to the web interface. Software updates. The Master automatically detects that the Slave has a diferent operating system version/release and will refuse to proceed. The same happens if you update the any of them manually. please follow the process until the end. The Slave edgeBOX will take over all services previously provided and managed by the Master. but do not select the option that installs software automatically. Please keep in mind that the slave. all subsequent replication attempts will fail. in the context of Hotbackup. if you allow the Master to update automatically.

according to the example given. simply.70. Inc. 6. Access the Salve's web interface and proceed as described in the Sofware Updates menu (assuming your laptop is still connected to the LAN interface you should point it to https:// LANIPADDRESS:8011.0 (or any other subnet that does not collide either with the Master's LAN nor any of the VLANs involved). depending ion the type of update it may be necessary to reboot. it will tell you). After update is complete all connections may be brought back to normal and the Slave returns to Slave mode. · If the Master is the default gateway of the network segment to which the Slave will connect in ordero to access the update server. re-wire the slave's network cable(s) back as they were before. 3. the laptop IP configuration must be manual. wait until the Slave has finished returning to normal mode of operation (you determine this by watching it reboot into normal mode from the VGA terminal).70. 2. in Slave mode there is no DHCP server running. the Master is turned off and the Slave takes it's place for software upgrade (during the night or weekend). then the Slave's WAN interface will obtain an IP address in the Master's LAN segment. re-enter and double check the Slave Mode's IP settings (IP. Critical Links. This implies that the WAN and LAN interfaces in the Slave will have configurations "in" the same IP segment. Disconnect the Slave's WAN cable. in this case you really need to disconnect the Master's WAN interface. 8.255.255. Netmask. .200. 7. you need to re-configure your laptop manually. this will surely frustrate the Slave's attempts to reach the update server. If the Slave is going to access the update server using the Master as default gateway. if needed) and access the CLI by ssh/putty. to do this you can connect your laptop directly to the Slave's LAN connector (using a crossover cable. b) The steps to executed the software update on the Slave are: 1. for example192. this step is not needed at all if the Slave will connect directly to the internet without the Master involved (unless you have static IP configuration on the WAN and you are planning to share the same network segment for the upgrade. Access the Slave's Command Line Interface (in Slave Mode there is no GUI). 5. when this command completes you will loose your connection. Execute the hotbackup return to normal mode command in the Slave's CLI (putty/ssh or keyboard/VGA). please change the Slave's LAN IP address by with the CLI command: lan static ip 192.168. in order to prevent double IP on same segment). make sure no warnings popup and everything processes normally. Connect to the Slave's WAN interface the cable that will provide internet connectivity (through the Master or directly through th ISP). Disconnect any network cable which might be connected to the Slave's WAN interface.1/255. if your laptop is connecte to the WAN segment of the Slave you should point to https://WANIPADDRESS:8011).System 209 · As the Slave returns to normal mode it's LAN interface will have the same configuration as the Master.168. wait until edgeBOX is fully back in Slave mode (watch the VGA terminal. Access the GUI and reconfigure Hotbackup Slave Mode. so. gateway and nameserver) and apply slave mode again. with. using the keyboard and VGA is also a good approach. 4. In this scenario either the Slave's LAN IP address is temporarily changed or.

the result must be "Ok". Critical Links. As usual.Execute the "Replicate now" operation if you don not wish to wait for the up-coming daily replication.Whether each e-mail notification is active or not. . 10. you can Start and Stop the Notifications service and an appropriate coloured status bar shows you the current operating status. please go to the Notifications menu in the System section.6 Notifications You may find the need to receive notifications regarding Hardware events.the e-mail address to which the notifications will be sent (leaving it as root@localhost will make the e-mail be delivered to the administrator e-mail address). Disable and Edit the details of e-mail notifications: · Notification · Hardware status changes: if you want to receive e-mails for temperature changes and other hardware issues. · Status . Disable and Edit the details of SNMP Traps notifications: · Name · Hardware status changes: if you want to receive traps for temperature changes and other hardware issues. RAID status and others. E-mails You may Enable. go to the Master's GUI and execute the "Check Slave" operation. Inc.The subject of the e-mail message. · E-mail Subject .0 Help 9. 10. if you changed anything).in case you use SNMP to manage your network(s). Re-wire the Master back to the way it was before (that is. · Receiver . · RAID if you want to receive e-mails about hard disk status related to RAID. edgeBOX is able to detect such events and forward them to you by e-mail and by means of SNMP traps . To configure the system to send these specific e-mail notifications and SNMP traps.210 edgeBOX 5. SNMP Traps You may Enable.

· Status . in the event of a hardware or software malfunction. Total capacity of the array is just the capacity of a single disk. Generic will be included for a future release.e.System 211 · Backup result summary: if you want to receive traps with the results of your scheduled backup operations.IP address of the SNMP management Server which will receive the traps. · Object ID .the array is rebuilding. . Critical Links.SNMP versions 1 and 2c are available options . The panel has the following elements: · At the top the array status is presented and it may be one of the following: · Clean . Inc. it is mirroring the disks · Degraded . only RAID1 is supported and it is managed by the RAID menu in the System section (this menu is only available if your system uses RAID).7 Managing and Diagnosing RAID A RAID array distributes data across several physical disks which look to the operating system and the user like a single disk. etc). · SNMP Version . · Trap Community . Several different arrangements are possible. so that data is not lost so long as one disk survives. The failure of one drive. · Trap Receiver . does not increase the chance of a failure or decrease the reliability of the remaining drives (second. third. Currently. 10.Whether each e-mail notification is active or not.. RAID1 uses two (possibly more) disks which each store the same data.Only Enterprise should be selected. · RAID if you want to receive SNMP traps about hard disk status informations related to RAID. i.The community which has been configured on the server which will receive the traps.there is a faulty disk in the array · A list with the array disks · A button to add a disk to the array and another button to remove a disk from the array. · Trap Type .The SNMP Object Identifier configured on the server which will receive the traps.all disks in the array are active · Recovering .

The (new) disk has either completed construction (and is now part of the RAID1 array) or the construction was aborted.A mirrored array which was previously configured.A spare disk (if one is available). just follow the steps: 1. 4. has lost a device and is no longer working as a RAID array · RebuildStarted . one may not have to shutdown the system immediately.0 Help 10. · FailSpare . the new disk has to be reconstructed from the good disk to form the array) · RebuildFinished . .1 Disk Notifications If the status of the array changes. The array status may be checked on the RAID panel.A spare disk (if one exists) which was being rebuilt to replace a faulty disk. Highlight the faulty disk and press the "Remove" button Critical Links. Notification actions will occur under the following circumstances: · DeviceDisappeared . Write down the serial number of the faulty disk 2. This action is accomplished by the following steps: 1. Note: The replacement disk must match the original disk.212 edgeBOX 5. · Fail . Shutdown the edgeBOX at the earliest opportunity 3. it cannot have a larger or smaller disk capacity (in Bytes) Hot Spare If the box has more than two disks.7. without the need of management intervention.The RAID array has started reconstruction (eg when a disk is replaced.e. Inc.The Array is degraded (eg disk failure) · SpareActive . i.7.2 Replacing a faulty disk If the array becomes degraded the faulty disk should be replaced.An active disk in the RAID mirror has been marked as faulty. has been successfully rebuilt and has been made active. There are different ways to perform disk replacement: No Hot Spare To replace a faulty disk automatically. A third disk (spare) may replace the faulty one. Start the system The new disk should synchronize with the active one. Replace the faulty disk (check the serial number) . 10.the new disk must have the same capacity (in bytes) as the faulty disk. which was being rebuilt to replace a faulty device has failed. · DegradedArray. a notification action may be performed as defined on the Notifications panel.

Mail. Synchronization process progress may be checked in the RAID panel. Hotswap Hotswap is also supported in the Enterprise Appliance. There you'll find: Log Viewer The Log Viewer lets you examine several application's logs with 2 levels of verbosity. 10. Authentication. . Website Access Restrictions. however the following precautions should be taken: · Write down all disks serial numbers and respective slot to know which disk is the faulty one. Clikc the Log viewer. select High or Low (changes will be applied to new log messages only). the available services are: Anti Virus. Backup. Daemon. · Verbosity: controls the level of detail of the messages displayed. In this case. link. Kernel. among others). To replace the faulty disk. RAID. Each page displays at most 25 lines. Point your browser at the Logging menu in the System section. VoIP. http logs. Hardware Monitor. The Log Viewer panel will popup: · Service: select the service for which you wish to read logs. Shut down the edgeBOX and remove and replace (if you wish) with a new disk which has the same Byte capacity as the faulty disk... Highlight the Spare Disk and press the "Add" button. The Previous and Next buttons allow you to scroll chronologically through the pages (earliest messages are displayed first). Critical Links. · The faulty disk may be replaced without shutting down the system. Hotbackup. If a spare disk is available in the "Array Disks" panel. Blacklist. edgeBOX includes comprehensive solutions for accessing system and application logs (such as syslog. it will be automatically used to rebuild the RAID array in the event of a disk failure with one of the current RAID disks.System 213 2. the new disk will be included on the RAID array and synchronization will begin. voip's cdrs.8 Reading and Managing System Logs Reading system or services logs may become necessary as a way to understand or solve specific operational issues. Inc. highlight it and select the "Remove" button. this setting is global to all services. it would be prudent to add this replacement disk to the "Array Disk" panel for automatic replacement in the event of another disk failure.

The table lists all the servers configured. The logmaster username gives you FTP access to edgeBOX's log files: · System Log Files (sys.0 Help Logs Destination edgeBOX can send logs to a remote logs server. . and the first one to answer will store the data.csv files) Additionally.log) · HTTP/HTTPS Access Logs (access_log) · VoIP CDR's (Master.9 RADIUS Accounting This menu option allows you to review and configure the RADIUS servers used for accounting. 10. Password: The password used by edgeBOX's RADIUS client to access the server Confirm Password: Confirm the password you have entered Critical Links. Server Port: The port used. button and specify: · Also store edgeBOX logs in a remote server: check this box. To enable this behaviour click on the Change.. Note that you can have authentication and accounting performed by the same server. The configured servers will be contacted in sequence. · Port: the TCP/IP port number on which the server listens for log messages. Log manager password You should set the logmaster password from this panel. The default value is 1813. Inc. · Server address: the IP Address or host name (FQDN) of the server to which edgeBOX will send log messages. download and delete call recordings made by means of the Automatic Call Recording. 514 is the default.. but another port may be used. If your edgeBOX is currently recording calls. To add a new RADIUS Accounting server you'll need: · · · · Server IP: The IP address for the new server.214 edgeBOX 5. The accounting data applies only to the WAN interface. you'll find them inside the call-recordings FTP folder. this FTP access should be used to access. or have different servers for each purpose.

“private” or ones that are easy to guess. · Devices within the following network segment: edgeBOX will only respond to SNMP queries coming from this IP segment (as determined by the IP Address and Netmask pair).Enter an object identifier (OID). Access to objects below this level are not allowed. “30 minutes” and “60 minutes”.Enable notifications to be sent. · A specific device: edgeBOX will only respond to SNMP queries coming from this IP address.g. · Community string .The name of the community used when requesting access to the SNMP agent. · Allow queries from: · Any device: edgeBOX's embedded SNMP agent will respond to SNMP queries coming form any device (with the correct community string obviouslly). Critical Links. e. · Enable Access to SNMP Agent .Enables the SNMP agent and allows read-only access to report the status of the edgeBOX. Avoid well known strings such as “public”. This panel controls the SNMP agent running on the edgeBOX. If this time is exceeded then the next server on the list (if any) will be contacted. · Allow queries for . Log Interval: possible values are “15 minutes”. 10. . “edgeBOX”. Specifically “public” is not allowed. SNMP Traps Configures the host (NMS) to which traps/notifications will sent. This option allows you to control the period for which account information will be sent to the remote RADIUS accounting servers.System 215 · · Timeout: The maximum amount of time for connection setup with the RADIUS server. SNMP Agent Configures read-only SNMP access to the edgeBOX. See Authentication for details. Inc. Note: Accounting is only available with authenticated user sessions. · Allow edgeBOX to send SNMP trap messages to a Trap manager .10 SNMP The status of the edgeBOX can be queried using the Simple Network Management Protocol.

Inc. sometimes in order of magnitude of 4000%.The name of the community used when sending a notification/trap.. · Every four weeks: Performs Database Optimization every four weeks. buttons to edit or remove the configuration.. to know: · Every Week: Performs Database Optimization on a weekly basis. and Remove Schedule. For each previous recurrence pattern you should also set the · day of week and · time hour and minute for running database optimization.. The main reason to do this is to increase user responsiveness and overall usability. Critical Links.0 Help · Community . may also benefit from a periodically optimized database.11 Maintenance In the Maintenance module it is possible to schedule system database optimization in order to improve performance of VoIP service and the Reporting engine. 10.216 edgeBOX 5. The Database Optimization can be done in several recurrence patterns. A short overview is provided with: · current configuration and · last database optimization execution date and time. Some edgePakcs.. The performance can be significantly increased by simply enabling this feature. Hardware Monitor and RAID services. These include the Backup. To configure the type of traps/notifications sent by edgeBOX go to the Notifications section. which also depend on the system database. Use the Change Schedule. · Every two weeks: Performs Database Optimization on a biweekly basis. · Receiver . To enable this option. . go to the Maintenance menu in the System section.The host name or IP address of a computer (NMS) to which notifications will be sent.

It is determined by the monitoring software of the disc. or when no services are being used to minimize the impact on services.13 Hardware Monitor Information of the velocity of edgeBOX's fans. For all services displayed: · Name: the service's name. To change status of a service click the service and hit the Start (green) or Stop (red) button at the top of the table. Critical Links. based on the values of the parameters that follow next. Adapt the best solution for each case. Hard disks information: · Overall Health . Please schedule your data optimization for a period of day when there is no (or low) load on your box.. Note that. Avoid colisions with the Hotbackup replication hours and the Backupscheduled operations. It is updated every 15 seconds.12 Services Control Panel For your convenience. · Description: the service's description..Number of sectors which are unusable. 10. · Bad Sectors Count . every Saturday at 4:00am. 10. A very simple example.start / stop .the administrative operational status of edgeBOX's main user services. the System section includes a Services panel where you can review and control .in very extreme situations). weekly. Inc. changes made here will be effective even after a reboot. the CPU speed and several status of the hard disk(s). or common abbreviation. This always depends on your service usage.Yes or No. is to set the edgeBOX database optimization tasks. · Status: whether they are running or not. This depends on the factors as the load of the edgeBOX and the amount of data being processed.System 217 When to schedule optimizations ? Database optimization may consume long periods of time (varying from a few minutes to some hours . · Temperature. . See an example. but mostly on the 'how long ago was the last optimization done?' or the 'was optimization ever done?'.

.: · Method: · ICMP: adjust timeout and enter packet size in Bytes · UDP: with this option selected the ping method will send a udp packet to the remote host's echo port. the other methods will not be attempted.. · CRC Errors Count .218 edgeBOX 5. this produces a Ping which will try each method sequentially (ICMP.14 Diagnostic Tools You can reach the Diagnostic Tools menu from the System section. 10. it will return a true value. · All: adjust timeout and enter the TCP port to which to send the probes. Enter an IP Address or a FQDN and press the Ping button.Number of errors when writing to the disk. choose the Hardware Status Changes type Notifications panel.. · SYN: adjust timeout and enter the TCP port to which to send the probes. if no reply is received after the timeout. If the syn packet was sent successfully. the ping method will only send a TCP SYN packet to the remote host then immediately return. and so on. · TCP: adjust timeout and enter the TCP port to which to send the probes. If one of the methods receives a reply (eg ICMP).Number of hours since the disk has been switched on.. the next method will be attempted until another timeout elapses. otherwise it will return false.Number of sectors waiting to be remapped to another part of the disk. UDP. Inc. if the "SYN" protocol is specified. For additional options press +Show options. It provides some basic network and connectivity diagnostics: Ping Tests for network connectivity. Critical Links. You can receive e-mail notifications about changes detected in the Hardware Monitor. TCP then SYN). adjust timeout and enter packet size in Bytes. · Total Up Time . continues until either a successful reply is received or all methods have timed out.0 Help · Pending Sectors Count .

Type the IP Address or FQDN in the box and press the Trace button... Note: it may take more than 10 seconds to complete the task. button and enter the values for: · Remote Management Server . · IP Addresses: to determine the IP address for a specified domain name or FQDN. Such a server allows the management of several edgeBOXes at the same time. such as google.System 219 NSLookup To diagnose DNS problems. 10.. A short overview is shown with the current configurations.45 and press the Lookup button. · Domain Names: allows you do list DNS servers for a given domain.34. For additional options press +Show options.org and press the Lookup button. enter a domain name. Traceroute Find the route that network packets follow to reach a specified host or IP address. enter an IP address.: · DNS Server: allows you to specify a DNS Server (by IP or name) which will be used to resolve the IP address. · Mail Servers: allows you to determine the mailservers for a specified domain. the edgeBOX default name server is used for the lookup. enter a domain name.: · Method: ICMP or UDP.15 Remote Management Allows communication between edgeBOX and a Remote Management server. If not set.com and press the Lookup button. the type of packets used in the traceroute test. Depending on your Lookup for selection: · Host Names: allows you to determine the Name of a specified IP address. Inc. enter a domain name. A reference for how traceroute (tracert on Windows) works can be found at: Traceroute..fr and press the Lookup button. Critical Links. .the IP address. · Timeout: maximum time waiting for test results on each router along the way. such as 212. To alter these settings press the Change..fsf.23.. · Timeout: maximum time waiting for test results. such as critical-links. such as www. For additional options press +Show options.

.time interval.220 edgeBOX 5. Critical Links. in minutes.0 Help · Keep Alive . used to separate the emission of 'keep alive packets' to the Remote Management Server. The server will use this keep alive connection to warn administrators of potential problems with the edgeBOX. Inc.

1 CPU The CPU report shows edgeBOX's processor usage. You can export the reports into a printable HTML page that you can print via a browser. Inc. For each report you can specify a Time Interval.1 System Displays information regarding edgeBOX’s system usage: · CPU · Memory · Load · Disk Usage · Interfaces 11.Reporting 221 11 Reporting View and export reports about edgeBOX's System. a single day or hour.1. in percentage. per type of process (user’s and system processes) and cpu idle time. for automated processing. Critical Links. or into a CSV file. . 11. It can be a begin/end day. Services and Users. depending on the report you are seeing. You can drill down each line into each day to view the CPU usage just for the selected day.

2 Memory This report shows used and free memory.1. Critical Links. Inc. .0 Help 11.222 edgeBOX 5. Drill down in each day to view the memory usage for that day only. in MB.

3 Load The Load report displays the load of the system through the number of active processes. Drill down into each day to view the load of the CPU for each day. Load 15 min values indicate the average active processes 15 minutes.Reporting 223 11. Critical Links.1. Load 5 min values indicate the average active processes in 5 minutes. Inc. . Load 1 min values indicate the average active processes in one minute.

0 Help Values below 1 represent good CPU load. Critical Links. in percentage and in MB. per Storage. Scroll down to view disk usage for both Storages. between 3 and 4 require you to monitor closely. and values over 5 require you to take action because the CPU is overloaded. Drill down into each day to view usage for that day only.1. Inc. .224 edgeBOX 5.4 Disk Usage This report displays the hard disk usage. 11.

. · The Home Storage partition is used to save the user account folders and the network shared folders (Shares). Drill down into each day to check the usage of the interface for that specific day. Scroll down to view information for the LAN and. if you have one. Critical Links. LAN and DMZ interfaces.Reporting 225 · The System Storage partition saves the runtime system data information (database and log information).1. 11. DMZ interfaces.5 Interfaces Shows the traffic received and sent by edgeBOX in the WAN. Inc.

1 HTTP Access The HTTP Accesses report displays information about HTTP accesses through edgeBOX. .226 edgeBOX 5. Inc. page hits and users yielding these accesses. accumulated traffic in Mega Bytes. · HTTP Access · Web Server · Firewall · E-mail · VoIP · VPN 11.2 Services Displays reports showing information about the service usage. Critical Links. You can drill down into each line to see daily HTTP accesses and sites visited. This means.2.0 Help 11. the total number of sites.

. Inc. It is possible to drill down into each day to check the accesses on that specific day.Reporting 227 Please note: this report will contain no information if the Proxy Cache service is stopped. It is where the Intranet and Extranet websites and the users' personal webpages are storaged. in Mega Bytes to edgeBOX's web server.2 Web Server The Web Server report shows accesses to edgeBOX's web server. Critical Links. 11. You can view the total number of visits to every page and the generated traffic.2.

2. Critical Links. You can drill down each line to a specific time frame in order to identify actions applied to unauthorized network traffic. Inc.3 Firewall This report shows Firewall related information as dropped and rejected (sent back) network packets grouped by day.228 edgeBOX 5.0 Help 11. .

You can also view the amount of e-mails processed and. Critical Links.4 E-mail The E-mail report shows e-mail service related information in the Services perspective. If you drill down in each line. you can identify singular e-mail exchange info such as the sender or the receiver e-mail. the size of the message and if it was infected with a virus. This is.Reporting 229 11.com part of the email address) are processed for the sent and received e-mail.2. how many of those where detected as being infected with viruses by the Mail Scanner. if it was locally delivered to edgeBOX. . you can only see how many sender and receiver e-mail domains (the @mail. Inc.

calls received from outside edgeBOX's network to internal phones connected to the edgeBOX.calls made to external phones.2.0 Help 11. · Inbound Calls .5 VoIP The VoIP report displays VoIP service usage. . Inc.230 edgeBOX 5.calls made between phones connected to edgeBOX. Critical Links. · Outbound Calls . Calls are grouped into: · Internal Calls .

and accumulated duration of connections per day. number of users using the VPN service. Critical Links. 11.6 VPN The VPN report gives information about the PPTP VPN tunnels in use in the edgeBOX. Inc. the number of connections made. The information available includes the duration of the calls and number of calls made. .Reporting 231 The image above is a drilled-down detailed of the Internal Calls.2.

1 General The General report summarizes the activity of users. Inc.3 Users Services data correlated with user information: · Accounting information · HTTP Access · E-mail · VoIP · VPN 11.3.232 edgeBOX 5. Tou can view the inbound and outbound traffic in Mega Bytes. PPTP VPN tunnels and the total duration of these tunnels. The information is shown only in a tabular format. it is not possible to drill down inside each line as in other reports. Critical Links. . and external calls made and the duration of the calls.0 Help 11.

Inc. If you are not using authentication. Critical Links.2 Accounting The Accounting report shows network traffic and sessions made by the network users. instead of the username. You can drill down in each line of the table to view detailed information for each session of the users.Reporting 233 11. You can check the amount of downloads and uploads that are being processed for the users in each network interface (WAN. LAN and DMZ). .3. the user's IP Address is shown.

4 E-mail The E-mail report shows e-mail service related information for each e-mail address.0 Help 11. 11. The report details the total number of sites. Please note: this report will contain no information if the Proxy Cache service is stopped. You can drill down in each line to view e-mail messages details for a particular e-mail account. Critical Links. HTTPS website accesses are not showed.3. . accumulated download traffic in Mega Bytes and number of page hits.234 edgeBOX 5. You can also drill down in each line of the table to see the sites visited for each user.3 HTTP Access The HTTP Accesses report displays information about HTTP website accesses made by the network users.3. Inc.

For all registered phones the Inbound. Drill down into each type of calls to view the calls made for that type.5 VoIP The VoIP report displays VoIP calls for each phone or user.Reporting 235 11. Outbound and Internal calls with their associated call duration is displayed.3. . If you select a user's calls yo ucan view calls to and from that user for the specified time period: Critical Links. Inc.

0 Help 11.3.236 edgeBOX 5. Critical Links. It shows the number of connections and the total duration of the connections.6 VPN The VPN report gives a summary of the PPTP VPNs on edgeBOX. . Inc.

Inc.How do I get here ? Point your browser to https://myedgebox.User Services and Applications 237 12 User Services and Applications On the initial page. commonly accessible edgeBOX features. besides Login option.com. . on the left you'll find a list of accessible services: · Temporary Shared Folders Applications In the Applications section you'll find links to the following applications (if installed and/or configured). if from outside. Follow the links bellow for details: · Webmail · Flash Operator Panel Critical Links. https://WAN-IP-Address:8011 . you will enter the edgeBOX Services page (this option will only be available for users in the internal network). Initial Page . these are browser based user-oriented. https://LAN-IP-Address:8011 . or. Services Following the Services link. you will find the and Services and Applications options.

as well as the current safes' configuration parameters. Sizes available will always be less than or equal to the maximum size configured. Inc. Critical Links. Any user on your network can ask for a box to store files and access it as a normal Windows share. The user must belong to Privilege with access to the Samba service.0 Help 12. Select the desired settings for your safe. the following conditions must be met: · · · The Windows Server service must be running. Any LAN user can request a safe accessing the utilities page (http://<lan address>:8011 and selecting the "Services" option).1 Temporary Shared Folders Safes are available only for LAN users and may be used when there's a need for a temporary space for storage. select "Create a new safe". The following page will be displayed. Currently available safes will be displayed. To create a new safe. as well as the maximum time the safe will be available.238 edgeBOX 5. To create the safe. Temporary Shared Folders must be active. Follow the link "Public Folders". select "Create safe". . To be able to use safes.

. Inc. Critical Links.User Services and Applications 239 Safe creation window If the safe was successfully created. credentials to access it will be displayed. credentials to access the safe Selecting "Public Folders" again will now display the safe just created.

0 Help Public safes list To use the safe. Inc. . entering the credentials supplied to authenticate. Critical Links. access it like a normal windows share.240 edgeBOX 5.

Critical Links. go to the Services > "Public Folders" menu and follow the "Close this Folder" link next to the safe you want to close. the folder and contents are deleted. Inc.User Services and Applications 241 If you want to close the safe before its time expires. If the operation completes successfully. . Note: When a Folder is closed (manually or after the timeout). the message "Folder closed" will be displayed. You will need to supply the password for the safe.

Select your preferred language and login with your edgeBOX username and password. You will be presented with the following screen. Critical Links. this is because it has not been configured to. select the Applications link and then Webmail (if Webmail is not available. Use the interface to send and read your e-mail.0 Help 12.2 Webmail In the Initial Page of User Services and Application. see E-mail domains and Webmail).242 edgeBOX 5. . Inc.

User Services and Applications 243 12. . the additional entries can be viewed by placing the mouse to the right of the screen. ringing or available · Who is talking and to whom · SIP and IAX registration status (Greys out if offline) · MeetMe room status (number of participants) · Queue status (number of users waiting) · Parked channels · Logged in Agents Critical Links. causing the screen to scroll to the right (and vice-versa) You are reminded that you need to allow the FOP service on the Firewall Panel. Note that if there are more entries than can be shown on the screen. for access and the Web Server must be running. Inc. FOP allows you to view: · Which extensions are busy.3 Flash Operator Panel (FOP) Flash Operator Panel (FOP) is a switchboard type application which is able to display information about the PBX activity in real time.

which should present you with the following Menu.0 Help FOP allows you to perform the following actions: · Hang-up a channel · Transfer a call leg via drag and drop · Initiate calls via drag and drop · Barge in on a call using drag and drop · Drag and drop to create an agent · Manage queues · Park/Unpark calls 12. Inc.1 FOP Login To Access the FOP Interface. Select the Applications menu and you should be presented with the following: Critical Links. .3.244 edgeBOX 5. enter the edgeBOX URL into your browser.

this is because you have not selected configured a Webmail Domain. Inc. please refer to the E-mail Server and Webmail for configuration instructions) When you select Flash operator. . you will be presented with the following screen: The default Security Code login is: root To alter this password. enter username and Password as admin and root (respectively) and set a new password.User Services and Applications 245 (If Webmail is not present on the Menu. Critical Links.

.246 edgeBOX 5. by double clicking on the red LED. npem's phone will ring.0 Help 12.2 Initiate a Call To create a call. for the user of interest to the phone icon of If. simply drag the phone icon the person you wish to call.3. You may force the termination of a call. Once the call is established. jayme's phone will ring and the call is established. If npem picks up the call. you drag the npem phone icon to the jayme icon. for example. as well as the duration of the call. Critical Links. both phones will change their green 'LED' to red and the extension number of the caller will be shown. Inc.

3. the icon will be greyed out.3 External Calls A call which is from an outside line. you may terminate a call by double clicking the red LED of the phone (or the line). Inc. with their telephone number. 12. . Critical Links. the caller has rung alextalk via the BRI/1 2 connection (as they both have the same tel number tag of the external caller). tags the incoming route with the callers number and also tags the person they have called. Again.User Services and Applications 247 Note: If a phone is not currently registered with edgeBOX (as thus cannot be rung). In the large panel below.

248 edgeBOX 5.0 Help

12.3.4 Transfer a call
To transfer a call, you simply drag the icon to the panel where you wish to place the call. Thus you could drag a callers icon to a phone, or to a Queue, or park the call (etc).

12.3.5 Barging
Barging allows the operator to interfere with an active call. Thus if 2 users have established a call, you could (although this is not generally recommended) drag a phone to one of the phones which is already connected, to establish a new call (leaving one of the users with a disconnected call!).

12.3.6 Create an Agent
Assuming that you have configured a Queue, you can add phones to the Queue to act as Agents for the Queue. To add an Agent, simply drag the phone to the Queue (the phone LED will change from green to yellow).

To delete the Agent, drag the phone to the queue again (the LED will change from yellow to green).

Critical Links, Inc.

User Services and Applications 249

12.3.7 Queue Managment
Each Queue, consists of three panels, as shown below.

The top panel (Queue Support) shows the status of the queue (1 caller waiting for an Agent) and the queue name (support) The next two panels show the top two (longest in queue) clients in the queue.

To add a client to the queue, simply drag the ringing phone to the queue, or drag one of the phones which has established a phone connection. Note: You can reset a queue by double clicking on Queue's (top panel of the three) LED. If you do this, all callers in the queue will be removed.

12.3.8 Park-Unpark Calls
To park a call, simply drag their phone, or their incoming line, to the Parked queue.

Critical Links, Inc.

250 edgeBOX 5.0 Help

The phone/line will then show the their parked position. You can then drag the parked phone icon to a phone (or elsewhere) to establish a call.

12.3.9 Conference Calls
To enter a conference, simply drag the phone icon (or line) to the conference icon, which will cause the phone to ring.

The Conference will show the number of users of the conference.

12.3.10 Typical Caller Scenario
A typical scenario is as follows: · A caller (A) rings and is routed to the operator (B). They request C's extension. · The operator can see that C is not on a call and can drag the line icon to C's phone, or · The operator can put the caller on hold (by dragging the incoming line to the park icon) and drag the operator phone icon to C's icon to ring C and ask if they wish to take the call. · The Operator can now either drag the icon from park to C's icon or drag the park icon to their phone icon and explain that C cannot take the call.

Critical Links, Inc.

Appendices 251

13 Appendices
13.1 Appendix A: Authentication
edgeBOX runs several services under which you have to provide credentials. There are a several possible authentication scenarios and configurations. In this appendix, edgeBOX's authentication architecture will be explained. It is important to understand these concepts, as they will be needed if you want to deploy a remote authentication scenario. We will shown what happens when the "Require users to login" option is enabled. The complete sequence of events will be reviewed and detailed. Finally, some remote configuration examples will be shown.

13.1.1 Authentication architecture
Authentication (proving who you are) and authorisation (what you can do) are handled in a mixed manner in edgeBOX. Considering first a local authentication scenario, upon user creation you need to provide a password and define which services a user will be authorised to use. Services available in edgeBOX are: · Regular services, such as POP3, IMAP, FTP and Internet access for LAN users; · Windows use (Samba Print and Filesharing); · Allow authentication from wireless and wired 802.1x port based authentication devices on the LAN; · PPTP · VoIP. Internally, edgeBOX uses a RADIUS server, configured to use an LDAP backend.

13.1.2 Require users to login vs Privileges policies
Connections originating from the LAN to the Internet, to the DMZ network and to services running on edgeBOX are granted by default. But you may choose to limit this access by enforcing an access Privilege. This is done by activating the Authentication service - the Privilege policies will be enforced at the Firewall level. This is always the first level of access to be tested: when if users are required to login (LAN/VLAN

Critical Links, Inc.

252 edgeBOX 5.0 Help users), any connections are denied - they are in fact discarded by the firewall. If an user wants to access the Internet, the following steps must be taken: · The user accesses edgeBOX's authentication page or some website running on port 80 (which causes a redirection to edgeBOX's authentication page); · The user enters his credentials (username/password); · If the credentials entered were valid, the user may or may not be granted access, depending on his access Privilege. From this moment on, and if this user's policy grants him access to the Internet, he will be able to access any remote service. Furthermore, a pop-up window will be displayed, allowing him to log out. This pop-up window must be kept open to keep the user authenticated. If this window is closed and no network traffic is detected originating from this user's machine, the authentication will time out and the user will have to re-authenticate in order to access the Internet. The timeout is set to five minutes.

Privileges allow the following items to be configured: · QoS classes assigned to WAN/DMZ connections; · Access to the Internet: time interval and services; · Access to edgeBOX's services: time interval and services; · Access to the DMZ: time interval and services; · Inter VLAN access. · Access to IPSec VPNs. · Access to PPTP VPN sessions. As previously mentioned, the policies are handled at the firewall level. After an user authenticates, appropriate firewall rules are loaded in order to enforce his Privilege profile. A user authenticating from a PC in the LAN will in fact revert to an IP/MAC address pair, and each rule loaded will refer to this pair. If the profile to which the user belongs to was granted access to the Internet, a firewall rule will be loaded allowing all traffic originating from this host to the Internet. If a Privilege contains an IP address (see the Devices section in Privileges), then firewall rules reflecting this policy profile featuring this IP will automatically be loaded, making it a static entry. That is, if a user uses a machine with an IP in a profile, they will be automatically authenticated by the edgeBOX and will have the profile's privileges (rather than the users profile privileges). A typical use of this feature is to automatically allow servers to access the Internet. Suppose you have a Windows update server. By making its IP a member of a group with access to the Internet will automatically enable access to the Internet for this server.

Critical Links, Inc.

LDAP is queried. if the user tries to access any website on port 80 or edgeBOX's authentication page. if the password does not match. the user will be granted access according to his Privilege. these two functions can be delegated on remote servers. · Otherwise. namely PPTP and Wireless that allow you to use another (RADIUS) server to perform authentication. access is granted (authorization AND authentication succeeded). edgeBOX's RADIUS server is queried. access is granted. · After entering his credentials. rules reflecting this user's Privilege policy are loaded into the firewall. allowing for a multitude of different configurations and scenarios. access is denied (authorization failed). the authentication page is displayed. The following matrix displays the possible combinations for authentication/authorization schemes: Authorisation Local RADIUS Local RADIUS Local RADIUS Local RADIUS Remote RADIUS Remote LDAP Authentication Local LDAP Remote LDAP Remote AD Remote RADIUS Remote RADIUS Remote LDAP Critical Links. The complete sequence of events is as follows: · If the user tries to access edgeBOX's port 8010/8011. · Otherwise. · If the user has requested a web page and his policy allows. all services will be authenticated against the scheme chosen. · At this point. be it local or remote. access is denied by the firewall.1. Due to the concept of system-wide authentication. · Otherwise.1.Appendices 253 13. Otherwise. · Otherwise. · If the user closes the pop-up window and no network traffic is generated for 6 minutes. There are some services however. If a reject argument is found. . access will be denied. · Otherwise (any other application). the rules will be unloaded from the firewall and further connections denied. his browser will be redirected to the web page requested and a small window will pop-up. Inc. The user will have to reauthenticate.3 Putting it all together Suppose a user in the LAN tries to access the Internet or an edgeBOX service and the Authentication service is running. The IP/ MAC address pair in these rules are the user's PC IP/MAC address pair. containing a message indicating success and a logout button. However. 13.4 Remote configuration So far we have assumed edgeBOX handles both authentication and authorization using its local RADIUS and ldap servers. access is denied (authentication failed).

after an user logins in for the first time. you must start the "Wireless Zero Configuration" service. only the native MS Windows client was used. Bear in mind that although a remote scheme is used. it will be shown how to configure a MS Windows client station to connect to edgeBOX's wireless access point using 802. they are not known to edgeBOX before they make their first successful login. you can still add local users before those users make their first login. Some cards have their own managing software. In the examples that follow. 13. WiFi or LAN only using LAN authentication. local accounts and entries will be created locally. Critical Links. he will be placed in the "Generic" privilege. When using Active Directory as a remote authentication scheme. This can be useful if you want to set their service permissions beforehand (when using local authorisation) or to set the group to which they will belong (by default they are assigned to the generic group). As users are remote. You can have a remote configuration replicating this configuration. Before this happens no user account is created locally and the same applies for edgeBOX's local RADIUS and LDAP servers (edgeBOX always keeps a local copy). Inc. having a LDAP backend performing authentication/authorisation. Depending on the scheme used.0 Help The first line matches edgeBOX's local configuration (all local).1x and WPA. If you are not using local authorisation.254 edgeBOX 5.. PPTP. in which RADIUS performs authorisation. you will still be able to edit user's permissions. and will be granted permission to access the services configured in the "Generic" privilege. if the Active Directory server is not reachable at a certain point the users will be authenticated locally. POP3. Special remarks have to be made when you delegate authorisation/authentication on a remote LDAP or RADIUS or Active Directory (without "import users" checked) server. Not all wireless cards will support these security schemes .2 Appendix B: Connecting to Wireless In this appendix. AD (with user import) or Remote LDAP Remote RADIUS or AD (without user import) First Login using any service: FTP. i.e.a firmware upgrade may be needed in some cases. To be able to have MS Windows controlling your Wireless connection. . the way a user may perform his first login will vary. you have the option to import the users. In such a configuration. The next table displays this information: Authentication Sheme Used Local. This schema works also in "fail-safe" mode. In this scenario.

no Hardware Address based filtering will occur. Inc.this network will be visible for all wireless clients nearby.Appendices 255 Wireless configuration applet. . · Allow only specific devices to use the wireless network: not active . Critical Links. later you can configure it. Notice that windows is being used to configure wireless In the examples that follow. the following general configuration will be used by edgeBOX: · SSID: valebox · Channel: 1 · Hide Network: not active . later you can activate this if you wish.

1x authentication and accounting. On MS Windows.1 802. . double-click the "Wireless Network Connection" icon and select the "Wireless Networks" tab.0 Help 13. Inc.2.1x The following picture illustrates the configuration used by edgeBOX for 802. Select then the "Authentication" tab. Choose "WPA" for "Network Authentication" and "AES" for "Data Encryption". Critical Links. Make sure the SSID entered is consistent with that defined on edgeBOX (valebox on our example).256 edgeBOX 5.

. Critical Links. uncheck the "Validate server certificate" checkbox. select "Protected EAP (PEAP)" as the "EAP type".Appendices 257 Wireless Network Connection Wireless Networks On the Authentication tab." checkbox. uncheck the "Automatically use my Windows. and select "Secure password" as the Authentication Method. Press the "Properties" button.. Press "OK" on all dialogs to confirm this configuration. . Authentication Protected EAP Properties On the dialog window that pops-up. Inc. On the dialog window that pops-up. Press the "Configure" button.

the network key to be used must also be supplied.2.258 edgeBOX 5. If the connection was successful.0 Help If the configuration succeeds.2 WPA If edgeBOX was configured to use WPA as the security scheme. Remember that if you choose to use Critical Links. . you should see a balloon warning you to enter credentials to connect to the wireless network. its status will appear as "Connected". 13. the following settings must be configured on the client: · Network Authentication: WPA-PSK · Data Encryption: AES. Clicking on the balloon will display a prompt requiring you to enter the username and password for a user authorised to connect to the Wireless network. Inc. Additionally.

com/passwords.Appendices 259 a preshared key. it may be ascii or hex. You may obtain an automatically generate key from the website https://www. Inc. Wireless Configuration Network key dialog Critical Links. it must be 64 hexadecimal characters long. htm. asking you to supply the network key. If this connection is configured to be established manually. when you try to connect to it a dialog window will be shown. . if less than 64 characters.grc.

In the dialog window that pops-up.0 Help 13. select "System" under the Windows Control Panel.this assumes edgeBOX is running the Windows Server and acting as a Primary Domain Controller.1 Adding a Windows Host to edgeBOX Domain This section details the process of adding a windows host to the edgeBOX Windows Domain . To add a windows host to edgeBOX's Windows Domain. The windows host will be added to the Domian provided by edgeBOX. Please make sure to catch all the details in the Windows Server section.260 edgeBOX 5. join domain dialog Critical Links. you will be required to supply credentials of a user belonging to the domain administrator's group. After you select "OK" to confirm the domain change. how to: · Add a Windows computer to edgeBOX's Domain · Map an edgeBOX Shared Folder on Windows Remember that users can olny access these features if they belong to a Privilege for which the Samba service is accessible. which has the same password as the admin user (defaults to root). namely. . Select the "Change" button.3. 13. select the "Domain" option and enter your domain name (in our example it was "mydomain"). In edgeBOX. and then select the "Computer Name" tab.3 Appendix C: Windows Integration This appendix will shown you how to use some of edgeBOX's Windows Server features. you have to specifically supply the username "Administrator". Inc.

2 Mapping a Shared Folder on Windows To map an edgeBOX shared folder on a virtual Drive 1. Go to My Computer.3. Select the Tools menu and the Map Network Drive option. Critical Links. After rebooting the machine. The user's home directory will be mounted as Z:. log on to edgeBOX's domain (it should be available on the domains' list). where the public_html directory can be accessed. The other directory shown (profile) is where the roaming profile data will be stored. Inc. This is the directory where the user's personal web page will be located. so the user will retain her desktop definitions after logging off. the following dialog will be displayed. 2. 13.Appendices 261 change domain dialog If the operations was successful. In the picture bellow the user's directory content is shown. .

Windows does not allow you to mount shares with different username/passwords. Some of the supported features depend on the type of Switch or Wireless AP used for deployment.90.168. followed by the name of the shared folder. a broad range of scenarios are possible. · For switches with L3 features it is important to disable inter vlan routing on the switch.262 edgeBOX 5.1Q switch will work.254\rui. It's possible to disconnect from a share using the command "net use * /delete". via the command 13. Inter vlan routing is done in the edgeBOX with access profile enforcement. 4. Critical Links. For example: \ \192. which will disconnect that particular share. From a basic network infrastructure with generic 802. For advanced features like port based authentication.1x with single sign on or automatic guest VLAN more advanced switches will be needed. This will release all connections to shares.possible to specify which share to release. 802. Type the IP address of edgeBOX.0 Help 3. Inc. It's "net use" which will display which are the active shares and then "net use <share> / delete". · For basic VLAN scenarios any 802. . dynamic vlan assignment.1Q Switches to full port based authentication devices with dynamic VLAN assignment.4 Appendix D: VLAN based Infrastructure With the introduction of VLANs in the edgeBOX architecture the type of scenarios where an edgeBOX can be deployed has been significantly increased. Select the character you to use for the drive.

802.1q compatible switch · No 802.1x port based authentication · No Dynamic VLAN assignment · No native Guest VLAN on switch · VLAN Scenario 3 · 802.1x and dynamic VLAN assignment · Support for 802.1Q.802.1x .1x SSO and Dynamic VLAN assignment · Procurve 420 Wireless AP (Firmware 2. Inc.1x port based authentication · No Dynamic VLAN assignment · No native Guest VLAN on switch · VLAN Scenario 2 · Standard 802.1x Port based authentication.1q compatible switch with 802. Dynamic VLAN assignment · D-Link DES-1252 .2. manual session timeout configuration · SMC Tigerswitch 6726 AL2 .1Q VLAN + 802.1X.1Q VLAN and 802. You might wish to read them in order to get a better grasp of the concepts or to adapt them to your own needs: · VLAN Scenario 1 · Standard 802.802.802.1Q.2 or later) . 802.1Q · Generic L2 switch with 802. · Generic Wireless AP with 802. 802.802. . No single sign on available. 802.Appendices 263 Type of Authenticators supported: · Procurve 2650 Series .1Q VLAN only · Generic L2 switch with 802. manual session timeout configuration · D-Link DES-1228 . No single sign on available.802.1x · Support for 802. Type of 802.1x SSO.1x .802.Support for 802.1x supplicants tested (PEAP-EAP-MSCHAPv2): · Windows XP SP2 · MacOS X · Windows Vista · Windows Vista SP1 Please find below four possible VLAN deployment scenarios.1Q.1x port based authentication · Support for Dynamic VLAN assignment – (HP Procurve switch) · No native Guest VLAN on switch Critical Links.1Q VLAN .1Q.1x SSO.1q compatible switch with 802.802.1x Authentication only.

1q compatible switch with 802. Critical Links.264 edgeBOX 5.1q compatible switch · No 802. allowing all configured VLANs to pass through the link. The port on the switch must be configured as 802.1q trunk.0 Help · VLAN Scenario 4 · 802. In this case the LAN port of the edgeBOX is connected to a trunk port in the switch.1 VLAN Scenario 1 Characteristics of this scenario: · Standard 802. . Inc.1x port based authentication · Support for Dynamic VLAN assignment – (HP Procurve switch) · Native Guest VLAN on switch – (HP Procurve switch) 13.4.1x port based authentication · No Dynamic VLAN assignment · No native Guest VLAN on switch This is the most basic scenario when deploying VLANs with edgeBOX.1x and dynamic VLAN assignment · Support for 802.

Inc.2 VLAN Scenario 2 Characteristics of this scenario: · Standard 802. 13. . 4 .Access Rules between VLAN segments can be configured per access profile in the VLAN tab. If the user is not able to authenticate with success. the LAN zone is the same as VLAN 1 (id 1).The only type of user authentication available is Web Login. DMZ and access to other VLAN segments.When using VLANs.1x · Support for 802. This means the edgeBOX firewall does not allow routing of traffic between VLANs unless the administrator configures it with different type of access rules.1x port based authentication · No Dynamic VLAN assignment · No native Guest VLAN on switch Critical Links.Appendices 265 1 . the firewall enforces the configured User Access Profile rules for WAN.By default. and this means all ports are by default configured as being part of that VLAN.1q compatible switch with 802. 2 .4. In most cases the VLAN 1 is the default VLAN on a new installed switch. 3 . all traffic between VLAN zones is blocked. When a user authenticates successfully. then all traffic to and from this user will be filtered with the default rules for non-authenticated users.

. At this point the client will get an IP address if configured with dhcp and the edgeBOX DHCP server is enabled. made by the Client PC supplicant.1x is that the user will not be able to access the network until he is able to get a successful authentication. Support for Single Sign On (SSO) Scenarios based on 802.1x protocol.1x include support for automatic user login. needs to be authorized. will be forwarded by the switch to the configured RADIUS server for authentication.1x port based authentication we need to configure the switch to use the edgeBOX as the RADIUS server for authentication and enable the ports where we want this enforced. for a client PC connected to one of the switch ports configured with 802. If the authentication is successful the switch will open the respective port and the client will be part of the static VLAN configured on that Port. the RADIUS client.266 edgeBOX 5.1x port based authentication. Inc.1x. If the authentication is not successful then the port will be closed and the user will not get access to the network. On the edgeBOX this 802.1x based switch. The only addition is that we have some or all ports on the switch configured for 802. The only requirement is that a Critical Links. The main advantage of using 802. Both Windows XP and Vista include supplicants with native support for this authentication type. The authentication request.0 Help This is basically the same as Scenario 1. To enable support for 802. the switch detects the presence of a client and initiates the 802. The edgeBOX supports protocol PEAP-EAP-MSCHAPv2. In this scenario. and this is done in System->RADIUS->Add.

A supported switch includes the calling station MAC address in the RADIUS Access Request packet and is able to process session timeout.1q compatible switch with 802.1x authentication and on success.1x switch does not support the calling station attribute. the port based authentication is still done but the user will need to do a normal weblogin when accessing the Internet or services running on the gateway.1x authenticator in the switch with information regarding the VLAN id for that particular user.Appendices 267 supported 802.1x port based authentication · Support for Dynamic VLAN assignment – (HP Procurve switch) · No native Guest VLAN on switch This is scenario 3 with a switch that supports VLAN dynamic assignment. In this case.4. the RADIUS server sends additional attributes to the 802.1x and dynamic VLAN assignment · Support for 802. The following is needed to deploy this feature: Critical Links. During 802. after a successful authentication. Without a successful authentication the port will be closed and the user wont be able to access the network. The edgeBOX supports assignment of a VLAN per access profile.3 VLAN Scenario 3 Characteristics of this scenario: · 802.1x switch is used to deploy those scenarios. . In case the 802. 13. Inc. the switch moves the associated port to the VLAN configured for that user access profile.

The network infrastructure must be setup with Procurve 2650 or compatible switches in terms of RADIUS dynamic Vlan assignment. The HP Procurve follows RFC2868 / 3580 with with Tunnel-Private-Group-ID of type string. select the correct client type and enable Dynamic VLAN assignment. The advantage of this scenario is the fact that we can effectively do network access control by port and at same time we are able to put the user in the correct VLAN even if he does a login outside of is main work space.268 edgeBOX 5. Configure the RADIUS client as referred in Scenario 2.4. 13. Inc.1x and dynamic VLAN assignment · Support for 802. 3. See NAC->Access profiles>”Profile”->VLAN->VLAN Name. 2.0 Help 1. .1x port based authentication · Support for Dynamic VLAN assignment – (HP Procurve switch) · Native Guest VLAN on switch – (HP Procurve switch) Critical Links.4 VLAN Scenario 4 Characteristics of this scenario: · 802.1q compatible switch with 802. Configure the User Access Profiles with the correct VLANs.

· Guest01 is a member of the guest profile. Users in this profile are not able to access any of the other VLANs or LAN. In the end the system will reboot and the hard disks will be re-imaged with the original first install contents.1x Open VLAN mode in the Procurve 2650.1x authentication and automatically opens the port on VLAN6.5 Appendix E: Factory Reset The factory reset option is only available through the CLI (Command Line Interface). If the edgeBOX authentication is enabled. The unauthorized-client VLAN can be configured using the 802. · Guest profile is configured to have open access to the Internet only. 13. · User01 has his laptop ethernet connection setup for 802. · User01 is a member of the engineering profile.1x authentication. · Engineering profile has access to Internet.1x and VLAN dynamic assignment. without a successful authentication. the switch is not able to start a 802. the user will be presented with the edgeBOX web login page when trying to access the Internet. user data and software updates since the first time the edgeBOX was installed. · Guest01 is a guest user with just a regular dhcp configuration on his laptop. Inc. · When Guest01 connects to port 5. This is similar with scenario 3 and the only difference is when the 802.1x user is not able to authenticate. Critical Links. configured for VLAN3 (see #3 in scenario 3). · Any other user that tries to connect to one of these ports.1x authentication takes place and the switch port is automatically configured for VLAN3. At this point the switch automatically configures the port to another VLAN – the Unauthorized-Client VLAN. the edgeBOX enforces the guest profile for this user and he is able to access the Internet but nothing else. IMPORTANT: be aware that this option erases all configuration. a successful 802. the connected host is able to get an IP through DHCP. LAN and a few servers located in VLAN2.Appendices 269 This is scenario 4 with a switch that supports guest VLAN when operating with 802. . A practical example: · Switch ports 4 and 5 are setup for 802. Use the "system factory" command to initiate a factory reset. will be isolated in VLAN6.1x with Unauthorized-Client VLAN assigned to VLAN6. These ports are located in a meeting Room. At this point he is able to get an IP address through dhcp and when trying to access the Internet he will be presented with the authentication page. User01 is able to work on his own VLAN and access any other places allowed by his Engineering access profile. · When User01 connects to port 4. As soon as the switch assigns the unauthorized-client VLAN to that port. With a successful web login authentication.

E-mail retrieving · RADIUS .Network devices monitoring · SSH .E-mail retrieving · LDAP .Network services monitoring · Munin .you'll be presented with or even need to select entries from edgeBOX network services list: · Billing .Network services monitoring · NTP .Authentication and Accounting · Samba .Phones Swicthboard · FTP .0 Help 13.edgeDESKTOP interface · eMI .Phone and Computer Integration · DNS .Windows Domain and File Sharing · SNMP .VoIP Telephony Critical Links.Web Server · IMAP4 .File Transfers · HTTP .Secure Shell · TFTP .Calls cost information · CTI .Simple File transfers · VoIP . Inc.such as the Firewall or user Privileges .6 Appendix F: edgeBOX Network Services edgeBOX Network Services list In several configuration situations .270 edgeBOX 5.Network services monitoring · Nagios .Remote Management Interface · FlashOperator . .Domain and IP Address translation · edgeDESKTOP .Authentication and Accounting · Monit .Date and Time Synchronization · POP3 .

See more specific details bellow.. "-".62}") · Password: · Size: from 1 to 127 · Characters ("[a-zA-Z0-9!"#%&'()*+. '+'. For regular users: · Username: · Size: from 3 to 64 · Characters ("^[a-z][a-z0-9-_. The characters right above the numbers in your keyboard are all good candidates too. / : . numbers and special characters like '_'. . "_" and ". Don't use simple passwords. write your password down on a paper and store it at home.Appendices 271 13./:.]{1. Inc. < = > ? @ [ ] _ ` { | } Specifically for the admin user: · Username: you can not change the administration username in edgeBOX.62}[a-z0-9]$") · must start with a low case letter "a-z" · the midle characters may additionally contain digits ("0-9"). with letters. Use passwords with at least 10 characters.<=>?@[]_`{|}]{1. it's always admin · Password: Critical Links.-. General Topics Change the password once in a while. . If you don't trust your memory.7 Appendix G: Usernames and Passwords The choice of Usernames and Passwords is a relevant topic when configuring edgeBOX.127}"): · lower ("a-z") and upper ("A-Z") case letters." · up to 62 additional lower case letters and/or digits can be used ("[a-z0-9]{1. digits ("0-9") and any of ! " # % & ' ( ) * +. away from your usual work place.

Inc. digits and '_' and '-' Critical Links.127}") · lower ("a-z") and upper ("A-Z") case letters. / : . one single leading '+' if needed.272 edgeBOX 5. .0 Help · Size: from 1 to 127 · Characters ("[a-zA-Z0-9!"#%&'()*+./:.-. . digits ("0-9") and any of ! " # % & ' ( ) * +..<=>?@[]_`{|}]{1. < = > ? @ [ ] _ ` { | } Specifically for phones: · Number: · Size: 1 to 20 · Characters: only digits ("0-9"). · Name and Password: · Size: from 1 to 20 · Characters ("[a-z0-9_-"): lower case letters.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful